
I . A ‘ J •) .V s , M ^•'■.^ ■■ -;i. i, 

= f;i:i?:M ;'ii; 

:W'':;:oF:(t;S!/:i;;;:i.!'!i!!!i 

■' •'■.'■ '-‘i .’'■'"."'i-' l)‘ ''-‘''.i’(^'-!'!| 


!FF'fF4|'E 

' •■ ; •■ •! Ml'* 'r- )■ - ' • >' ■' »' 

' .- , ■ ''i V .(j; \ >' •: 

.■hi; 

*' • ' ‘ . I « • • ; 1 1 * ■ ’ ' . I v; ' »' t* f . j< < ' f*' 
V ‘-s . • -- i';r ?••>• i‘i| ! ,' 


1 ‘ I ; ' ' I ' ;r • 'l i 1 I *1 ' ■;' 

:'v,-,:Wi : spA; i;: 
-I:.' ;l (.' i'^ 

I ■ ■>• ■ :fV :'•: I' ‘,K'! 


, j ' :!• •{'■ 'll 

' M .’Ml'' •'-■« . 1 ! ■ A :. .,. :.,• 
.,'1 r.i- -.•lit' . . 'j) 

' . E'v;;; 


•' ■• ' •{ »■ i’ •' ')'\'i ■ ) . I ! I'-i l' '. *1 1 

j''.» 'i'm- ‘'.1 !,' ^ JJ 

‘ •'iri-::.;:':- j'' I" : 

* •< ' / ' i • I • '} • • '. 'v ♦ 1 1 ? *} * 

’• ■•'■ r!} 


li 


.’I'! ' ‘‘V *’ .-- ')■ 1 

1 . , |-"',<.!W • ^‘ »' t >■ .’i* 

'.'.i 

■ I . '. 1 * i ' ! 1 ; - ' . 'I ■*'''• ■; i r i ' j 


• I.,."* , ■ . ■ ’r • f{! V ■ 







te TZ T 

MTsqt 

GopyrigM'N?- •Bo. 


CDF^IGHT DEPOSm 


GPO 













WM 


* . '. ^ .fcf .” 


^ 1 ' ' ” 

. • ■ # 


' I 




»> 


.V 


' « 


<’ T . / . 

I* 




" » ^ 


\ 1 ; 


' :/>> 4 \ •* 9 

{ ■ ' ''■ ' * r ; * !•{ 




r ^ r . 

i: > ’i '% ' 

\ * j. ^••' 


v'« 


A , ' . .'• 


' • I V ■ . '• 


>♦ * 





• . ' I ^ 


■ ' ! ■ ' 4 , ■ '•* 

* t • *, . 


• ^ 





.1 >1 


V' '^4 ^ ■ *•' r, 

,.<\f 


■ / 


1 ?r 






> w 


^ » 


» • 


4 i 
















• ' .-I 


■ ’i f 



,o' 


' » • > 


M M ^r>M -lawBi ;*r 

I v;'-,/. 

■:'■'.■■ v.'a; :(■#,*:■' 

* * ^ V*. ^ *#UI\ . » 



■ ' ^ ' " ■ /» * Av' 

v'-r /.'i' ;■“ 


CSiBk * > > >. J' tf% j .i . ^ 





• • • ft 

• ' •. *4 i 

■ ''^•'^;^^C . ••'• '''.iVvfc. 

> ' ‘ ^ u'l- ■ - . .. ‘-J-..'^ j 


^ ; .'-■i' !■* •> 


si*; 


' • * > ' 4 l 

' » I ■ * ’ • . ' n 

I . •'. « '• I . 'T » * 







BOOKS BY EVERETT T. TOMLINSON. 

St. Lawrence Series. 

Three Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price $1.50 each. 

CAMPING ON THE ST. LAWRENCE. 

THE HOUSE-BOAT ON THE ST. LAWRENCE. 
CRUISING ON THE ST. LAWRENCE. 

The War of 1812 Series. 

Six Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume, $1.25. 
THE SEARCH FOR ANDREW FIELD. ' 

THE BOY SOLDIERS OF 1812. 

THE BOY OFFICERS OF 1812. 

TECUMSEH’S YOUNG BRAVES. 

GUARDING THE BORDER. 

THE BOYS WITH OLD HICKORY. 

Our Own Land Series. 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume, $1.50. 

FOUR BOYS IN THE YELLOWSTONE. 

FOUR BOYS IN THE LAND OF COTTON. 

FOUR BOYS ON THE MISSISSIPPI. 

FOUR BOYS AND A FORTUNE. 

FOUR BOYS IN THE YOSEMITE. 

FOUR BOYS ON PIKE’S PEAK. 

War for the Union Series. 

Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume, $1.50. 

FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES. 

THE YOUNG BLOCKADERS. 

Stories of the American Revolution. 

First and Second Series. Cloth. Illustrated. $1.00 each. 

For sale by all booksellers, or sent postpaid on receipt of price 
by the Publishers, 

Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co., Boston. 












Captain Perry was now standing in the barge. — Page 346 


War of 1812 Series 


THE 

BOY SAILORS OF 1812 

A STORY OF PERRY’S VICTORY 
ON LAKE ERIE IN I8I3 


BY 


EVERETT T. TOMLINSON 

u 


AUTHOR OF “THE BOY SOLDIERS OF l8l2,“ “THE BOYS WITH 
OLD HICKORY,” “CAMPING ON THE ST. LAWRENCE,” ETC. 


ILLUSTRATED BY STANLEY L. WOOD 



BOSTON 

LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO, 


Published, August, 1913 


r 


"B o 


Copyright, 1913, by Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co. 


All Rights Reserved 


The Boy Sailors of 1812 


Borwoob Pre60 

BERWICK & SMITH CO. 

NORWORD, MASS. 

U. S. A. 



PREFACE 


T he heroic deeds of Commodore Perry on Lake 
Erie in the summer and fall of 1812 have made 
his name familiar in every American household. 
His victory was won just one hundred years ago. 
The story of it is stimulating to every one who reads 
or hears the stirring tale. The young Commodore 
achieved not only a great victory, but he brought 
honor to his country and to himself in overwhelming 
an entire fleet of the British. Never before had such 
a calamity occurred in the history of England's navy. 

This story is an attempt to enter once more into 
the stirring days when those deeds were done. The 
War of 1812 may not have been a great war in its 
campaign and strategy, but it clinched the independ- 
ence of the Colonies in which many had not felt se- 
cure since the day when it had been won. In this 
respect the War of 1812 is like an additional and 
decisive chapter in the history of the American Revo- 
lution. 

In times such as these, a century later than when 
the scenes of this tale were enacted, the problems 
confronting us as a nation are different from those 
solved by our fathers, but are no less perplexing. 


PREFACE 


With the great inflow of peoples from nations which 
have never known the price that was paid for the 
liberty we enjoy, there is special need of information. 
Patriotism ought to be stimulated to-day as much as it 
was a hundred years ago. There can be no grasp of 
present-day problems nor any sure way of solving 
them without a complete understanding of how the 
United States came to be, and what our forefathers 
did to win the freedom which they have left us as 
the best part of our heritage. 

The ardent patriotism of Oliver Hazard Perry, his 
courage, patience, unselfishness, and unswerving fidel- 
ity are elements needed in every stirring American 
character. Other and different problems may be 
solved by the possession or development of the same 
qualities which made Commodore Perry successful in 
his own way on Lake Erie. The value of any posses- 
sion largely depends upon the price that was paid 
for it. 

It is with the hope of arousing not only the interest 
but also the courage, determination, and persistence 
of my boy-readers that I have written this story of 
the heroic work of the young naval leader so long 
ago. 


Everett T. Tomlinson. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTEB PAGE 

I Mobe’s Discovery 13 

II The Coming of the British 25 

III Flight 38 

IV The Press-Gang 62 

V ' Across the Lake 65 

VI The Descent 78 

VII Which is Amos? 91 

VIII Release 104 

IX Changing Crews . . . . , 116 

X Retaken 128 

XI A Mysterious Epistle 142 

XII The Return 164 

XIII Guests 166 

XIV About Captain Perry 179 

XV The Long March 190 

XVI In the Midst of Alarms 201 

XVII Pursued 213 

XVIII On the Shore of Lake Erie 223 

XIX Scouting 234 

XX The Distant Sail 244 

XXI A Meeting on the Lake 254 

XXII A Younger Perry 267 

XXIII An Encounter in the Woods 279 

XXIV The “Camels” 290 

XXV A Struggle on the Water 301 

XXVI A Man ini a Boat 314 

XXVII Sail Ho! 326 

XXVIII The Battle of Lake Erie 338 

XXIX Conclusion , , , 350 



ILLUSTRATIONS 


Captain Perrt was 

(page 346) 


NOW 


STANDING IN 


THU 


BARGB 

Frontispiece 




PACINQ PAOB 


He wrenched HIM*ELr free, and darted 

OPEN DOOR 

TOWARD 

• • 

THB 

• 

42 

“Hiram! Hi! Come and get mb ” . ‘ . 

• 

• 

• 

94 i/" 

Again seteral iHOTS rang out behind him 

• 

• 

• 

220 

“Surrender', evert one of you!” . 

• 

• 

• 

294 

The action now became general 

• 

• 

• 

342 




‘ ^ - I 


f 

'• \ •• 




y^> 


mPk fJA;;y\\ V V, ' ^-■■ 4 •i>f.7<'^w®iiraN 

^IX* >*,/^ - •' - * >.' \ '.^ ->. \ r' 




-» »' 1 ' 


• V-.- I • • ►-’ 

*' • rv^^V•': 

V'? • 


' A < •v'*' ¥, • 


'r^v 


».. ■ «. 


I » 




a V^/T'' ' • • '« '■*• • • J ^V*\\ % . 

^'/'*5*'/'-’4^''’ •' '^^Cw(Jiw55f *'£r'^ * ^'- * ■ ' 

v\ 43 «MCi 5 ' 5 ^ ’vT . V « vVcV'f^ \i. '*,•'* 



»x--: 


P’ .'i f' ^ ^ ^ ^ • *1 •*■ X»* •^' ''^'- 5 ■' * • ■ '“• ^ ■ ' ¥ 'i» ■ . '• 


f.l 


3 l**.i 


rfc/ ••r . • ■ ‘ .' *' / 

^ '.y. ^ ' ■ . 


V ' 


^ 4 '. ' . I 


. L> 


'• >> 


•X ’'. t ^ • 


••^^-•^■ u ’n 


u- 


I 






V. ... •. i '^\'’ ■• . 

' 'u.< 



•x. 

V 




# 


I 


•W 

.1 


’>' '^ ,/ ■■ 

■ ' } 


^ . 


: ‘y :• . * • * . > • . 



I 1 




> ... 


■'m • 


• I 

t 






» I 


• » * 


?*v« • 

,* *.• A • • 


/.*, 


k< 

t 


( 

« 


- -.> 



4 .--*^ 


' . • >. ' 


*■* 


•< « 


. 'r. 


m ■ 

■:MM^k'' ' ■^■' •■ ''■y‘,'-' ■; '-■'1 -■ 

£Mir »; r ‘ -' ■* . 

mv/-'^ ■ .'>■•• . •■ 

' ... ,..k; •.-v-S'.' • •' ' ■•' ■’■■• • ' • 


n 


. • ■ •*• 

.V .-^ 

, k V 




^vTi, V v> ^in ■> v \ 1 ’■ ‘ 

■. j;;-v;L' ■ - V- ' ; / ■ MeESM^ra^ 


, V <• * * F - 

A • '* • 




O 




« 

< A 




►a. kh«t^ -Vv ■ ^ 

m ' 4m»j.:ii*-^i: .>.<k 


V 


A*.. 


• 'I 


•» *j! 


*■ 


l*-'^; ' y/V' ■ \ 

'•■. :■■ ■- 

-T.ec- 


. • 

r 






^ .iT' 


Jt • 





-i 


» . * 



/. ■ i 


r-iy 


’-11 





i*- ■* » ^'i f.‘*' '• ' 'X. ■'.' ..'-••v»* 'x^v-'* /*•**. k BHI 4- 


AEtx.^ 


*. V 















4 

•» 


4*, ' •• 

, .vV* V ..■• 2 " ' ?■ 


A-. 




".J ’ 




THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


CHAPTER I 

MORELS DISCOVERY 

^ CORING your gun, Prudy! Be quick! Don't 

•L-' wait a minute!" 

‘‘What's the matter, Amos?" 

“I suspect that More has treed the painter that 
killed the black calf last week. The dog is terribly 
excited and he won't leave the old chestnut tree down 
by the bars. He's tearing up the very earth around 
there!" 

“Oh, More always was a dog of no sense," re- 
sponded Prudy, nevertheless taking a rifle from the 
rude frame in the kitchen where several guns were 
kept in readiness for instant use. “He's probably 
treed a gray squirrel and makes as much noise about 
it as if he had captured Commodore Yeo." In spite 
of her apparent lack of confidence in the family 
watch-dog, Prudy did not delay and at once departed 
with her brother from the little log house. 

“It's lucky mother doesn't see us," suggested 
13 


14 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


Prudy, as she and her companion ran swiftly along 
the path that led beyond the barn toward the un- 
broken woods in the distance. “That time when I 
shot that wolf last fall she said was to be my last.^’ 
Prudy laughed as she spoke as if the stern decrees of 
her mother had been modified or were possessed of 
other elements than their manifest quality of com- 
mand. 

Together the brother and sister moved rapidly to- 
ward the place where More’s noisy barking was much 
in evidence. The approaching twilight lent a sombre 
touch to the picture of the sturdy pair, for Prudy 
was almost as strong and quite as tall as her brother, 
Amos Proper. The fact that she was seventeen and 
almost two years older than Amos was a sufficient 
explanation of the resemblances and differences be- 
tween the two as well. 

Behind them stood the little log house which their 
father, with such assistance as their mother and the 
older children could give, had, with his own hands 
erected and built of the logs, which his own strong 
arms had felled in the primeval forest. The place 
was all too small for the large family of the hardy 
pioneer for there were ten children to care for. 
Fortunately, so Silas Proper often said, he had just 
as many boys as he had girls. The upper floor of 
the house, because of this fact, had been made into 
two large rooms, that is if any room in the Proper 
abode might truthfully be termed “large,” — in one 


more’s discovery 


15 


of which had slept the five girls of the family, while 
the other was occupied by their five brothers. No 
one had thought of complaining, however, for in 1813 
on the shores of Lake Ontario the settlers were few 
in number and their possessions were even less. 

However, the Propers had for more than ten years 
been busy in subduing the neighboring wilderness. 
Trees had been felled, stumps had been burned, and 
the land had been broken in places where certain 
crops had been planted. Prom before sunrise until 
the sun set the hoys toiled in the fields or forest with 
their father. The three cows were milked by the 
girls and much of the hoeing also was done by them. 
The life was hard, the struggle was continuous but in 
spite of the difficulties it had certain pleasures of its 
own. 

The Proper family had come from ^^down east,” 
a somewhat vague term applied alike to Albany or 
New England. With them it implied both, for one 
generation of Propers had broken away from the oth- 
ers when the grandfather of Amos had taken his 
young wife from their Connecticut home and jour- 
neyed far, — at least the journey seemed far when 
the household goods had to be transported in an ox- 
cart, through what practically was an unbroken wil- 
derness, — to Dutchess County, New York. Prom 
this county in turn Amos’s father and his wife had 
gone seeking the lands farther west, following the al- 
luring reports of those who had been there before 


16 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


them. And now a part of the third generation was 
moving on, still convinced that they could reach the 
receding frontier, followed eagerly by many and yet 
apparently destined never to be caught up with. 
Amos’s older brothers, Hosea and Caleb, had, just 
as their own ancestors formerly had done, sought to 
overtake that promising region of “out west,” which 
seemingly retreated before every advance. 

Two of Amos’s sisters also had gone into homes of 
their own and consequently the quarters in the log 
house now were less cramped than once they had been. 

In addition to the brothers who had left the pa- 
ternal house for good and all, Amos’s two brothers, 
Jonathan and Hiram, were absent now together with 
their father, who had declared that he could not re- 
fuse when the country had called him so urgently, — 
and were taking their part for a time at least in the 
defense of their country against the invading British 
army. The time was 1813, and the War of 1812, 
sometimes called the second struggle of the American 
Colonies for their liberty, was now under full swing. 

But neither Amos nor Prudy was thinking of the 
war that morning in April, when with their guns in 
their hands they were running toward the place 
where More was noisily proclaiming his wrath over 
the discovery of an enemy of some kind among the 
tall branches of the huge chestnut tree, that stood 
alone near the bars of the pasture. 


more’s discovery 


17 


Amos Proper, fifteen years of age, tall and strong, 
had eyes of the same color as his sister and some of 
his features were strikingly like hers. There was the 
same resemblance in the color of the eyes and hair, and 
if they had been dressed alike each might readily have 
passed for the other, so strong was the family like- 
ness. 

Swiftly the boy and his sister drew near the bars 
which kept their three cows in the ‘‘pasture,” so 
called at least, though not much grass as yet had 
appeared. Ordinarily the cattle were allowed to 
roam in the woods and there find such scanty food 
as they might obtain. Old Betsy, the leader of the 
trio, wore a cow-bell dangling from her neck by 
means of which the roaming cattle were located when 
they wandered too far afield. Old Betsy now lifted 
her head and gazed curiously at Amos and Prudy, as 
they sped across the pasture. 

“If she knew we were after the painter that ate 
up her calf last week she wouldn’t be as quiet as she 
is now,” said Amos. 

“You’d better look out that the painter doesn’t eat 
retorted Prudy. “I guess the painter will turn 
out to be a squirrel, ’ ’ she added tartly. 

“Old More never made a fuss like that over any 
squirrel,” exclaimed Amos in a low voice as the dog’s 
excitement became more manifest. His barking had 
changed, his cries had passed into a series of wild 


18 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


bowlings and a succession of prolonged yelps or 
screams followed. 

“Come on, Prudy!^^ urged Amos. “More may get 
torn to pieces if you don^t get there pretty soon.’’ 

“I shan’t be very far away when you begin,” re- 
torted the girl; but she spoke more quietly and it 
was manifest from her manner that her interest and 
perhaps her excitement as well were increasing. 
More’s cries had passed into a series of loud bowlings 
and whatever it might be that he had treed it was 
clear that he at least firmly believed that danger was 
threatening. 

“It isn’t any squirrel,” said Amos a moment later. 

“What is it, then?” demanded his sister. 

“I’ll tell you what it is — Look at that dog!” 
Amos broke in sharply. “I don’t know whether he’s 
scared or just savagely mad. I never heard him 
make such a racket. It’s surely something up in the 
old chestnut tree.” 

“That’s plain enough, but what is it?” 

“Is your flint all right?” 

“Yes,” replied Prudy, as she stopped and exam- 
ined the heavy old flintlock she was carrying. “How 
is yours?” she added sharply. 

“Mine’s all right. Now then, you keep close be- 
hind me. If it’s a painter we ought to fire one at a 
time. If I miss then you take him.” 

“No, let’s both fire together. We’ll be sure to get 
him that way. ’ ’ 


moee’s discovery 


19 


“No! No! An army doesn’t fire every gnn at 
once. It keeps some for — what is that up in the old 
chestnut ? ’ ’ exclaimed Amos abruptly breaking in 
upon himself and looking curiously at the tree now 
only a few yards distant. 

“I don’t see anything,” said Prudy. 

“Well, More does, anyway,” said Amos sharply 
as the noisy yelping of the dog increased in vol- 
ume as soon as he caught sight of his approaching 
friends. 

“He thinks he does.” 

“He knows he does! Look at him! Why he al- 
most climbs that tree!” 

“I guess he wouldn’t if there was a painter 
there.” 

“There’s something there anyway,” said Amos. 
“You stay here while I creep up a little closer and 
see what I can see.” 

“I’m going, too, if you go,” declared Prudy posi- 
tively. 

“All right, sis, keep your gun — ^what is it?” 
Amos was pointing to an object that was almost 
midway up the tree and partly concealed by the 
trunk. 

“It’s a man.” 

“I believe it is,” assented Amos. 

“I know it is.” 

“Hi, there ! What are you doing up in that tree?” 
called Amos, loudly. 


20 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


Instead of replying the man in the treetop ap- 
parently was striving desperately to gain a position 
in which he would be more fully protected. 

“Who are you?^’ again shouted Amos. 

And still no response to the hail was made. 

‘ ‘ Come down from that tree and give us an account 
of yourself/’ ordered Amos loudly. The silence that 
followed was unbroken, except by the wild shrieks 
of More. 

“I’ll give you till I count three/’ again Amos 
shouted, as he raised his gun to his shoulder. In war 
time along the shore of the lake every man who could 
not prove that he was a friend was looked upon as 
an enemy and often treated as such. 

“Don’t shoot!” called the man in the tree. 

“Then come down!” 

“Call off your dog and I will.” 

“All right! Take More and don’t let him come 
near here,” said Amos turning quickly to his sis- 
ter. 

As soon as Prudy had seized More by the collar 
and dragged him to a spot from which she still could 
see what was taking place about the base of the chest- 
nut tree and yet could keep the dog, whose hair was 
on end, where he could not attack the stranger, Amos 
called again. 

“Come down now. The dog won’t touch you.” 

“You’re sure?” 


“Yes. Come down!” 


moee’s discovery 


21 


‘‘You won^t shoot, will you?’’ 

“Not unless you make me. Don’t wait. Come 
on down.” 

Slowly the stranger descended from his place of 
refuge. As he came within Amos’s sight the boy at 
first thought the man was old and feeble. A moment 
later he decided that he was only a hoy, but when at 
last the stranger slid to the ground, Amos could not 
determine whether the stranger was a boy or man. 
His clothing was in tatters, his hair was long and 
unkempt, his feet were bare and there were bruises 
and various marks on his face. 

“Tell me who are you,” begged the stranger, as 
Amos drew near holding his gun in readiness al- 
though it was plain that the stranger not only was 
unarmed, but also was very weak. 

“Better tell me first who you are,” retorted Amos. 

“Tell me where I am, then.” 

“Don’t you know?” 

“No. I don’t know. Tell me where I am.” 

Amos’s suspicions increased as he looked still more 
intently at the strange man before him. The boy 
now was convinced that the visitor was young, not 
more than twenty years of age. There was an ex- 
pression of fear about him that was not altogether 
due to the strangeness of the present meeting. In- 
deed, Amos somehow was convinced that the man 
had a hunted look and was in continual fear of ene- 
mies whom he could not see, for he repeatedly 


22 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


glanced behind him after the manner of some one 
who was fearful of danger from that direction. 

The clothing of the man though tattered and torn 
was also a source of suspicion in Amos’s mind, for 
in spite of its forlorn appearance he was convinced 
that the garb was that of a British sailor, though it 
was faded and worn almost beyond recognition. The 
fears of the lad naturally tended to increase his 
watchfulness, and he glanced at Prudy and More to 
make certain they were both beyond the reach of peril. 
The dog was emitting an occasional low growl now 
but he was no longer yelping, — apparently satisfied 
that he had done his full duty in holding the enemy 
in the tree and preventing him from doing any harm. 

‘^You’re on the shore of Lake Ontario,” said Amos 
at last answering the question of the strange being 
before him. 

‘‘Yes, yes, I know,” responded the stranger ex- 
citedly. “I know that. I can’t forget it,” he added 
with a shudder as once more he peered fearfully be- 
hind him. “But how far are we from York?” 

“York? York? [Why York is straight across the 
lake from here.” 

“No. No. That can’t be. You’re not telling me 
the truth.” 

“Yes, I am.” 

“Then I’m on the American shore?” 

“The United States of America, just as sure as 
you’re born,” replied Amos lightly. Somehow his 


more's discovery 


23 


alarm was less now as he saw that his prisoner was 
incapable of harm. Indeed his manner was so strange 
that Amos was beginning to believe that he either was 
lacking in some parts of his mental equipment or was 
terrified by some experience through which he had 
passed recently. 

‘‘I'm glad," said the stranger after a brief hesi 
tation and sighing heavily as he spoke. “Yes, I 
am." 

“Where did you come from? Wliere do you be- 
long? What is your name? When — " 

“Give me time to get my breath and I’ll tell you 
all about it," broke in the stranger. “I can’t tell 
you everything at once." 

“Tell me, then, what you were doing up in that 
chestnut tree," demanded Amos. 

“Keeping away from that dog," explained the man 
looking again at More, whom Prudy still was hold- 
ing by his collar. ‘ ‘ Can you keep him from biting ? ' ' 

“I guess I can if he thinks you are friendly." 

“I am," declared the man promptly. 

“Where did you come from?" 

“Tell me again if you are sure I am on the New 
York shore." 

“You surely are." 

“And you are friendly to the United States?" 

“Friendly? Friendly? I'm more than a friend. 
I've got a father and two brothers in the United 
States army, and I ought to be there myself." 


24 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


‘^Good! Then I guess you’re all right.” 

ahead and tell us who you are. I can’t stay 
here all day.” 

^‘And I don’t want to, either.” 

^‘You’re not going to if I have anything to say 
about it. Hurry up, now.” 

Where is your house?” 

^^Not very far away.” 

^‘You say your father and two brothers are in the 
army?” 

‘ ‘ That ’s just what I said. ’ ’ 

*^Then are you and this girl all that are home?” 

‘^Why? What do you want to know that for?” 

‘^Just to make sure, that’s all.” 

‘‘Sure of what?” 

“That — that — The man suddenly staggered and 
would have fallen if Amos had not instantly dropped 
his gun and seized him in his arms. 


CHAPTER II 


THE COMING OP THE BRITISH 

RUDY, take my gun,’’ called Amos sharply to 



^ his sister. The girl still not altogether free 
from suspicion of the stranger took the rifle from the 
ground, but even as she did so she was not able to 
repress her warning. ^^Look out, Amos,” she said 
in a low voice. ‘^He may be trying a trick on you.” 

Amos laughed scornfully as he placed one arm 
through his strange visitor’s and at once turned back 
toward the house. 

‘‘What shall we do with him?” asked Prudy. 

“Get him where he can be looked after,” replied 
Amos gruffly. 

“But he’s a British sailor,” protested the girl. 

“I don’t care if he’s Satan’s worst imp, he isn^t 
going to come to our house in any such shape as he 
is in now and not be taken care of — for a while any- 
way,” he added. 

“But he’s covered with — all sorts of things,” ex- 
claimed the girl, unable entirely to repress her feeling 
of revulsion as she looked at the disgusting appear- 
ance of the man whom Amos was assisting to move 
slowly up the lane. 


25 


26 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


And the feeling of Prudy was not unnatural. In 
addition to the ragged condition of his clothing, the 
man was indescribably filthy. Where he had been 
to be placed in such a plight, the girl, who had been 
trained by her mother to abhor even the appearance 
of “dirt,’^ was unable to conjecture. With a lake 
full of such clear water as Lake Ontario boasted, at 
least the outer coating of his filth might have been 
removed, she declared. Prudy ’s feeling of disgust 
was almost instinctive. 

‘‘Can’t help it,” maintained Amos sturdily, “he’s 
got to be looked after. He’s almost dead. Better 
save your breath and run on to the house and tell 
mother we’re bringing her a visitor.” 

Prudy, nothing loath, at once began to run, the 
dog following closely though he occasionally stopped 
and glanced questioningly back at Amos as if he was 
undecided just where his presence was most needed. 

Before Amos and his helpless captive or visitor 
(for the boy as yet was not able to decide to which 
character the man really belonged) arrived at the 
house he saw his mother and Prudy running swiftly 
to meet him. 

“Who is it, Amos?” inquired his mother as she 
drew near. 

“I don’t know.” 

“Prudy says he was up in the old chestnut tree.” 

“He was.” 


“Can’t he talk?” 


THE COMING OF THE BRITISH 


27 


‘^No, he fainted or got sick after he came down 
out of the tree. I think he^s sick. You’d better put 
him in a bed.” 

‘‘Not yet,” said Mrs. Proper decidedly. “He’d 
ruin any bed I have. Take him to the barrel first.” 

Mrs. Proper’s “Barrel” was a receptacle for rain- 
water which, in a storm, ran from the roof of the 
house. Near it stood a rude bench upon which a 
wooden bowl was left and near by was a small keg 
filled with “soft” soap. Here most of the daily 
ablutions of the Proper family were accomplished, 
and the directions of Amos’s mother were accordingly 
born of her first impulse when she saw the forlorn 
condition of the unexpected arrival. 

The stranger, however, apparently was unmindful 
of what was said about him or done to him. His head 
had fallen forward and his pitiful weakness was so 
manifest that not even Prudy was able to retain the 
suspicions she had cherished. 

“Poor man,” murmured the girl. “Let me help 
you, Amos,” she volunteered as he advanced to take 
an arm of the swaying stranger. 

“Keep away,” ordered Amos tartly. “Go and get 
an old quilt,” he added abruptly. 

“What for?” 

“ Do as Amos tells you, ’ ’ added Mrs. Proper. ‘ ‘ Get 
the old blanket that is hanging on the peg in the 
boys' room.” 

By the time Amos had led or rather carried the 


28 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


man to the barrel the girl had returned with the 
blanket. 

‘‘Now leave me here. No! Go upstairs and get 
me some of Caleb’s clothes. I guess they’ll about fit 
this man,” ordered Amos. 

“There isn’t any ‘some’ of Caleb’s clothes. You 
talk as if he had a room full.” 

“Get something, anyway.” 

The girl turned away as she had been bidden while 
her mother entered the house and brought out a 
large, coarse towel which she herself had woven from 
the fiax grown on the clearing. “Will you put him 
in the corncrib, Amos?” she inquired as she was 
about to turn away. 

“I don’t know yet. I’m not sure but that I’d bet- 
ter get a hoe to use on this fellow first,” said Amos 
grimly, as he once more glanced down at the stranger 
whom he had stretched upon the ground. The ut- 
terly wretched and repulsive appearance now was 
more manifest than before, but the closed eyes, emaci- 
ated cheeks and manifest misery of the motionless 
man were also much more in evidence. 

“There’s no other way out of it,” declared Amos 
stoutly. “Hoe or broom, I’ve got to work on him as 
if I were currycombing a horse. Mother, you get 
something for him to eat while I’m fixing him up. 
I guess he needs something inside of him almost as 
much as he needs soap and water on the outside.” 

For a long time Amos worked busily over the help- 


THE COMING OF THE BRITISH 


29 


less stranger. The man did not protest and indeed 
tried to help, though every moment his state of ex- 
haustion became more manifest. Who or what he 
was he had not as yet explained, but at last when 
Amos ceased his vigorous labors and assisted him to 
don some of Caleb’s clothing, he wrapped him in the 
blanket which Mrs. Proper had provided and bidding 
his guest remain on the steps of the corncrib he him- 
self turned to the house. 

In a brief time he returned with a wooden bowl 
filled with ‘^mush and milk,” which he at once 
handed the man. Without a word the stranger al- 
most seized the food and then ate so ravenously that 
in a short time the dish again was empty. 

‘‘More?” inquired Amos, smiling as he spoke. 

“Yes, I want more, — ” 

“You can have all you want.” 

“You are very good, but I mustn’t eat more now. 
Do you know how long it has been since I have 
tasted any victuals ? ’ ’ 

“No. How long has it been?” 

“I don’t just know, either, but I guess it must be 
three days.” 

“What?” 

“Yes.” The man spoke in a low voice and re- 
peatedly glanced about him in a manner that be- 
trayed great fear though the cause of his alarm was 
not manifest to Amos. “I don’t know just how 
long, but I guess it’s about that,” he repeated. “I’ve 


30 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


been in the skiff three nights. sure of that, any- 
way.’' 

“Well,” laughed Amos lightly, “if you were there 
three nights I don’t believe you left the boat in the 
daytime or between spells. Where did you come 
from ? ’ ’ 

The man hesitated and looked questioningly at the 
boy before him. “Do you mind,” he said at last, 
“if I wait before I tell you? You have been good 
to me, but I’d rather wait a bit before I tell you 
who I am.” 

“Are you a British — ” 

“Don’t say a word now,” broke in the stranger. 
“Would you mind if I took this blanket and had a 
nap in this corncrib?” 

“No! No!” interrupted the stranger as Amos 
suggested his coming into the house. “I don’t want 
a bed. I don’t want to go inside the house. This 
corncrib is just the place. Of course if any men 
should come here looking for me you won’t tell 
them where I am, will you?” The man’s voice 
was almost like that of a child pleading for pro- 
tection. 

“Who’d come?” said Amos lightly. “Sometimes 
we don’t see the face of anybody except the members 
of our family for three weeks at a time.” 

“That’s good!” exclaimed the stranger. “I’ll tell 
you all in a little while. There’s just one thing 
more, ’ ’ he added almost pathetically. “I wonder if 


THE COMING OF THE BRITISH 


31 


you would mind promising me that you’d keep a 
little on the watch. If you would and then would 
let me know if anybody — any strangers — ” 

“Soldiers?’’ interrupted Amos. 

“Yes, soldiers, or — or — anybody, — if you’d just 
promise me that you’d let me know if you should 
see any coming toward the house, why I could get 
away then, and I’d never forget it of you! Never!” 

“Which soldiers, redcoats, or — ” 

“Any kind.” 

Amos was perplexed hut the appeal of the man was 
too urgent to he resisted and the boy promised. As 
soon as he saw that the man had climbed hack among 
the ears of corn he turned away and went hack to 
the house. 

“Who is your visitor?” inquired Prudy of her 
brother when he entered. 

“I don’t know.” 

“I’m afraid your friend is fooling you.” 

“How is he fooling me?” demanded Amos sharply. 
“I’m glad my name is not ‘Prudence,’ anyway. I’d 
hate to he thinking always of the wrong side — ” 

“Don’t quarrel, children,” broke in Mrs. Proper 
smilingly. “We have too serious matters to think 
of now to waste any time over such things.” 

“But who is the man?” persisted Prudy. 

“I told you I don’t know.” 

“Why didn’t you find out?” 

“He is too nearly dead to talk now. He has 


32 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


crawled into tlie corncrib and gone to sleep. When 
he wakes up he ’ll tell us all about it. ’ ’ 

‘‘Or set fire to the house, or steal our sheep, or — ” 

“He doesn’t look just jaow,” interrupted Mrs. 
Proper, “as if he was in a condition to do any very 
violent deeds. He’s a poor, miserable-looking man.” 

‘ ‘ He may be putting it all on, mother, ’ ’ said Prudy . 
“Nobody knows what he may do before morning. 
He may shoot us all in our beds — ” 

The girl stopped abruptly as a long, low growl 
from More startled the little group. Every hair on 
the back of the dog apparently was on end and he 
was standing in the open doorway looking toward the 
pasture from which Amos and his sister had recently 
come. 

“What is it. More?” demanded Amos. 

The growls were repeated but the dog did not move 
from his position. 

“He sees something,” said the boy in a low voice. 

“Better say he hears something. Probably it’s an- 
other painter,” laughed Prudy. 

Meanwhile Mrs. Proper had slipped outside the 
door and looked toward the corncrib, but their visitor 
was not to be seen. 

“It’s something that More doesn’t like. I guess 
I’ll go out and see what it is,” suggested Amos. 

“And leave the women folk to their own danger?” 
asked Prudy demurely, though her eyes were spark- 
ling with fun as she spoke. Her demure and seri- 


THE COMING OF THE BRITISH 


33 


ous-minded younger brother was at once her special 
pride and torment. 

“If you begin to talk I guess there won’t anything 
stay around very long,” retorted Amos. “I’ll go out 
and see what it is that has stirred up More. I never 
saw him act so before. He has begun the day — 
Hello!” Amos sharply broke in upon himself. He 
was standing in the doorway and looking toward the 
distant pasture. 

Impressed by his manifest interest, both Prudy and 
her mother advanced to his side and looked eagerly 
in the direction in which Amos was pointing. 

For a moment all three were silent. Just emerging 
from the woods was a band of a half dozen men. 
They were still so far distant that it was not possi- 
ble to discern their uniforms though from the way 
in which they were moving it was plain that they 
were coming toward the house. 

“Who are they?” whispered Prudy at last. 

“I guess they’re from that British brig I’ve seen 
off and on for the past three days,” said Amos. “I 
didn’t think they’d have the impudence to land — ” 

“Maybe they’re after this man,” abruptly sug- 
gested Prudy. 

“That’s so. I hadn’t thought of that,” said Amos 
sharply. “What shall we do?” 

“You look after these fellows if they stop here,” 
said Prudy quickly. “I’ll look after the man they 
want.” As she spoke the girl seized a wooden bowl 


34 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


in which she placed some corn and at once leaving 
the house, went to a place near the corncrib and be- 
gan calling the hens about her. 

‘‘Those men will come here,^’ said Mrs. Proper as 
she glanced once more at the little approaching band, 
“Don’t show that you are afraid of them, Amos, but 
don’t do anything to arouse their anger. I shall go 
about my work and you’d better be busy, too. I 
don’t think they have seen us as yet.” 

As his mother turned back into the room, Amos 
looked at the guns that were in the rack on the wall, 
but instead of taking any from its place he went to 
the woodpile in the rear of the house and taking 
an axe began his daily task of splitting wood for the 
fireplace. 

He saw that his sister had left open the door of 
the corncrib and he started toward the place to 
make the door secure again but as he did so Prudy 
ran to him to protest. “Leave the door just as it 
is!” she ordered. 

‘ ‘ Why ? The man is in there and — ’ ’ 

“I know he is in there and that is just why I want 
the door left open.” 

“They’ll find him.” 

“No, they won’t, at least if the crib looks as if 
we didn’t care if they examined it, the men will 
be less likely to think there is anybody hiding in it. ’ ’ 

“Is the man still in there?” whispered Amos. 

“Yes, he’s under that pile of bags,” replied Prudy, 


THE COMING OF THE BRITISH 


35 


pointing to some coarse sacks that were thrown in 
apparent confusion about the place. “Go hack to 
your chopping/^ she suggested. “I’m busy feeding 
the chickens, you see.” 

Amos did as he was bidden, but while he was lustily 
swinging his axe he was keenly watching his sister 
who was scattering some kernels of corn on the ground 
manifestly as much to the delight as it was to the 
surprise of the hens at being fed at this untimely 
hour. 

And yet both the boy and his sister were listening 
intently for the sound of approaching men, and sev- 
eral times Amos ran to the corner of the house and 
cautiously peered at the band. 

There was now no question as to their destination. 
The men had turned from the lane and were only a 
few rods distant. The sight was more than Amos 
was able to endure calmly. Calling to his dog to keep 
closely to his side he shouldered his axe and advanced 
to the front of the house where he awaited the com- 
ing of the men, who now he saw were clad in the 
uniform of the British navy. 

“Here’s our man,” said one of the approaching 
force as he saw Amos. “Tell me, lad, have you seen 
any one to-day? ” 

“I have seen my mother and my sister and — ” 

The men laughed and the ensign who had spoken 
said sharply, “I mean has any man been here of 
late?” 


36 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


‘^Yes, sir.’^ 

‘‘When?’’ 

“About four days ago, my father — ” 

Again the men laughed and the face of the young 
spokesman flushed. “We’re looking for a man that 
got away from the Duke of Gloucester — a gunboat of 
His Majesty — ” 

“Was he one of the crew or a prisoner?” asked 
Amos glancing behind him as his mother advanced 
and took a position by his side. 

“He’ll be both when we get him,” said the leader 
angrily. “Have you seen him?” 

“Did he wear a British uniform?” 

“I fancy he did.” 

“I guess you’ll have to look somewhere else. I 
don’t believe a redcoat would dare show himself 
around here. He ’d be in trouble in short order. ’ ’ 

“That’s where you may be yourself if you don’t 
curb that tongue of yours.” 

“What is it you wish?” spoke up Mrs. Proper 
quickly. 

“One of our men has escaped. We suspect he is 
somewhere hereabouts. Have you seen a stranger 
hiding?” 

“If a man were ‘hiding’ I probably should not 
‘see’ him,” said Mrs. Proper demurely. 

“It is too serious a matter, madam, to be trifling 
about it. We want our man and shall have to search 
your place.” 


THE COMING OP THE BRITISH 


37 


‘‘You would not do that if my husband and my 
boys were here,” dauntlessly said the woman. 

“We take our chances,” retorted the ensign tartly. 
“I am convinced you have seen our man. If you 
give him up or inform me where he can be found we 
shall not trouble you more.” 

“ I do not know that I have seen the man you want 
but even if I had I should never betray him to your 
press-gangs. ’ ’ 

“Have a care, madam,” said the officer warningly. 

“I have had little else but ‘care’ since you be- 
gan your work on the lake.” 

“You may have more.” 

“I do not know how that is. I have a husband 
and four sons who are — ” 

“Did you see our man?” interrupted the leader. 

“I saw a man some time ago who looked as if he 
had been seized by one of your press-gangs. He was 
ragged and dirty and his suffering must have been 
horrible. ’ ’ 

“How long ago did you see him?” 

“Let me see — I think it was sometime this week. 
Wasn’t it, Amos?” she inquired as she turned to her 
boy. 

“I guess so, if you mean the beggar that More 
treed.” 

The ensign abruptly turned to his companions and 
angrily said, “The woman is hiding him. We’ll have 
to search the place. Come on, boys.” 


CHAPTER III 


FLIGHT 

I GNORING the protests of Mrs. Proper and laugh- 
ing at the threats of Amos, the band at once began 
a hurried search of the premises. The peril of a 
landing party of British sailors on the shore was com- 
paratively slight, because only a few scattered ham- 
lets or homes were to be found in the entire region. 
Nevertheless the leader was eager to be gone and 
several times urged his followers to quicken their ef- 
forts. 

The house first was entered, and while two men 
went to the cellar, two more sought the upper rooms 
while still another busily inspected the rooms below. 
All through the search one man remained as guard 
and watched just outside the door. 

The indignation of Amos became keener as he saw 
the destructive work of the visitors. Boxes were 
smashed, doors broken down and slight regard was 
had for the rights or feelings of the family. Even 
the guns were taken from the rack and appropriated 
to their own use. 

Amos Proper was a sturdy lad, mature for his 
38 


FLIGHT 


39 


years, for unusual responsibilities had been placed on 
his boyish shoulders in the absence from home of his 
father and older brothers. The rugged life of a 
pioneer also had developed his self-reliance and the 
heavy labors of those early days had made his mus- 
cles firm and strong. He was not without confidence, 
too, in his own ability to meet existing conditions. 
The result of these combined forces was that, as Amos 
watched the men prowling about the place, looking in 
the house and barns for the man for whom they were 
searching, his anger steadily increased until at last 
he decided to try to do something to thwart them. 

In apparent carelessness he dropped the heavy door 
at the outside entrance to the cellar into its place 
and heavily barred it as soon as the men departed 
from the house to continue their search. He waited 
a brief time till his visitors passed the comcrib which 
they concluded after a hasty inspection could not be 
the hiding place of the man they wanted. 

“Did you find anything in the cellar?’’ Amos asked 
in a low voice of two of the sailors when they turned 
from the corncrib toward the barn. 

“No.” 

“Did you see that barrel of eider in the corner of 
the cellar?” 

“No,” responded one of the men promptly. “Is 
there a barrel there?” 

“There was a little while ago. I guess it’s still 
there.” 


40 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


‘‘Come on, Tom. We’ll go back,” said one of the 
men eagerly to his companion. 

“The eider is pretty ‘hard/ ” suggested Amos. 

“All the better,” laughed the sailor as he looked 
toward the other members of the party who now were 
entering the barn. “We didn’t get a good look at 
that cellar, mate,” he added as he winked at his com- 
panion. Quickly the two sailors, quietly followed by 
Amos, returned to the house and speedily ran down 
the low cellar stairs. 

“In the southwest corner,” whispered Amos who 
was close behind the men. 

No sooner had the eager sailors darted down the 
stairway, than Amos noiselessly closed the heavy cellar 
door and dropped the heavy bar into its socket. Both 
men were now shut in the damp, dark, underground 
room. 

Waiting a brief time to ascertain whether or not 
the two men realized that they had been shut in, and 
as the silence was unbroken, Amos quickly concluded 
that the sailors either were too intent upon finding 
the “southwest corner,” or that they had no sus- 
picion as yet of their predicament, and then he ran 
hastily toward the barn. 

There he found his visitors ransacking the place. 
Only a small amount of hay remained in the mow 
but it all had been turned over in the search for the 
missing man. 

As Amos entered, the leader said harshly, “It will 


FLIGHT 


41 


be better for you, young man, if you tell us where he 

‘‘Who?” inquired Amos blandly. 

“Don’t stop to talk! Tell us where he is,” re- 
torted the sailor angrily. 

“I can’t do that.” 

“You can, but you won’t. Well, I fancy we’ll have 
to make the bird sing that won’t.” Stepping quickly 
forward he seized Amos by the wrist of his right 
hand, and began to twist it. But the lad was almost 
as strong as his tormentor, and thrusting out his foot 
suddenly he pushed his assailant over it and at the 
same time wrenched himself free, and darted toward 
the open door. 

Springing to his feet the chagrined sailor, now furi- 
ously angry, darted after the fleeing lad. Around 
and around the barn ran pursuer and pursued, Amos 
doing his utmost to escape while his enemy’s anger 
increased. The boy now realized how foolish he had 
been to interfere with the work of his visitors. His 
better plan would have been to leave them free to 
do as they chose in the hope that soon they would 
depart for their boat which he was confident had been 
left on shore. 

Suddenly Amos was aware that a companion of his 
pursuer had joined in the chase and that one was 
approaching while the other was not far behind. 
Turning sharply he dashed toward the woods in the 
distance. He was aware of his peril for either of the 


42 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


men might use his gun. But the decision was made 
before he had time for thought and fear provided an 
additional incentive. 

^‘Stop! Stop or I’ll shoot!” called the angry 
sailor. 

Ignoring the command Amos glanced hastily over 
his shoulder and saw the man raising his gun. .The 
moment was critical but the lad was in too desperate 
a plight to falter. Exerting himself to the utmost 
of his strength he ran on, expecting every moment 
to hear the report of the gun. 

For some reason which he was not able to under- 
stand, there was no discharge. Had the flint fallen 
from the lock? That must be the true cause, he con- 
cluded, and, as he was aware that he was unharmed, 
he found himself near the old chestnut tree in which 
the wretched man whom the sailors from the gun- 
boat were seeking, first had concealed himself. 

For a moment he was tempted to seek the same 
refuge, but the fear of his armed pursuers was too 
keen and he kept on his way toward the woods be- 
yond. 

Once within the shelter of the great trees he felt 
safer. As he looked before him he saw the blue waters 
of Lake Ontario sparkling in the sunlight. Directly 
in front of him, drawn up on a small sandy beach, 
he saw the yawl in which his visitors had come ashore. 
The sight instantly suggested a plan. He ran hastily 



He wrenched himself free, and darted toward the open 

DOOR. — Page 41. 


V 



FLIGHT 


43 


to the boat and exerting all his strength he endeavored 
to push it back into the water, but his efforts were 
unavailing. The boat was too heavy. 

Looking behind him into the forest he could not see 
any of his pursuers. Perhaps they had abandoned 
the chase and had gone back to join in the search for 
the man for whom they had come ashore. The con- 
viction that in any event his enemies soon would be 
returning to the shore provided an incentive for re- 
newed exertion. 

The boat, however, was too heavy for Amos alone to 
move. Several attempts convinced him of his in- 
ability and he was about to abandon the attempt when 
he saw not far distant on the shore several round 
logs not more than three inches in diameter and about 
four feet in length. Instantly he secured them and 
after a hard struggle succeeded in placing one of them 
under the bow of the yawl. Then throwing his 
strength against the little boat he succeeded in 
moving his craft a short distance. By alternately 
placing the other ‘^rollers’’ in front he at last pushed 
the yawl into the water and then hastily scrambled 
on board. 

In a moment he seized an oar and began to scull. 
He had gone only a few yards when for the first time 
he became aware of a gunboat not more than a quar- 
ter mile out in the lake. The vessel apparently was 
cruising about without any particular destination and 


44 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


as Amos watched her he concluded that she was wait- 
ing for the return of the half-dozen men who had 
come to his home. 

He was between two perils now. If his seizure of 
the yawl should be seen by the crew of the gunboat 
another boat might be sent in pursuit of him. At the 
same time the band might at any moment return to 
the shore and discover his seizure of their yawl. 
Either horn of the dilemma was perilous and in des- 
peration Amos put forth all his strength. 

The clumsy craft moved slowly but there was com- 
fort in the thought that it was moving. Steadily he 
guided it around the little point of land to the west. 
There at least he would be shut out from the sight 
of his enemies. Beyond the point was a little cove 
which Amos well knew. If only he could run the 
boat in there he could hide it, he was convinced, so 
effectually that not even its owners would be able 
to find it among the heavy overhanging bushes that 
lined the shores. 

Perspiration now was streaming down the face of 
the eager and excited boy. Not for a moment were 
his efforts relaxed. The clumsy yawl rolled and 
turned but all the time was driven slowly, though 
steadily, ahead. Glancing behind him as he arrived 
at the mouth of the cove Amos saw that apparently 
he was the only one on that part of the lake. The 
water was shallow now and the lad began to pole. 
He drove his boat within the shelter of the bushes 


FLIGHT 


45 


and then not satisfied that he was safe, sent it several 
rods farther. 

At last he could go no farther. Cautiously he 
slipped ashore and then made the yawl fast to a 
nearby tree. His enemies were without any means of 
returning to the gunboat he thought grimly as he 
began to pick his way among the trees. He was going 
back to the house to see how it fared with his mother 
and sister. The thought that by taking their boat he 
might compel his visitors to remain on the shore was 
somewhat disquieting but Amos did not stop. He 
knew his way in all the region and pushed steadily 
forward until once more the old chestnut tree stood 
before him. 

As he looked at his home in the distance he was 
unable to see any one near it. Several minutes 
elapsed and still no one appeared. Had the men 
gone? Had anything happened to his sister and 
mother? The questions were pressing and the eager 
boy was about to start toward the house, when sud- 
denly he saw Prudy come out of the building fol- 
lowed by one of the marauding band. Amos watched 
them as they both stopped and seemed to be holding 
an animated conversation. The sailor was gesticu- 
lating excitedly but as Amos was too far distant to 
hear what was said he of course was unable to dis- 
cover the subject of the conversation. Fearful of 
harm coming to his sister he watched and waited, re- 
solved that if she should be in danger he would rush 


46 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


to her aid, no matter what his own peril might be. 
But in a brief time both Prudy and her visitor re- 
entered the house. Their action was mysterious and 
the anxiety of Amos increased. A wait of several 
minutes did not bring any solution. The silence that 
rested over the region was unbroken. The April 
sunshine was warm and mellow and the green that 
was beginning to appear on the trees and in the fields 
changed its tints as an occasional passing cloud in- 
tercepted the light of the sun. 

Unable to repress his anxiety longer, Amos, by a 
circuitous route, began to draw nearer the house. 
This was not difficult for the woods were on every 
side of the little clearing. The crows seemed curious 
as to his purpose in moving so hastily among the 
trees and noisily proclaimed their protests or ques- 
tions. Otherwise the continued silence was ominous 
and Amos ’s determination to go back to the house was 
strengthened. He felt that he must be with his 
mother and sister no matter what the consequences 
to himself might be. 

Still he did not abandon his cautious approach. 
From the woods he managed to enter the barn and a 
brief inspection convinced him that no one was there. 
From the barn he moved to the shelter of the corn- 
crib, where he waited several minutes without hear- 
ing any sound from the house. But the very silence 
itself was oppressive. He was confident that the man 
whom he had seen with Prudy had not left the place. 


FLIGHT 


47 


How many others might be there too he could only 
conjecture. Were the two men whom he had shut 
in the cellar still there? 

At last unable longer to endure the suspense, Amos 
crept stealthily toward the kitchen. As he gained the 
window he slowly raised himself and peered within. 
To his amazement he saw Prudy and the young leader 
of the British band seated at the rude table and the 
latter was engaged in a simple repast. 

Instantly Amos’s anger blazed forth and without 
any further consideration for his own safety he turned 
to the door, opened it abruptly and boldly entered 
the room. 

The young sailor leaped to his feet at the unex- 
pected appearance and reached for his pistol which 
had been placed on the table. 

Where have you been, Amos?” inquired Prudy 
quietly as she explained to her guest that the enter- 
ing boy was her brother. 

“Where is mother?” abruptly demanded Amos. 

“She’s here,” replied Prudy. 

“Is she hurt?” 

“No. What makes you think she was hurt?” 

“I didn’t know,” replied Amos glancing at the 
young man as he spoke. 

“We aren’t harming the Yankee women,” said the 
sailor. 

“How long since?” retorted Amos warmly. His 
feeling toward the enemy was strong and not unlike 


48 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


that in which his father and brothers and indeed the 
entire country, for the matter of that, shared. 

‘ ‘ Never, said the sailor quietly, though the color 
in his cheeks deepened as he spoke. 

‘‘Humph!’’ remarked Amos. “Have the men 
gone?” 

“All but one.” 

“This one?” inquired Amos glancing at their vis- 
itor. 

“Yes.” 

“Why doesn’t he go too?” 

“I’m waiting for the man we came for. My word I 
You ought to keep a civil tongue in your head,” said 
the young sailor. 

“I can’t,” retorted Amos. “There are too many 
of the redcoats hereabouts.” 

“They’ll teach you better manners.” 

“You mean your press-gangs will teach us? 
They’re the most we have seen since the war began. 
You’re about the first man that has dared come 
ashore and you wouldn’t do it either if my father or 
brothers were here ! ’ ’ 

“Your insolence — ” 

“Don’t mind a little thing like that,” broke in the 
boy to whom the sight of an officer in the opposing 
fleet was a source of bitter anger. 

“What I want to know is what you are staying 
here in our house for?” 

“Amos!” protested Prudy, “you ought — ” 


FLIGHT 


49 


‘‘Yes, I know I ought, broke in Amos angrily. 
“It seems to me that this fellow has good courage to 
come to a house where he isn’t wanted and quarter 
himself on the people.” 

“You ought to be treated with the cat — ” began the 
young officer angrily. 

“Does every press-gang carry a cat-o ’-nine-tails 
along with it?” 

“We take only what belongs to us, — whether it’s 
men or other things.” 

“Where are the rest of your gang?” Amos was 
confident that he had little to fear from the boyish 
leader and consequently his boldness increased. 

“Gone back to the Duke of Gloucester/’ 

“Is that the name of the tub off the shore?” 

“Have a care, — ” warned the sailor still more an- 
grily. 

“Oh, I have plenty of ‘care,’ ” retorted Amos. 
“We’ve had it ever since you came over here. Are 
all your men gone?” 

“Yes.” 

“And you’re the only one left here?” 

“I fancy I am.” 

“Did you get the man that you were chasing?” 

“Not yet.” 

“Why not?” 

“We haven’t found him — yet.” 

“He was about as stout as a picked chicken,” 
laughed Amos derisively. “His clothes were all torn 


50 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


to pieces. They looked like a string of holes tied 
together. He was so weak he couldnT run. How 
long have your men been chasing him ? ’ ^ 

“Upon my word,’^ said the young sailor now gen- 
uinely aroused. “You appear to be quite well in- 
formed about this man. Perhaps you will help us — ’’ 
“Oh, 111 help you if you 11 get seven more of your 
crew to join in. You ought to have a baker’s dozen 
to get one poor fellow like that. Was he a volunteer, 
or was he one that your press-gang got? He looked 
as if he had had a visit from the pirates.” 

“You are an insolent young cub!” 

“Tastes differ. Now if I had six able-bodied sail- 
ors from the Buhe of Gloucester to help me, and yet 
I couldn’t catch one poor, starved, good-for-nothing 
man that got away, I’d go straight to Admiral Yeo 
and tell him he ought to get the whole British fleet 
under weigh.” 

“Amos, you have said enough!” 

The boy glanced at the open doorway as the sug- 
gestion was quietly made by his mother, who was 
standing there. “All right, ma’am,” he said cheer- 
fully. “I was just explaining to His Majesty,” and 
the boy tauntingly bowed low to the furious young 
sailor, “that they ought to have more men if they 
want to get that poor fellow, who came here. I guess 
he’s the one they are after. Six men aren’t enough 
to take a British tar. If he was a Yankee, they’d 
need a dozen.” 


PLIGHT 


51 


‘‘He is a Yankee/^ said the sailor. 

“No wonder he got away from you then! But 
what I^d like to know is, if he’s a Yankee what is he 
doing on a British gunboat?” 

“What we tell him to do.” 

“You must have told him a good deal, if his looks 
went for anything.” 

“Amos!” warned his mother. 

“Yes, ma’am,” again replied the boy. 

“Go and bring up the cows.” 

“Where is More?” 

“I don’t know. I haven’t seen him since — ” 

Mrs. Proper stopped abruptly as three men clad in 
the uniform of the British navy at that moment en- 
tered the door. 


CHAPTER IV 


THE PRESS-GANG 

T he approaching men were quickly recognized as 
a part of the band which had come to the house 
earlier in the day. Amos was stealthily attempting 
to withdraw but as he watched the visitors he saw 
that they were seriously troubled and his curiosity 
speedily overcame his fears though he still remained 
standing near the kitchen-door prepared for flight 
if occasion demanded it. 

“What’s the trouble?” demanded the young leader 
as he faced his men. 

“Yawl’s gone,” responded one of the sailors touch- 
ing his hat as he spoke. 

“Gone? What do you mean?” 

“It’s gone, sir.” 

“Where did you leave it?” 

“On the beach.” 

“And it isn’t there now?” 

“That’s what it isn’t, sir.” 

“It must have got afloat.” 

“Beggin’ your pardon, sir, Tom, here says as how 
he knows and so do I that couldn’t be so.” 

“But it must!” 


52 


THE PBESS-aANG 


53 


The sailor was silent, feeling perhaps there was 
nothing more to be said. 

Amos’s excitement now was keen and in his eager- 
ness he pressed forward until he could see the faces 
of the chagrined sailors. His own expression, how- 
ever, was blank, but his look of innocence did not 
deceive his sister who glanced keenly at him and 
scowled. 

‘‘What’s to be did, sir?” inquired the sailor sim- 
ply. 

“Where are Jack and Sim?” inquired the ensign. 

“Beg pardon, sir, but we was thinkin’ mayhap they 
was with you.” 

“Didn’t they go with you?” 

“No, sir.” 

“Where are they?’* 

“That’s what we would like to know, sir.” 

“Do you believe they took the yawl?” 

‘ ‘ Can ’t say, sir, as to that. ’ ’ 

“You haven’t seen them?” 

“Not since we left this place.” 

“How long ago was that?” 

“Better than a couple o’ hours.” 

“Where have you been?” 

“Lookin’ for the yawl, sir.” 

“Did you try each direction on the beach?” 

“We did, sir.” 

“And didn’t you find any trace of it?” 

“We did not, sir.” 


54 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


‘^It’s strange,’’ murmured the young leader greatly 
perplexed. Suddenly as he looked up he discovered 
a grin on the face of Amos and he said abruptly, 
*‘Boy, do you know where the yawl is?” 

*‘If I did I wouldn’t tell you,” declared Amos 
boldly. 

‘‘I believe ycu know something about it.” 

‘^I believe he do too, sir,” said the sailor eagerly. 
^‘We chased the lad to the shore but he gave us the 
slip. He couldn’t ’a’ launched the yawl alone. 
There must have been somebody along with him,” 
he suggested. 

“Tell me, lad, who helped you?” inquired the 
young leader quickly as he turned once more to 
Amos. 

“Nobody.” 

“Beggin’ pardon, sir, he couldn’t ’a’ lifted the boat 
alone.” 

“I didn’t say I did,” retorted Amos. “All I say 
was nobody helped me. And there wasn’t any- 
body.” 

“Do you know where the yawl is?” 

Amos was silent. 

“Do you know where the yawl is?” again demanded 
the young leader. 

Still Amos did not reply. 

“Take the little rascal down to the shore!” or- 
dered the ensign. As he spoke he stepped hastily 
behind the boy to prevent his escape by the door 


THE PRESS-GANG 


55 


and at the same time two of the sailors advanced and 
seized him by the shoulders. Before the family was 
fully aware of what was being done Amos was taken 
from the house. One of the men was left in charge 
of the place, while the ensign and the other two sail- 
ors with their prisoner were on their way to the place 
where the yawl had been left on the shore. 

When the hand arrived at the place they were seek- 
ing, the boat was not to be found. To all questions 
Amos was silent. Whatever the motive in the mind 
of the young leader may have been, when he com- 
pelled Amos to accompany him to the beach, the 
stubborn silence of his prisoner at last made him 
angry. 

At his command a signal-fire was kindled on the 
shore and in a brief time a boat put out from the 
Duke of Gloucester. When at last the approaching 
yawl was driven on the shore, the ensign briefly ex- 
plained the loss of their boat and expressed his opin- 
ion than some one had taken it. 

‘‘Get aboard,’^ ordered the lieutenant, who in re- 
sponse to the signal had come ashore. “If the Yan- 
kees are prowling around here we don’t want to get 
caught. Who’s this?” he demanded as for the first 
time he noticed the presence of Amos. 

“He’s a lad who knows more than he will tell.” 

“About what?” 

“Our yawl for one thing. His father and two 
of his brothers are in the Yankee fleet.” 


56 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


“And both my brothers-in-law!’^ spoke up Amos 
promptly. 

“Why aren’t you there, too?” inquired the ofiScer 
smiling slightly at the boy’s promptness. 

“I’m going in the fall if any British are left on 
the lakes by that time.” 

The officer’s smile changed to a scowl. “If you are 
so keen to go to sea why don’t you serve in one of 
His Majesty’s fleets?” 

“I’m not an Englishman.” 

“Where did your father come from?” 

“My grandfather came from Devonshire.” 

“Then he’s a British subject.” 

“My father is an American!” 

“No, sir. ‘Once a Briton always a Briton.’ I 
think we ’ll take you with us and place you where you 
belong.” 

Amos’s face turned the color of chalk as he heard 
the officer’s words. Protests were of no avail and 
besides he was too proud to beg, though the end was 
different from what he had expected. He regretted 
his bold words now. The thought of his sister and 
mother alone in the old house brought tears to his 
eyes. Suddenly he recalled the fact that the two 
men whom he had shut in the cellar had not been re- 
leased. Where they were their calls for help would 
be smothered and it was more than doubtful if they 
could be heard outside the cellar. 

The men were ill-natured over the loss of the yawl 


THE PRESS-GANG 


57 


and apparently also were fearful of the presence of 
enemies. At the lieutenant’s word the yawl was 
manned, the additional men were seated and prep- 
arations made for a speedy return to the Duke of 
Gloucester. Amos had not spoken since he had re- 
ceived the word that he was to accompany the men. 
He stood waiting on the shore, not without hope that 
the lieutenant would not enforce his order. 

^ ^ In you go ! ” ordered the officer as Amos still lin- 
gered. 

‘‘Let me go back home,” pleaded Amos. “My 
mother and sister — ” 

“They can look to those bold Yankees who are 
guarding the shore,” interrupted the officer with a 
brutal laugh. 

“But I can’t do much, if you do take me.” 

“In you go!” roared the irritated man. “We 
haven’t any time to waste here on crying brats! Get 
aboard!” To emphasize his order the lieutenant be- 
stowed a kick on the trembling boy, and then roughly 
pushed him into the boat where, as he fell over the 
men, each added a kick or cuff of his own. 

The rough treatment aroused the troubled Amos. 
He would not let the men, whom his father and broth- 
ers were fighting, see his weakness, he said to himself. 
Crouching in the bow out of the way of the oarsmen, 
he was silent as he watched the receding shore. Each 
familiar spot took on a fresh meaning now. Just 
beyond the bend, around which a little while before 


58 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


he had taken the British yawl, was a long bed of 
weeds, where he had caught several huge pickerel the 
preceding week. Up on the hill beyond the house 
were the maple trees, which in March he had tapped 
for their sap. Even the log house was attractive in 
the late afternoon sunlight. A wave of homesickness 
swept over the troubled boy that was almost more than 
he could endure. 

By a supreme effort he controlled his feelings and- 
stolidly watched the sailors as they swung back and 
forth in their labors at the oars. ‘‘Press-gang!’’ 
“Press-gang!” “Press-gang!” the very oars seemed 
to be saying, as they creaked in the oarlocks. The 
men all looked the part, too, Amos thought, as he 
almost fell in with rhythm of the swaying bodies. 
They were a brave band — to seize a boy when no one 
was near to take his part. He decided that no mat- 
ter how keenly he might suffer he would not give his 
captors the privilege of seeing his weakness. 

Not a word was spoken by any one in the yawl 
until the boat drew near the Duke of Gloucester. In 
silence, too, the little craft was run alongside the 
larger vessel which had come up into the wind 
and with flapping sails was awaiting the coming of 
the yawl. 

The lieutenant saluted the captain as he sprang 
upon the deck and at once explained that the other 
yawl which had been used by the first band in their 
search had been lost. 


THE PRESS-GANG 


59 


‘ ^ Lost f * ’ demanded the captain. * ‘ Do you mean the 
Yankees took it?’’ 

^‘No, sir. It must have gotten adrift.” 

‘^Didn’t the lubbers know enough to haul her up 
on the sand?” 

‘‘They say they hauled her twenty feet up from 
the lake.” 

“And yet lost her?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“They deserve the cat! They’ll get it, too! That 
was the best yawl the Duke of Gloucester had. What 
have we here?” abruptly demanded the captain as 
he for the first time became aware of the presence of 
Amos on the deck. 

“He’s a lad we brought back with us. He lives 
near the shore and his father and brothers are in 
Chauncey’s fieet.” 

“What did you bring him here for?” 

“We can use him in place of the Yank that got 
away yesterday.” 

“He can’t be much worse,” grunted the captain. 
“Tell me, lad,” he added turning to Amos, “what is 
your name?” 

“Amos Proper.” 

“Your father is a Yankee?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“Where did your family come from?” 

“Devonshire.” 

“Not much Yankee about that! These Devon- 


60 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


shire Yankees make pretty good Jackies in our navy. 
Have you ever been to sea?’’ 

‘‘No, sir.” 

“You’d like to, I fancy?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“Well, you make yourself useful aboard the Duke 
of Gloucester and there’s no telling where you will 
bring up in the end.” As Amos did not respond the 
captain added, “I’ll speak a good word for you my- 
self. To-morrow, I shall let you swab the deck. You 
can put him into the watch, to-night, Lieutenant 
Goodwin,” he added as he turned away. 

The boat was now under motion and apparently 
was headed for the open lake. Despite his anger 
and anxiety Amos noticed how trimly the vessel was 
built and how well she was handled. Her bow was 
cutting the blue waters of the lake almost like a 
knife. The breeze, which often died away as sunset 
drew near, now held steady and the gunboat almost 
like a thing alive sped toward the open waters of the 
lake. 

Despite Amos’s depression he noticed all these 
points as he followed the lieutenant forward. In- 
deed, the strangeness of his condition at the moment 
seemed to deaden the sense of his enforced departure 
from home. Even his feeling of anxiety for his 
mother and Prudy was something that belonged to 
some one else or to some other place. 

He was roused from his numbness, however, when 


THE PRESS-GANG 


61 


the lieutenant said with a laugh, “We’ll fit you out 
with a suit and make a Jackie of you before you can 
tell what happened.” 

“I’m not a Jackie! I shan’t serve in the British 
navy! I don’t — ” 

“You’ll do what you’re ordered,” retorted the 
young officer sharply. 

Amos did not respond to the implied threat but 
when they entered the forecastle, and the lieuten- 
ant tossed him a suit he said quietly, “I’m no Brit- 
isher.” 

“You will be soon.” 

“I shan’t wear that suit!” the lad declared stoutly. 

The lieutenant’s response was a blow that felled 
Amos to the floor. There were two or three sailors 
in the place who, whatever their feelings may have 
been, looked stolidly at the prostrate lad and did not 
speak. 

Almost beside himself with rage Amos leaped to 
his feet and sprang at his tormentor. The latter 
backed away and said grimly, “Do you want to be 
put in irons?” 

“I don’t care what you do! You stole me! You 
took me when you knew I was not a British boy. 
You may kill me if you want to, but you can’t make 
me work for a press-gang! I’m glad my father and 
my brothers are fighting you! I wish I was with 
them! I’d—” 

“That’s enough,” said the lieutenant abruptly. 


62 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


^‘You’re only a boy or I^d shoot you as I would a 
rabbit. Here, mates, he said turning to the silent 
sailors, ‘‘put the uniform on him.’^ 

The men stepped forward to obey and suddenly 
Amos’s frantic efforts ceased. One of the men nodded 
his head assuringly and then even winked at the ex- 
cited boy, or at least Amos fancied that he did. Pas- 
sive in their hands Amos soon was clad in the uniform 
of a British sailor, the young officer looking on mean- 
while in apparent good nature. 

“Now, then, lad! You are clothed and I fancy 
you are in your right mind, as well. Don’t ever re- 
fuse to obey orders again. I’m disposed to be a bit 
easy with you, but you will have to do your part like 
a man and the sooner you begin the better it will 
be for you and all of us.” 

Amos looked almost stupidly at the officer while 
he was speaking, and made no response when he 
ended. 

“Will you let him bunk with you, Tom?” asked the 
lieutenant of one of the men. 

“Aye, aye, sir. ’E can share my watch, too, if 
’e like.” 

“I don’t know about that. You’ll have to fix that 
up with the others. I don’t want the young Yankee 
left to himself very much.” 

“We’ll keep a heye on him,” responded Tom 
gravely. 

“Very well,” said the officer and at once departed. 


THE PRESS-GANG 


63 


heye/’ said the sailor, whom the lieutenant 
had called “Tom,’’ when Amos was left with the two 
men. “You are a fierce lad t’ stand up t’ an hoffi- 
cer. Did ye know he has th’ right to shoot you?” 

“Shoot me? "What for?” 

“Might come pretty close t’ a mutiny, lad.” 

“I’m not a member of the crew of the Duke of 
Gloucester, I’m not a British subject. I’m a Yan- 
kee — 

“Leastwise you’re now aboard th’ Duke of Glou- 
cester, I’m thinkin’.” 

“They made me come! I didn’t enlist! They 
stole me! And there’s nobody home with my mother 
or Prudy,” Amos added with a choke in his voice. 

“That may all be so. I’m not disputin’ your word, 
lad, but ye’re here now and not there and th’ best 
thing for you is t’ put up with hit.” 

“I’ll never put up with it!” declared Amos pas- 
sionately. “They stole me! They made me come 
aboard ! ’ ’ 

“How ye goin’ ashore, lad?” asked Tom not un- 
kindly. 

“I don’t know. I’ll go somehow! I won’t stay 
here! I — ” 

“I’m thinkin’,” broke in the sailor in a still more 
friendly manner, “that ye’ll do no such thing. Did 
ye never hear o’ what happens t’ th’ Jackies that 
desert?” 

“I’m not deserting. I don’t belong here, I—” 


64 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


“D^ye think as those observations would count much 
wi’ the captain o’ th’ Duke of Gloucester? ” 

‘‘Why wouldn’t they?” 

“ ’E wouldn’t know th’ meanin’ o’ them terms. A 
British is a British where ever th’ sun happens t’ 
shine on him. No, lad, th’ only thing ye can do is t’ 
stay right ’ere — ” 

“I won’t stay here!” broke in Amos chokingly. 
“It isn’t right! I don’t belong here!” 

“There was a chap aboard not long ago that used 
t’ talk just like the way you’re talkin’ now. ’E 
didn’t get a chance t’ talk very much though.” 

“Why not?” 

“Why, it was this way — What between the cat an’ 
the hirons and th’ brig — ” 

“Did they whip him with th’ cat-o ’-nine-tails?” 
asked Amos aghast. 

“They did.” 

‘ ‘ And he was a Yankee ? ’ ’ 

“That’s w’at ’e said ’e were.” 

“Wasn’t he?” 

“I’m thinkin’ ’e lived ’ereabouts.” 

“And they made him serve on the Duke of Glouces- 
ter?’’ 

“That’s right, sir.” 

“Where is he now?” asked Amos suddenly. 

“Ye might ask th’ leftenant but hif Hi was you 
Hi don’t think as ’ow Hi’d do hit, — leastwise just 
yet.” 


CHAPTER V 


ACROSS THE LAKE 


S Amos said no more the sailor also became si- 



lent. If the lad had not been so busied with 
his own thoughts he would have seen that the ex- 
pression on the bronzed face of Tom was not devoid 
of sympathy, but the night was now creeping on and 
in the deepening twilight he did not understand. 
Later, Amos was to learn of the large-heartedness of 
the rough old sailor, whom all the crew called Tom. 

Amos was convinced now that the wretched man 
whom he and Prudy had found in the old chestnut 
tree was the ‘‘Yankee’’ of whom Tom had spoken. 
The lad shuddered as he recalled the sailor’s refer- 
ences to the “eat,” and “irons,” the “brig,” and va- 
rious other forms of punishment. And all for what? 
Because the man had refused to serve in the navy 
of any nation but his own. And Amos did not blame 
him, he declared hotly to himself. He was glad his 
country was fighting to protect its own men from the 
marauding press-gangs, which seized unprotected 
men and compelled them to serve on board of some 
British man-of-war. He had heard of instances 
where these brutal gangs had even entered homes 


66 


66 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


and, seizing the men of the family while they were 
seated at the table with those of their own kin, had car- 
ried them away, declaring that they were subjects of 
King George and must take their part in the defense 
of his possessions. Perhaps hardest of all — at least 
Amos considered such tales hardest to bear — were 
the reports of American vessels being stopped on the 
high seas and searched by some British war vessel 
on the pretext that its officers were looking for some 
of their own men. And usually they found them! 
At least they found those whom they claimed to be 
British subjects. ‘‘Once a Briton, always a Briton.’^ 
How Amos detested the word. It was almost as hard 
as was the detestable service into which the helpless 
men were forced, brutally seized on such occasions 
and borne away to a labor on the vessels of another 
nation on the flimsy pretext that they still were sub- 
jects of the British King and as such must do their 
part in protecting his kingdom. 

Bah! “Once a Briton, always a Briton!’^ Amos 
in disgust and anger repeated the expression several 
times, each mention increasing his feeling of anger. 
And yet he was in the same predicament himself 
now, he thought savagely. He, too, had been seized 
and carried on board one of the enemy’s vessels. He 
was to be compelled to serve as one of the crew. When 
his hot feelings rebelled he thought grimly of the 
wretched-looking being who had found a hiding-place 
in the corncrib. If he had only known, thought 


ACROSS THE LAKE 


67 


Amos. The marks of suffering on the man’s face, 
his torn clothing, his filthy appearance all were now 
easy to understand. 

At all events the man in some way had contrived 
to escape from his tormentors. If one was able to do 
that why not another? The thought was inspiring, 
and the troubled lad at once took heart and began 
to think seriously of his own future. 

The Duke of Gloucester was headed now for the 
open lake, — though what her destination was to be 
he had no way of knowing. All that he thought of 
was that if one man could get away, then his own 
future was not entirely without hope. 

As Amos thought longer of his own difficulties and 
prospects, he decided that he would not openly re- 
fuse to obey orders. ‘ ‘ Irons, ” “ the eat, ” “ the Brig, ’ ’ 
— all the various forms of punishment in case he did 
disobey orders, only made his escape less likely. He 
might require all his strength. Certainly the poor 
fellow whom he had left in the corncrib had looked 
as if a less heroic treatment would have been no dis- 
advantage to him — to say the least. 

No. Amos decided he would not openly rebel. His 
best chance of escaping might be lost in this way and 
nothing be gained in its place. He would keep si- 
lence, do what he was ordered to do, watch his op- 
portunity and when the right time came make a break 
for freedom. 

The decision once made, the lad’s heart became 


68 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


lighter. The anxiety which he knew his mother would 
suffer over his unexplained absence was almost as hard 
for him to bear as it was for her. It was one of the 
cruel experiences of war and as such must be borne. 
And as he had listened to Tom’s stories of what had 
befallen the other victim of the press-gang — for Amos 
insisted to himself that he had been ^‘pressed” in- 
stead of having been made a prisoner — he was glad 
that his country at last had taken up the defense of 
its own people. Better not have a country at all, he 
said, than to have one that is too cowardly or petty 
to make the value of its citizenship recognized every- 
where. The past years had been hard, he well knew 
that. Most of the men in the region had entered the 
service — some on land, and some to fight in the fleets 
of Commodore Chauncey. It was worth all it cost! 
He too would do his small share as soon as he re- 
gained his freedom. His mother no longer would 
oppose such action when she heard his story. 

Up to this time Mrs. Proper had induced his father 
not to take the lad with him into the service, though 
Amos had begged to go every time his father or 
brothers returned home for a brief furlough. Some- 
body must look after the place and defend her and 
Prudy. Such was the mother’s ingenious way of 
trying to make her husband feel that her youngest 
boy was the defender of the home. 

It was different now, Amos assured himself, and 
he would not have any difficulty in securing his moth- 


ACROSS THE LAKE 


69 


er’s ccnsent for him to enter the service after she 
once understood that he too had been a victim of 
the dastardly press-gang. 

Somewhat reassured by his reflections, Amos quickly 
heeded Tom’s hail and at his bidding shared in the 
‘^grub” of the crew. His presence among the men 
apparently did not arouse much comment, for which 
the lad was thankful. 

Later, when Tom told him that he was to share his 
watch, Amos was still more comforted, for the rough 
sailor had not been unkind, while the very fact that 
the lad had already had some conversation with him 
helped him to feel that he was not altogether among 
strangers. 

On deck, Amos saw that the stars had appeared in 
the sky, but although he looked carefully all about 
the horizon not a trace of land could he discover. 
The Duke of Gloucester was in the open lake. The 
presence of peril was not feared hereabout and yet 
Amos was deeply impressed by the discipline on 
board. A crew of twenty-six, including the officers, 
was carried, and the handling of the long, slender 
sloop was admirable. To Amos’s eyes all was not 
only new and strange, but also deeply impressive and 
when at last he ^ burned in” he was feeling somewhat 
depressed. What would the Yankees be able to ac- 
complish against such training and equipment? 

Vague reports of several victories won by the fight- 
ing vessels of the United States over their enemies on 


70 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


the high seas had been brought home by Amos’s 
father or brothers. The entire country was singing 
the praises of these bold sailor lads. That was all 
very well, thought Amos, but it was vastly different 
from the conditions on the Great Lakes. There the 
crews were hardy and eager, but without experience. 
The vessels on which they sailed had been hastily 
built and some of them of timber that was green. 
Indeed, in some cases only a few weeks elapsed in the 
transformation of giant forest trees into the planks 
that covered the decks of gunboats. 

Then, too, many of the British seamen were men 
of experience. They had been sailors since boyhood, 
having served in some of the fishing fleets before 
they had been transferred to the navy. They were 
at home on the ocean or lake. It was true that some 
in each crew had come from the sparsely settled re- 
gions of Canada, but it was equally true that most of 
the leaders and many of the sailors had been brought 
across the sea. 

With the coming of the morning there was also a 
return of courage to Amos’s heart. The clear air, 
the sunshine, warmer than it had been for many 
weeks, even the excitement of his new surroundings, 
all helped to restore a feeling of confidence. The lad 
was more clearly enabled to see now how useless his 
struggle against his captors would be. He must agree 
not to disagree, and then, ever watchful of his oppor- 
tunities, seize the first that should present itself. 


ACROSS THE LAKE 


71 


As the Duke of Gloucester had long been out of 
sight of land Amos was convinced that she was 
headed for the Canadian shore. Just where she 
would land, he did not know, nor did Tom, when he 
asked the old sailor for his opinion. 

“She’s headed nor ’-nor ’west, ” said Tom. 

“Wliat’s that mean?” asked Amos when he was 
standing beside the old sailor near the forward rail. 

“York lies heyon’.” 

“Ever been there?” 

“Hi ’ave.” 

* ‘ Do you think we ’ll stay there long ? ’ ’ 

“Look ’ere, lad,” responded Tom gruffly, “do ’e 
know what ’appened t’ th’ man what asked too many 
questions?” 

“But I want to know,” asserted Amos. 

“Well, ’e might bask th’ captain.” 

“He wouldn’t tell me.” 

“Hi ’ave doubts m’self,” said Tom grinning as he 
spoke. 

“I guess I’ll have to wait.” 

“That is more’n likely.” 

And Amos waited. The Duke of Gloucester's ac- 
tion was marvelous in the eyes of the lad who never 
before had been on hoard such a craft. When the 
War of 1812 was declared, the Americans had only 
one or two vessels on the lake that could by any 
stretch of the imagination he classified as war-ships. 

The British, however, had a half dozen. Since the 


72 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


outbreak of hostilities Commodore Chauncey, in com- 
mand of the American ‘ ‘ fleet, and Commodore Teo, 
his British opponent, had both been bending all their 
energies toward the construction of .new vessels. 

A fair degree of success had attended their efforts 
and, in 1813, Commodore Chauncey ’s fleet was com- 
posed of the following, — the flagship Madison, the 
Oneida, the Fair American, the Hamilton, the Gen- 
eral Tompkins, the Asp, the Pert, the Growler, the 
Ontario, the Scourge, and the Lady of the Lake, 
a total of eleven vessels, besides the transport the 
Raven. The commodore’s headquarters were at 
Sackett’s Harbor, the eastern extremity of Lake On- 
tario, where General Dearborn with a part of the 
Army of the North also was stationed, at that time. 

Not far away, just where the great lake empties its 
waters into the majestic St. Lawrence, was Kingston, 
in the direct route to Montreal and Quebec. At 
York (now Toronto) and in the region of Niagara 
the British also had forts and at the time when this 
story begins it was confidently believed by all that 
as far as the North was concerned the second year 
of the war would see its greatest activities along the 
Niagara borders. 

Amos Proper, living as he had, in his secluded 
home, had not had many opportunities for securing 
information concerning the plans or operations of 
the army, his chief source of information being the 
rare visits of his father or brothers. As a eonse- 


ACROSS THE LAKE 


73 


quence, if he had been told of the stirring events 
which were soon to be enacted and in which he was 
to share, the statement would have been almost in- 
credible. 

Early the following morning the shore of Canada 
was sighted. Amos was standing beside Tom near 
the rail and as the distant outline of the coast be- 
came more distinct, the lad turned to the sailor and 
asked, ‘‘Do you know now where we^re bound for?’^ 

“Looks like it is York, lad.” 

“What is there?” 

“Some blockhouses, a fort, a few men and — the 
British lion.” 

“Have you ever been there before?” 

“Aye, lad.” 

“Is it much of a town?” 

“Not yet.” 

“What do you mean by ‘not yet^?” 

“It’s goin’ to be a big town, some day, though I’m 
thinkin’ neither o’ us will ever live long henough 
t’ see it. But — ” 

“We’re going into a bay of some sort,” interrupted 
Amos. 

“Aye. It’s a bay of some sort. The blockhouses 
are halong the shore, an hup bey on’ is the fort, an’ 
the soldier boys.” 

“How many men are stationed here?” 

“Sometimes seven or eight ’undred.” 

“ Are that many here now?” 


74 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


^‘You sure know has much ’bout that has Hi do.” 

‘ ‘ Why ? Are we to stay here ? ’ ’ 

‘‘Stop yer talkin’. There’ll be time enough t’ find 
out some things, hanyway.” 

The swift sloop glided over the waters of the har- 
bor and Amos, who was not busy at the time, noticed 
the beds of weeds that were growing far out from the 
shore. He gazed curiously at the rude blockhouses, 
several of which he could see as the Duke of Glou- 
cester skimmed the shore of the bay. He saw scarlet 
clad soldiers too, and the sight was so interesting that 
for a moment he forgot his own troubles as he watched 
the exciting scenes by which they were passing. 

At last the sloop came to anchor, Amos having done 
his part in taking in the sail. Of course, he was 
ignorant of the plans of the commander and did not 
know whether or not he was to be kept on board or 
sent ashore. 

His suspense was relieved when an hour later Tom 
came to him and said, “The hensign would like a 
word with you haft.” 

Amos at once went to the quarters indicated and 
there found the young sailor who had been the leader 
of the little band that had visited his home in their 
pursuit of the missing man who was hidden in the 
corncrib. 

“How is it, lad?” said the ensign as Amos drew 
near. 

“How is what?” 


ACROSS THE LAKE 


75 


wonder if a Yankee ever answered a question 
except by asking another/’ said the sailor good-na- 
turedly. ‘‘What I mean, my dear sir, is this: do 
your quarters on hoard the H. M. S. Duke of Glou- 
cester suit you?” 

“I’m not going to stay here,” replied Amos 
quickly. 

“Oh, tarry here,” said the ensign mockingly. 

“I sha’n’t.” 

“Well, before you take your final departure I want 
you to answer two or three questions.” The young 
sailor waited a moment for Amos to indicate his will- 
ingness but as the lad remained silent, he continued: 
“Was that man we wanted really at your home?” 

“He was.” 

“While we were there?” 

“You ^vere within two feet of him.” 

“When?” 

“When you were looking for him.” 

“Look here, young man, did you hide him?” 

“I helped.” 

“Why, may I inquire?” 

“I’d help any man to get away from your press- 
gangs.” 

‘ ‘ Why don ’t you help yourself ? ’ ’ 

“I’m going to.” 

The young ensign stared at the boy in silence a 
moment and then laughed loudly. “You are the 
cock of the walk, I see. Wait till you get a taste of 


76 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


the cat. It will make you as gentle as Simeon Jones 
was. ’ ^ 

‘‘Who is Simeon Jones 

“He’s the man you helped. Look here, my lad, 
did you have anything to do with the two men who 
were missing?” 

‘ ‘ I locked them both in the cellar. ’ ’ 

“You did?” 

“Yes, sir, I did,” declared Amos boldly. 

“You would be wise not to let the captain hear of 
that.” 

“I sha’n’t tell him if you don’t.” 

“My eye, but you are a quaint brat, I perceive. 
Tell me one thing more — is your sister — ” 

“Which sister?” broke in Amos. 

“The one I saw. Are there any more?” 

“Yes, sir. I have other sisters.” 

“Married?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“What is this girl’s name?” 

“Prudence — we call her Prudy for short.” 

‘ ‘ She isn ’t married, is she ? ’ ’ 

“No.” 

“She is a fine lass — much too good to be a Yan- 
kee. ’ ’ 

“That’s what makes her worth anything!” 

“Never mind that. I am going ashore and may be 
at the fort two or three days. As a special favor the 
captain says I may take you with me. ’ ’ 


ACROSS THE LAKE 


77 


^‘Where’s the sloop going to be?’^ 

“She is going on to — shell be back in a few days/^ 
the young sailor hastily corrected himself. 

Amos was silent a moment before he said simply, 
“ 1 11 take my chances and go with you. ’ ’ 

“I’m sure I appreciate your kindness,” laughed 
the ensign good-naturedly. 

In a brief time Amos and Tom were rowed ashore, 
neither of them suspecting that they were entering 
upon the most thrilling experiences of their lives. 


CHAPTER VI 


THE DESCENT 

^ 4 NT OR ’EASTER brewin’, I’m thinkin’,” said 

1 N Tom as he and Amos stepped ashore. 

‘‘Looks like it.” 

“Keep us ’ere a spell.” 

“Yes,” responded Amos absently. He was look- 
ing about him with interest, and, without attracting 
the attention of his companion, was trying to think 
of some scheme by which he might escape from the 
region. To get away from York might not be diffi- 
cult but to cross the lake was another and more dif- 
ficult problem. Already he had found Tom’s advice 
good to follow. The sufferings of the man whom they 
had called Simeon Jones had been heroic, but some- 
how Amos was convinced that the better plan for him 
to follow was not to rebel but to be watchful of his 
opportunity and when it came seize it quickly. 
“Where are we going now?” he asked as he looked up 
at his companion. 

“Bless me! Th’ lad is hall han hinterruption 
p’int.” 

“I’m a whatf^^ 


78 


THE DESCENT 


79 


'‘A hinterruption p’int. Don’t ’e know what that 
is?” 

^‘No.” 

“Well, ’e will find hout. All th’ time ’e wants 
t’ know where ’e’s going.” 

“I do want t’ know. Wouldn’t you?” 

“Who? Me? No, lad. Hi take hit as hit come. 
What for should Hi be worritin’ hover somethink Hi 
can’t change?” 

“I don’t know,” replied Amos more thought- 
fully. 

Conversation ceased when they drew near the fort. 
The redcoats were on every side and Amos was quite 
impressed by their appearance though Tom professed 
to have little respect for the “lubbers,” who couldn’t 
tell the difference betwixt a “belayin’ pin an’ a spin- 
naker.” 

It was night when the two sailors returned to the 
Dulce of Gloucester, and Amos’s thoughts were more 
busied than before with his plans of getting away. 
He had noticed the yawl in which he had first been 
carried to the sloop, but it had been taken in tow and 
the watch would be quick to discover any attempt to 
slip away in it. 

Another project had been to do his work quietly 
and faithfully on board and remain with the crew 
until the sloop should go to the Niagara region, as he 
believed from what Tom had hinted it would do in 
the near future. Once there, it might be possible 


80 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


for him some dark night to swim ashore after he had 
dropped from the side of the gunboat. 

Still another dimly formed plan was to hide in the 
vicinity of York until after the departure of the 
Duke of Gloucester. It was true the region was al- 
most a wilderness but the boy was confident that some- 
how he could find food enough to sustain him until 
he might be able to find some craft in which he would 
put to sea. That his schemes were wild and vision- 
ary, the lad as yet had no conception. 

The waters of the lake were even more boisterous 
when night fell than they had been in the daytime 
and Tom’s ‘‘nor’easter” was certainly at hand. To 
Amos the approaching of a storm meant little, for he 
did not join it in liis thoughts with the predicament 
in which he now found himself. 

Early the following morning Amos was awakened 
by sounds he never before had heard. Not only were 
men shouting and running about, on the deck of the 
Duke of Gloucester, but he was convinced that there 
were shouts and calls not far away and that great 
guns were also speaking. 

Not positive whether the sounds were those of 
friends or foes the excited boy hastily donned his 
uniform and rushed up on deck. The ‘sloop was roll- 
ing in the trough of a heavy sea and pulling hard 
upon her anchor. As Amos appeared he was almost 
thrown to the deck by the tremendous report of one 
of the guns of the sloop. 


THE DESCENT 


81 


Intensely excited the boy scrambled to his feet, 
held on to the rail and looked toward the lake. He 
was scarcely able to credit the sight which he beheld. 
Along the entrance to the harbor he saw a fleet ! He 
counted until he made out eleven vessels. And he 
could easily discern the flag from the masthead of 
the flagship. The fleet belonged to his own country ! 
The Yankee men-of-war had come! 

Thrilled by the sight and thought Amos was ready 
to shout when he thought that the Duke of Gloucester 
was the only hostile vessel in the vicinity. His relief 
was at hand and soon he would be again in his old 
home ! 

The Duke of Gloucester was manned by a crew that 
had the true British spirit and were not willing to 
surrender without an attempt to defend themselves. 
But the odds were so heavily against the gunboat 
that resistance was worse than useless. She might 
Are her guns, but hemmed in as she was the defense 
would mean only a wanton destruction of life. 

Besides, the confident Britons doubtless believed 
that the approaching fleet of Yankees would not be 
able to take the fortress at York and in the event of 
their defeat it would be better to preserve the Duke 
of Gloucester for their own future needs on Lake 
Ontario. 

Amazed as Amos was by the stirring sight, he was 
ready to join in the shouting when the sloop was 
surrendered and a force of Yankees was sent on board 


82 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


to hold the vessel and prevent the crew from escaping. 
With others he was shut in the forecastle and com- 
pelled to await the issue of the coming contest. The 
men all were sullen and silent and Amos quickly de- 
cided that his own feelings must he concealed. But 
it was difficult not to show his elation over the com- 
ing of his friends. 

His thoughts speedily were affected by the reports 
of the guns which would be followed by shouts that 
sounded more or less distant as the wind bore them 
to the ears of the prisoners. Silence would follow 
the loud reports and then again the cheers would pro- 
ceed a volley. 

Amos could not know that young General Zebulon 
Pike had been placed in command of the seventeen 
hundred Yankee soldiers whom Commodore Chaun- 
cey’s fleet had just transported from Sackett’s Har- 
bor. General Dearborn who was in command of this 
army had been taken ill and young Pike had been 
selected to take his place. 

Nor could the lad see that after the attack and 
the fall of the first blockhouse the Americans, with 
cheers and calls and shouts, were pushing up the 
shore toward the second. This, too, fell after a sharp 
struggle and as its defenders withdrew toward the 
fort their enemies were in close pursuit. 

Suddenly the air was rent by a report that was 
almost deafening. The very sides of the Duhe of 
Gloucester seemed to Amos to be falling apart after 


THE DESCENT 


83 


the vessel had been lifted to an incredible height. 
He saw his companions stare at one another in ter- 
ror. Some of the men were whimpering like fright- 
ened children. 

‘‘What is it, Tom?’’ one of the sailors tremblingly 
inquired. 

“The fort is blown hup, I’m thinkin’.” 

“No,” suggested another boldly. 

“Y’ might be givin’ hus your ’pinion,” suggested 
Tom glaring at the man as he spoke. 

“It’s the magazine.” 

“I’m thinkin’ y’re correct,” admitted Tom nod- 
ding his head thoughtfully. 

“Some o’ th’ Yankees won’t stop this side o’ Land’s 
End.” 

“ ’Twill be lucky hif some o’ hour poor chaps don’t 
join ’em on th’ way.” 

“What’s that?” demanded another sailor somewhat 
nervously as a strange sound was faintly borne into 
the forecastle. 

“Singin’,” declared Tom gruffly after a brief si- 
lence. 

“Who’s singin’?” 

“Th’ Yanks.” 

“Then they aren’t all dead.” 

“They don’t know henough t’ know when they 
hare dead,” growled Tom. 

“What’s that they’re singin’?” asked the first 
speaker turning to Amos. 


84 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


‘‘Yankee Doodle/^ replied Amos enthusiastically. 

“Y’ look has hif y’ liked it/^ said Tom sourly. 

“I do,” responded Amos promptly. 

“Not ’ere?” 

“Anywhere. It shows they aren’t all killed any- 
way. There they go! Just listen to that, will you?” 
added the excited boy as the sound of cheering — 
“three times three” — was heard. 

“They’ll never stand up afore th’ reg’lars,” said 
Tom eagerly, shaking his head. 

“They aren’t down yet or they wouldn’t be cheer- 
ing,” said Amos positively. 

“Wait till th’ reg’lars charge ’em,” was Tom’s 
statement. “I’m thinkin’ when General Sheaffe starts 
out o’ th’ fort ’e won’t find many Yankees to chase.” 

Amos became silent, and the “waiting” to which 
Tom had referred followed. To the eager boy it 
seemed almost as if the hours must have heavy weights 
attached to them, the time dragged so slowly. The 
noise of the storm was all that could be heard for 
even his companions soon ceased talking. The very 
air became heavy and oppressive. Not a word was 
brought concerning the result of the attack on York. 

The long day at last drew to a close. Just before 
sunset the prisoners were summoned and as each 
passed up to the deck a second search of his person 
was made to prove that he had no concealed weapons 
about him. 

When the crew were all on deck they were arranged 


THE DESCENT 


85 


in two rows, Amos taking his place in the line, al- 
though he was eager to explain who he was and obtain 
his freedom. 

In bands of six the sailors were next taken ashore, 
the Yankee crew that had taken possession of the 
sloop watching each departing yawl as well as the men 
remaining on deck. On the shore other Yankee sail- 
ors were to be seen, to whom the bands of prisoners 
were committed. 

Amos was able to form only one conclusion and 
that was that the British had been defeated in the 
attack on York and that the Duke of Gloucester was 
now in possession of the Americans. 

The thought was inspiring and as his turn came to 
go ashore Amos said hastily to the young American 
officer standing by the side, “I’m a Yankee.” 

“Good for you,” said the boyish officer but with- 
out glancing at the one who had spoken. 

“Do I have to go ashore?” 

“Ashore you go !” responded the sailor giving Amos 
a push as he spoke. “Be lively! We don’t want to 
stay here all night.” 

“But I’m an American,” protested the lad. 

“Tell that to the marines. Get aboard the yawl, 
or there’ll be one less Yankee among the Jackies.” 

Indignant as Amos was that his claim had been ig- 
nored, he was aware that it would be impossible for 
him to explain more fully at such a place and time, 
so he obediently took his seat in the rolling yawl 


86 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


and in a brief time he, with his companions, was 
landed on the shore. 

Speedily the six men were formed in line and then 
were led by the Americans to a place farther up the 
bay. There they were embarked in another yawl and 
taken swiftly toward one of the fleet at anchor not 
far away. 

In the same boat with Amos were Tom, the old 
sailor, and the young ensign who had led the band to 
his house in the search for the missing Simeon Jones. 
The face of the ensign showed how deep was his de- 
pression. There were moments when he appeared to 
be utterly hopeless. With Tom, however, the affair 
was taken in his usual philosophical way and 
there was slight difference in the expression of his 
face. • 

‘‘Seems like y’r hown folks don’t want y’ now that 
yeVe put on a British uniform,” he whispered to 
Amos when they were seated side by side. “Hit’s 
worse nor poison, lad.” 

“I’ll get a chance to explain it to somebody.” 

“Silence in the boat,” sternly called out the man 
in command. 

Both Tom and Amos ceased talking and with dif- 
ferent emotions watched the vessel which they soon 
approached. Amos saw her name — the Fair Amer- 
ican — on her bow. The waters were so rough and 
the sloop’s deck so high that ladders were lowered. 
Up these the British sailors climbed like monkeys and 


THE DESCENT 


87 


as soon as they were on the deck they were led to the 
forecastle, where they were shut in. 

can't see very much difference, lad, between 
this sloop an' the' Duke o' Gloucester. I'm thinldn' 
I'd better take a nap." To Amos’s amazement the 
hardy old sailor crept into a hammock and instantly 
fell asleep. 

The crew of the Duke of Gloucester had been taken 
in small divisions to different ships of the American 
fleet, perhaps as a precaution against the danger of 
an uprising. At all events, it was not long before the 
Yankee sailors were on their way hack to Sackett's 
Harbor, after having destroyed the fort at York and 
had taken such supplies as the British army had not 
ruined. 

, In a general way Amos was aware of a victory, hut 
just how great it was or what the losses had been he 
had no way of knowing. He was eager to talk to 
some one of the officers of the Fair American, and 
explain how it was that he wore a British uniform 
and was counted among the prisoners taken in what 
the Yankees called the “Descent on York." Satis- 
fied that his opportunity would soon come, the lad 
made no effort to explain his position that night, 
trusting to the coming day to make all things clear. 

The following morning, however, was a disappoint- 
ment to the troubled boy. When the inspection of 
the prisoners was made by the captain, Amos in his 
heart eagerly hailed the coming of the man. 


88 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


As each prisoner stepped forward at the bidding of 
the officer to declare his name, age, position and vari- 
ous other matters, Amos watched his companions, each 
eagerly waiting for his own turn. 

At last the captain, scarcely glancing at the lad 
as he spoke, said, “What is your nameT^ 

“Amos Proper.’’ 

“Your home?” 

“On the shore of Lake Ontario.” 

“Your nationality?” 

“American.” 

“What?” said the officer glancing hastily up from 
his notebook as he heard the somewhat startling 
statement. 

“That is what I am,” said Amos somewhat con- 
fidently. “I belong in the United States.” 

“What are you doing in the crew of the Dulie of 
Gloucester demanded the captain sternly. 

“I was /pressed’; the press-gang took me.” 

The captain smiled incredulously, as^he said, “How 
old are you?” 

“Fifteen — going on sixteen.” 

“I guess you’re telling the truth now. But even 
the press-gang doesn’t take boys no older than you.” 

“They took me,” asserted Amos, his confidence still 
strong. 

“When?” 

“Two days ago.” 

“Where?” 


THE DESCENT 


89 


“At my father’s house.” 

“Where was your father? Why didn’t he — ” 

“My father and my two brothers and my two 
brothers-in-law are in the army or navy. They were 
all away from home.” 

“Which army?” 

“American — of course.” 

“Don’t be disrespectful,” said the captain, his 
cheeks flushing slightly at Amos’s unconscious re- 
tort and the unconcealed delight of the prisoners who 
were listening to the conversation. “ I ’ll look up your 
story after a while,” said the captain as he prepared 
to depart. 

“But,” protested Amos in his disappointment, 
“these men will tell you that what I am saying is 
true ! ” as he looked behind him at the prisoners from 
the Duke of Gloucester. “That man — the ensign,” he 
explained, pointing to the young sailor as he spoke, 
“was the leader; he had five men from the Duke of 
Gloucester and they came to our house looking for 
one of — one of our men they had pressed — and he had 
left.” 

“Did they find him?” asked the captain with a 
smile. 

“No, sir, I had hidden him in the corncrib.” 

“So they took you in his place, did they?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“Did they take any of your younger brothers?” 

“I haven’t any younger brothers.” 


90 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


‘‘Oh, well, if you had had, doubtless they would 
have taken them too. The press-gangs want the in- 
fants. ’ ^ 

The captain having completed his record was about 
to depart. 

In amazement and anger Amos looked blankly at 
him. “Are you going to keep me here?’^ he de- 
manded. 

“Certainly.^’ 

“But I’m not a redcoat! I’m an American! I 
belong to — ” 

“You might appeal to Admiral Chauncey,” laughed 
the captain. “I’m too old a bird to be caught by 
any such chaff.” 

Without another word the officer was gone, fol- 
lowed by a loud laugh from Amos’s companions. 


CHAPTER VII 


WHICH IS AMOS? 

T he returning fleet of the victorious Americans en- 
countered heavy storms and head winds, and con- 
sequently throughout the voyage there was almost no 
opportunity for Amos Proper to hold any conversa- 
tion with any of his captors. In a general way the 
result of the expedition was known among the pris- 
oners and the fall of young General Pike also was re- 
ported. Except to the Americans, however, the names 
of the youthful leaders meant little and “Pike’s 
Peak, ’ ’ named for the daring young explorer, was in 
a region that was vague as well as far distant. 
Amos’s feelings were somewhat soothed by Tom who 
partly persuaded the impatient young prisoner that 
he would have little difficulty in making himself 
known when the fleet had gained its harbor. 

“But I don’t know anybody there,” protested Amos 
though he was eager to be convinced. 

“ ’E soon will. Don’t ’e do any more worritin’.” 
“How will I know anybody? They may shut me 
up with the rest of you and not believe a word I say.” 

“Don’t ’e worry,” Tom answered almost monoto- 
nously. 


01 


92 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


But Amos was anxious, even if he was not '‘worrit- 
in’.’’ Throughout the voyage he was continually try- 
ing to conjure up some way by which he might appeal 
to Commodore Chauncey or gain the ear of General 
Dearborn. 

At last the returning fleet was safely within the 
sheltering arms of Sackett’s Harbor. The region was 
as new to Amos as it was to his fellow prisoners and 
with keen interest the lad looked over the blue waters 
and up at the rude barracks on the high and bold 
shore. The harbor itself was almost ideal. The long 
arms of the shore ran far out into the lake, the coast 
was rocky and high and even the islands within the 
harbor all seemed to be a part of the natural defense. 

It was late in the afternoon when the fleet arrived 
and only a few of the prisoners were taken ashore. 
The following morning, however, Amos and his re- 
cent companions on the Biike of Gloucester were 
summoned to the deck, and then under guard or- 
dered ashore and preparations at once made to march 
them to the guardhouse. 

All the time Amos was looking keenly about him 
hoping to discover some familiar face but not one 
was to be seen in the curious crowd that assembled at 
the rude docks. Under guard, the prisoners in small 
detachments were marched toward the barracks. 
Once or twice Amos had attempted to explain or de- 
clare who he was and to ask for release, but each time 
he had been rudely and sharply rebuffed. Tom, who 


WHICH IS AMOS? 


93 


was marching beside him, shook his head protestingly 
and at last Amos concluded that the old sailor was 
correct and that he must possess his soul in patience 
until the proper time to speak should be found. 

The prisoners soon arrived on the little plateau 
where the stone barracks had been erected. As a 
halt was called, Amos looked over the water of Lake 
Ontario, now sparkling in the light of the closing 
day. Far away was his home ! Here he was a pris- 
oner held by the army and the navy in which his own 
father and brothers were serving ! It was all a huge 
mistake. He was entitled to more consideration, the 
angry lad kept saying to himself. At last when dark- 
ness drew near and he sought a place where he might 
sleep on the floor of the room in which he and his 
companions were confined, Amos was quite convinced 
that his country was grossly indifferent to his predica- 
ment and wanting in a proper care of its patriotic 
boys. 

With the coming of daylight, however, the lad’s 
spirits in a measure revived. The day was ideal, and 
the yellow sunlight was filled with suggestiveness of 
the work that ought to be done at home. And yet 
just how to proceed to secure his freedom was not 
entirely clear to Amos. 

Soon after the prisoners had been fed they were 
conducted from the building in which they had been 
confined. As they were led across the grounds, Amos, 
who was keenly alert to all that was passing, suddenly 


94 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


stopped as he beheld in a small group of soldiers 
standing near and closely watching ‘ ‘ the British tars, ’ ’ 
— his own brother Hiram. Unmindful of his position, 
the boy shouted, “Hiram! Hi! Come and get me.’’ 

A blow on the side of his head, inflicted by the guard 
at this unexpected breach of discipline, was disre- 
garded. Clapping his hand upon his throbbing ear, 
Amos ignored the attack and the man alike, as he 
excitedly watched his brother. 

Startled by the call, Hiram Proper ran closer to the 
passing squad and gazed eagerly into the faces of the 
men. In a moment he spied Amos and was as startled 
as his younger brother had been when he had dis- 
covered his own brother among the spectators. 

•‘Amos, is that really you?” he called. 

“That’s my name,” shouted Amos. “Get me out 
of this, will you?” 

The perplexed guard looking first at Hiram, who 
was clad in the uniform of a soldier of the United 
States, and then at Amos, who was wearing the suit 
which had been provided for him on the Duke of 
Gloucester^ did not know what to do or say. The 
prisoners, all interested, had almost come to a halt 
as they looked at the three men. 

‘ ‘ You ’ve made a mistake, ’ ’ called Hiram. “You ’ve 
got my brother there.” 

“These men are British prisoners,” retorted the 
guard somewhat tartly, though it was manifest that 
he had been impressed by the words. 



“Hikam! Hi! Come and get mk. ’—Pa.^e 9^. 



WHICH IS AMOS? 


95 


Can’t help that. That boy is Amos Proper — as 
good a Yankee as yon are.” 

^‘He was brought from York — ” 

‘‘No, he wasn’t,” asserted Hiram positively. “He 
lives—” 

“Yes, I was, Hi. I just came from York,” broke 
in Amos. 

“You did?” exclaimed Hiram. “I don’t — ^you 
can’t — what do you mean?” 

“Yes, I came from York; but Tom, here,” Amos 
added as he turned to the sailor beside him, “knows 
how it all was. He’ll tell you, I — ” 

‘ ‘ Come along and tell your tale to Captain Brown, ’ ’ 
broke in the guard. “I can’t make head nor tail of 
it.” 

“Come on. Hi!” called Amos gleefully. “We’ll 
get it fixed up now.” 

The discipline at Sackett’s Harbor was severe in 
some ways and lax in others. Many of the men en- 
rolled there had enlisted only for a term of three 
months or were serving as minute-men. Many of 
them, too, were neighbors and friends and knowing one 
another by their first names were perhaps not duly 
impressed by the dignity assumed by some of the of- 
ficers. 

At all events the guard that was conducting the 
band of six prisoners across the parade ground was 
among those to whom many of the duties, to say 
nothing of the technical terms to be employed in their 


96 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


new positions, were all unknown. He understood that 
he was to see that the half dozen men consigned to 
him did not escape while he was in charge of the 
band. Perhaps beyond that he did not know what 
was expected of him. 

When the little force arrived at the destination, 
Captain Brown was among the men awaiting its ar- 
rival. 

Roughly touching his cap, the guard said awk- 
wardly, ‘‘Beggin’ pardon, sir, but this man,” point- 
ing to Hiram, as he spoke, ‘^claims weVe made a mis- 
take.” 

‘‘What’s the mistake?” demanded the officer gruffly 
of the young soldier as he spoke. 

“Only that you’ve got the wrong man in there,” 
explained Hiram indicating Amos as the one to whom 
he was referring. 

“What’s wrong?” 

“Nothing, except that he isn’t a redcoat, or a 
British tar.” 

“What do you know about it?” 

“I know all about it.” 

“Say it then, man! I can’t keep these men out 
here any longer. They’ll all be claiming they are 
Yankees pretty quick.” 

“That boy is my brother.” 

“What of it?” 

“He’s a Yankee.” 

“What was he doing in York?” 


WHICH IS AMOS? 


97 


“I don’t know. Hell have to tell you — ” 

“I guess you don’t know,” laughed the officer. 
“We can’t stay here all day! Forward — ” 

“Wait a minute,” interrupted Hiram quietly. “I 
know what I’m talking about. My father, my older 
brother, my two brothers-in-law and I are all in the 
service of our country. I guess we’re entitled to be 
heard. Now I tell you that boy is my younger brother 
and a better Yankee than you are to-day! You let 
him go!” 

“I can’t let him go. He’ll have to — ” 

“Take him to the general, then.” 

“No. I can’t do that either. You can report if 
you want to and if what you say is true — ” 

“It is true,” broke in Hiram. 

“I’m not saying it isn’t,” said the officer not un- 
kindly as he saw how excited the young soldier was. 
“All I say is that I haven’t any right to let him go, 
and I sha’n’t let him go, either. You go on and ex- 
plain matters at headquarters and I guess you won’t 
have any trouble in getting the youngster out, though 
for the life of me I can’t see what he was doing in 
York.” 

“Go on, Amos,” called Hiram, “I’ll fix that all up 
for you.” 

As the band resumed its march, Hiram Proper ran 
swiftly in the direction of the officers’ quarters and 
soon disappeared from Amos’s sight, for the lad obedi- 
ently followed the command of the guard and with 


98 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


his companions marched towards the old stone guard- 
house, where already two score or more of the prison- 
ers taken at York were confined. 

Only a short distance had been covered, however, 
before a halt was ordered, and a sergeant 
stepped out and called loudly, ‘‘Is Amos Proper 
here?’^ 

“Yes, sir, I’m here! I’m Amos Proper.” 

“So am I,” declared a young sailor promptly ad- 
vancing at the same time. 

“You can’t both be Amos Propers,” said the ser- 
geant as he looked at both claimants. 

“Of course, we can’t,” said the strange Amos. 
“I’m the one. I don’t know who this fellow is,” he 
added as he turned to the other Amos. 

“Who are you?” demanded the guard. 

“lam Amos Proper.” 

“No, he isn’t. I am,” declared the other. 

“How can I tell which one is telling the truth?” 
asked the sergeant helplessly. 

“Take me. I’ll soon show you,” said the first claim- 
ant to the name. 

“And you say you are Amos Proper, too, do you?” 
asked the sergeant of Amos. 

“I know I am.” 

‘ ‘ Can you prove it ? ” 

“I can.” 

“How?” 


“My brother will tell you.” 


WHICH IS AMOS? 


99 


‘‘Where is your brother?” 

“I don’t just happen to know where he is now,” 
answered Amos in confusion. 

“Of course, he doesn’t ‘happen’ to know just where 
his brother is now,” jeeringly said the rival. “He 
doesn’t know where he is. But I can tell him.” 

“Where is he?” 

“I don’t like to tell.” 

“Why not?” 

“Because he’s where — where — this fellow will go 
when he — ” 

A loud laugh interrupted the speaker and even 
Amos, who as yet had not taken seriously the claim 
that had been made, joined in the laughter. He was 
confident now that a speedy release was at hand. 

‘ ‘ My brother is here in Sackett ’s Harbor, ’ ’ declared 
Amos. 

“That’s just what I said,” spoke up his rival, 
whereat there was another laugh. 

“Where in Sackett ’s is he?” asked the guard. 

“He is here somewhere though I can’t say just 
where. ’ ’ 

“Would you like to look him up?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“So would I,” joined in the other claimant of the 
name. “I’ll tell you,” he added, “you take me first 
and if I can’t prove that I’m the one you want then 
I’ll come back without a word,” 

“I’ll do it,” said the sergeant promptly. 


100 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


‘‘But I am Amos Proper/’ broke in the true Amos 
in dismay. 

“Look ’e ’ere,” suggested Tom quietly, “don’t ’e 
see — ” 

“Yes, I see,” fairly shouted Amos. “There comes 
my brother now! Hiram! Hi! Hi! Come here! 
Be quick ! ’ ’ 

The eyes of every one in the band were turned 
quickly toward Hiram Proper who in the company 
of an officer was seen approaching the place where 
the band of prisoners had halted. 

Ignoring the words of the excited lad, the officer 
turned to Hiram as he drew near and said, “Just an- 
swer my questions if you please, and do not volunteer 
any information at this time unless I ask for it. Is 
your brother here?” 

“Yes, sir,” replied Hiram. 

“More than one brother here?” 

“No, sir.” 

“What is your brother’s name?” 

“Amos Proper.” 

“What is your name?” 

“Hiram Proper.” 

“You have served in our army?” 

“Yes, sir, and in the navy, too. I have — ” 

“Just answer my questions. Where have you 
served?” 

“At Niagara.” 

“What are you doing at Sackett’s Harbor?” 


WHICH IS AMOS? 


101 


‘‘I am not in the service here.” 

‘‘That is not what I asked,” retorted the officer 
angrily. 

“I am answering yonr question,” said Hiram stolid- 
ly. “That is what you told me to do, — and nothing 
more.” The men grinned at one another and the 
anger of the officer who was somewhat bumptious in 
his manner increased. 

“You need be careful, ’ ’ continued the officer. “ 1 11 
order you to the guardhouse.” 

“For what?” Again the delight of the listeners 
became apparent. 

“For disrespect.” 

“I haven’t any disrespect.” 

“Then answer my question, and don’t put on any 
airs. ’ ’ 

“Yes, sir.” 

“Is your brother here?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“What are you doing here?” 

“Answering your questions,” replied Hiram sim- 

piy* 

Again the delight of the waiting men became man- 
ifest and this time more audibly with the result of 
increasing the rage of the pompous young lieutenant. 

“Why are you here?” 

“You’ll have to ask General Dearborn that ques- 
tion.” 

“I’m asking you.” 


102 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


*'Yes, sir/' 

“Why are you here?" 

“I can't answer that question — for you." 

“You must answer me." 

Hiram shook his head and remained silent. 

“Are you going to tell me?" shouted the irate of- 
ficer. 

“No, sir." 

“Why not?" 

“I have told you why." 

“And you openly disobey me?" 

“No, sir. I do not mean to disobey you. But there 
are reasons why I cannot tell you. Others know and 
if you ask them they may tell you, but I cannot do 
it." 

“I'll send you to the guardhouse!" 

“Yes, sir. 

“And you still refuse to tell me who you are?" 

“No, sir.'^ 

“But you have ! You have openly defied me 1 You 
have—" 

“I am Hiram Proper,'^ broke in the young soldier 
quietly. “That is the answer to your question, 
sir. ’ ' 

^ ‘ If you belong in Niagara why are you here ? ' ' 

“I told you that you must ask those who know — 
and are willing to tell you. I cannot." 

“Sergeant, take this man to the guardhouse!" 
roared the young officer. 


WHICH IS AMOS? 


103 


You’d better speak to General Dearborn first,” 
suggested Hiram quietly. 

‘H’ll speak to nobody! You have disobeyed my 
orders and you must take the consequences. Ser- 
geant, take him — No. I’ll free Amos Proper first. 
Step out of line, young man, ’ ’ commanded the officer. 
‘^Now then,” he added brutally as Amos and the man 
who also claimed his name obediently advanced two 
steps, ^‘1 guess I know which is the right man to let 
go. I’ve had word to let Amos Proper go free. You 
say you are the man?” inquired the officer as he 
looked sharply at Amos’s companion. 

‘ ‘ I do, ” replied the prisoner promptly. 

“Then you are to report at headquarters. You get 
back into the line!” the young lieutenant commanded 
Amos. 

“But I am Amos Proper,” protested the lad. “I 
am — ” 

“Silence in the ranks!” roared the leader. “For- 
ward march!” he added; and with Hiram also in the 
charge of the sergeant, the little band resumed its ad- 


vance. 


CHAPTER VIII 


RELEASE 


S Amos marched with the men up the hill his 



heart was heavy. Perplexed by the action of 
his brother, Hiram, who was smiling and apparently 
indifferent, he could not understand his attitude to- 
ward the condition in which they both found them- 
selves. There was, however, no opportunity for con- 
versation and not a word had been spoken when at 
last their destination was gained. 

When they arrived at the guardhouse, the young 
lieutenant in charge of the prisoners held a brief con- 
ference with the officer in command, leaving his band 
in charge of the sergeant. To Amos’s surprise, Hiram 
at once left the lines and boldly advanced to the place 
where the two officers were standing. The action of 
his brother was even more puzzling to the young pris- 
oner than his air of indifference had been. He was 
deeply interested, however, in what was occurring and 
intently watched the two men who at first turned 
harshly upon Hiram, but in a moment were conversing 
eagerly with him. The conversation continued for 
several minutes but at last the lieutenant turned once 


104 


RELEASE 


105 


more to his prisoners and ordered all except Amos to 
be taken within the building. 

There still was no opportunity for Amos to ask his 
brother what all these things meant. However, it be- 
came manifest at once that under the care of the 
sergeant both Amos and Hiram were to be led away, 
and that they were not to enter the guardhouse. 
This thought was uppermost in Amos’s mind, and, 
even in his perplexity, his feeling of elation was 
strong. Not a word was spoken until the three men 
arrived at the rude stone house where, after a brief 
halt and in response to the word which the sergeant 
had with the guard, the three were bidden to enter. 

Turning sharply to Amos, Hiram whispered, ‘‘You 
stay outside.” 

“What for?” inquired the boy. 

“I cannot explain now, but you do as I tell you.” 

“But I don’t want you to leave me. I don’t want 
to stay out here alone.” 

With a smile Hiram turned away and did not reply 
to the unspoken questions of his excited younger com- 
panion. 

A quarter hour or more elapsed before Hiram came 
down the stone steps and rejoined his brother. “It 
is all right, Amos,” he said quietly. 

“What is all right?” asked Amos quickly. 

“Why, you’re free.” 

‘ ‘ I am ! ’ ’ exclaimed the startled boy. ‘ ‘ How do I 
know lam?” 


106 


THE BOY SAILORy OP 1812 


Hiram laughed, as he replied, “I have a letter in 
my pocket which will answer any questions which 
any of the guards may want to ask/^ 

^‘Who wrote the letter 

‘‘General Dearborn/' 

“What?" 

“That's right." 

“Did he give you a letter?" 

“I told you he did." 

“Why did he give it to you?" 

“You might ask him," laughed Hiram, “though 
I am afraid you might have a little difficulty in being 
admitted into his presence." 

“How did you get in?" 

“Oh, he was waiting for me." 

“Go ahead, Hi, — tell me about it. Are you sure? 
Suppose somebody stops me?" 

“You won't have any trouble," replied Hiram, “if 
you stay with me, but I don't intend to be in Sack- 
ett's Harbor very long." 

“Why not?" 

“Because I am going home." 

“Going home! How can you leave?" 

“My time is up May 1st. I enlisted for six months, 
you know." 

“And you are going home now?" asked Amos 
again, his face showing the keen excitement he felt. 

“I am. There is some planting that will have to 
be done, and I guess it is about time for Sally to 


RELEASE 


107 


see her soldier boy again. I haven’t been home since 
Christmas. ’ ’ 

‘‘Are you going to stay at home?” inquired Amos. 

“That all depends on what happens this spring. 
I shall get the crops in the ground, look after the 
stock, fix up the house and do what may be needed 
about the place. If our boys drive the redcoats 
back, why, I sha’n’t leave home again; but if they 
give us more trouble, I may have to go and take my 
part.” 

“Where did you come from now?” inquired Amos 
as he and his brother walked slowly back toward the 
shore. 

‘ ‘ Two or three places. ’ ’ 

“Tell me,” demanded Amos, rebelling at the teas- 
ing manner of his brother. 

“Well, I came first from Niagara.” 

“Then straight to Sackett’s Harbor?” 

“Not exactly.” 

“Tell me about it,” again demanded the younger 
brother. 

“Amos,” responded Hiram in mock seriousness, his 
eyes shining in the pleasure he had, both in the com- 
pany of the lad and at the prospect of a speedy re- 
turn to his home, “you must learn to control yourself. 
I am afraid you would not make much of a soldier, 
if you don’t learn that children must be seen and 
not heard.” 

“If these soldiers weren’t here,” retorted Amos, 


108 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


‘‘I’d show you that I could put you on your back!” 

‘‘That sounds exceedingly well, but I am afraid 
you are better at promising than you are at per- 
forming. ’ ’ 

“Tell me where you came from,” again pleaded 
Amos. 

“Oswego was the last place where I stopped,” said 
Hiram. 

“Did you come by boat?” 

“I did, and I am going back by boat, too.” 

“Where?” exclaimed Amos instantly excited. 
“Whose boat are you going in? What kind of a 
boat is it? Are you going alone? Why don’t you 
tell me about it?” he added as his brother shook his 
head and laughed at his companion. 

“You don’t give me a chance,” replied Hiram, 
“to say much, but I came to Sackett’s Harbor on 
official business.” 

“On what?” demanded Amos, as he stopped and 
stared blankly at his brother. 

“On official business,” replied Hiram, his black 
eyes twinkling with mischief. “General Dearborn 
wanted to see me.” 

“The general never knew there was such a fellow 
as you, Hiram Proper ! What are you talking 
about?” 

“lam telling you the truth,” replied Hiram. “He 
told me he was more glad to see me than any man he 
had seen in a month.” 


RELEASE 


109 


“There is no accounting for tastes, that is all I 
can say,’’ replied Amos. 

“You see, he appreciates the value of my services.” 

“ I am glad somebody does. Did he really say that 
to you?” 

“He did.” 

“What made him say it?” 

“I cannot tell a lie, Amos,” laughed his brother. 
“G. Washington and I are enough alike to be twin 
brothers.” 

“Grandmother said that Washington was a very 
modest man.” 

“Yes, that is another thing in which we are alike.” 
However, as Hiram saw that his younger brother was 
feeling somewhat hurt by his bantering, he suddenly 
changed his manner and said, as he flung his arm 
about Amos’s neck, “Honest Injun, Amos, I brought 
a letter from Niagara for General Dearborn. I guess 
when he saw me with that letter in my hand, that 
may have had something to do about his being more 
glad to see me than any man he had seen in 
a month. I have done all that I have been told to 
do, so I guess there is no harm in telling you about 
it now.” 

“And we can go home?” inquired Amos mollified 
by his brother’s manner. 

“I can,” replied Hiram. 

“Aren’t you going to take me?” 

“If you are a good boy,” replied Hiram, “per- 


110 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


haps I will stow you away somewhere, hut you mustn’t 
talk any more as you did a few minutes ago.” 

‘‘About what?” demanded Amos. 

“About my baby brother being able to put me on 
my back.” 

“If you will wait a minute,” exclaimed Amos, “I 
will show you that right away.” 

But Hiram eluded his grasp and the two continued 
on their way. 

It was agreed that they were to sleep that night in 
the little catboat in which Hiram had come with his 
message for the commander of the northern army. 
To the delight of Amos, neither he nor his brother 
was even accosted by any of the guards, and to Hi- 
ram’s statement “that the soldiers were too busy to 
pay attention to a boy of Amos’s size,” the younger 
brother did not reply though his manner again showed 
that there were protests which he might have made. 

The night, when it settled down, was unusually 
warm. Wrapped as the two brothers were in the 
woolen blankets, which their mother had made for 
Hiram when he had first enlisted, sleeping in the 
open catboat was not uncomfortable, though the 
spring weather still was somewhat backward. 

“Hiram,” said Amos, when at last they were ready 
for the night, “who was that fellow that said he had 
the same name I have?” 

“I haven’t the remotest idea,” replied Hiram 
sleepily. 


RELEASE 


111 


‘‘He certainly was not any more modest than you 
and G. Washington.’’ 

“Wasn’t he?” drawled Hiram. 

“No, he wasn’t, and what’s more, I believe that 
lieutenant let him get away.” 

“Ho you?” 

“Yes, I do, and I think he ought to be shut up in 
the guardhouse himself. It is the only place where 
he will be safe. I would like to find out what be- 
came of that fellow before we leave Sackett’s.” 

“Why don’t you?” 

Amos gave several explanations why investigations 
on his own part might not be approved by the men 
in command, but seeing that his brother was no longer 
listening, soon the wearied lad also became silent and 
in a brief time was asleep. 

The following morning brought no answers to 
Amos’s questions of the night before. Who the man 
was that had claimed his name, whether he had been 
permitted to go free, or was still confined with the 
other British prisoners, Amos did not find out. How- 
ever, as he and Hiram were to depart soon after sun- 
rise in the little catboat in which the latter had made 
his voyage to the region, other matters were speedily 
forgotten. The deep feeling of satisfaction at be- 
ing once more in the company of his brother and the 
thought that he was soon to return to his home, as 
well as the novelty of the voyage to Oswego were all 
sufficient to hold Amos’s interest and attention. 


112 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


The little waves in the harbor were capped with 
white, the wind was blowing strongly toward the 
open lake when the boys set sail. The sight of the 
fleet of Commodore Chauncey riding at anchor, as it 
was, in the sheltered bay, was most imposing. The 
muzzles of the great guns, the activity of the men on 
the decks, the tall masts and the manifest power of 
the fleet, were all impressive to the boy, who but once 
before, had ever seen even a gunboat. Doubtless 
these rude men-of-war on the waters of Lake On- 
tario in that year of 1813, if by some possibility they 
should become visible to the boys of 1913 would evoke 
only a smile. The fleet would seem as strange as the 
garb of the men who trod its decks. However, neither 
Amos nor Hiram had any thought of the century 
in advance of them and consequently were duly im- 
pressed by the power of these fighters of the Lakes, 
and were glad to be permitted to depart without un- 
due delay. 

Once in the open lake, however, the wind died away 
and the white caps soon disappeared, while the cat- 
boat at times scarcely seemed to be moving. 

‘‘Want me to take an oar and lend a hand?’’ in- 
quired Amos, as he glanced at the long oars with 
which the craft was equipped. 

“Time enough for that later when we have to,” re- 
plied Hiram good-naturedly. “The wind on the lake 
may spring up in a minute; it is as changeable as a 


R£lj£iAS£i 


113 


girl. I want to get as far as Snow-shoe Island by 
noon, if we can, and stop there for dinner/' 

“Where is Snow-shoe Island?” inquired Amos. 

“It is right ahead of us. We can see it now,” re- 
plied his brother pointing to a stretch of land a half 
mile or more distant. 

“Why do they call it Snow-shoe?” asked Amos. 

“I don't know any more than why they call the sun 
the sun. Take your oar now, if you want to see if we 
can make it. I would let you take the tiller, hut I 
am afraid you might hit a rock somewhere.” 

“I won’t be any more likely to hit a rock than 
you,” retorted Amos. 

“Oh, yes, you would,” replied his brother with a 
laugh. “You have never sailed this sea.” 

“You haven't been over it but once,” retorted 
Amos. 

“Once is better than nothing, and besides some 
people don't have to sail a thousand times over the 
same region to find out where the best course is.” 

“What's that smoke on the island?” inquired 
Amos, pausing for a moment in his labors at the oar. 

“Where is what smoke?” 

“Right yonder, just over that clump of maples at 
the right.” 

“I don't know what it is,” said Hiram after a little 
time had elapsed and he had looked intently at the 
little pillar of smoke that was rising from the shore. 


114 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


“We’ll chance it, however. I guess there aren’t any 
redcoats along here. You take the tiller and put 
it hard up, and I will take your oar and stand in the 
how and look out for rocks.” 

For a brief time the catboat was slowly sent to- 
ward the shore, opposite the spot where the smoke was 
seen. Neither of the boys had spoken, but Amos was 
not convinced by his brother’s silence that he was en- 
tirely without anxiety. 

“What is that on the bank at the left?” suddenly 
inquired Amos in a low voice. As Hiram looked back 
the lad pointed toward a huge ledge on which men 
were to be seen. 

It was manifest also that the catboat had been dis- 
covered and that the men who were waiting on Snow- 
shoe were interested in its approach. 

“Can you see?’i inquired Hiram in a low voice, 
“whether the men have any uniforms or not?” 

“No,” replied Amos. 

“How many do you make the number?” 

“Two.” 

“That’s all I can see,” said Hiram. “I don’t like 
to run in too close without knowing better who they 
are.” 

“We can soon find out,” replied Amos, as his 
brother returned to the stern and once more took the 
tiller in his hands. 

The approach of the little catboat was slow and sev- 


RELEASE 


115 


eral minutes elapsed before either of the boys could 
determine what the garb of the waiting men was. 

Amos, who was seated beside his brother now, hav- 
ing abandoned his attempts to row, suddenly said in 
a low voice. ^‘They are British!’’ 

*^Yes,” assented Hiram, looking intently at the 
two men who were standing on the high ledge. 

know who they are, too 1” continued Amos in in- 
creasing excitement. 

‘‘Who are they?” 

“One of them,” said Amos, “is a sailor from the 
Duke of Gloucester and his name is Tom, and the 
other is that fellow that palmed himself off yesterday 
as having the same name that I have.” 

“Are you certain?” 

“Yes! And they know who we are, too!” he con- 
tinued, as the two men on the shore seemed to be 
conversing eagerly. “What do you suppose they are 
doing here?” 

“I haven’t any idea,” replied Hiram. “Though 
I can see that they are very much interested in what 
we are doing, or what we propose to do.” 

“What do you propose?” 

“I shall show you soon,” replied Hiram as, placing 
the tiller in the hands of his younger brother, he ad- 
vanced to the bow of the catboat. 


CHAPTER IX 


CHANGING CREWS 

A HOY! Come ashore!” shouted one of the 

ii waiting men. 

‘‘Who are you?” retorted Hiram. 

“Friends,” was the response. 

“How many are there of you?” 

“Only two.” 

“What are you doing here on this island?” 

“Waiting for you,” was the response. 

“I don’t think we will land.” 

“But you must!” shouted the man. “We are 
stranded. We haven’t anything to eat and we can- 
not leave the shore. You will have to come and take 
us aboard.” 

“How did you get here?” called Hiram, as the 
little catboat came within one hundred feet of the 
sandy strip. 

When the two brothers had departed from Sack- 
ett’s Harbor, each had taken with him a flintlock, and 
a huge horsepistol. In addition, flints, powder horns, 
and bullet pouches were provided and both boys be- 
lieved their voyage to Oswego would be safely made. 
They were confident that no British gunboats were 
110 


CHANGING CREWS 


117 


near, and even if any should he seen, it would be 
comparatively easy to land from the catboat and 
obtain a hiding-place among the forests that, for the 
most of the voyage, grew close to the waters of Lake 
Ontario. 

Hiram glanced questioningly back at his brother, 
as if he were warning him to be ready for any treach- 
ery on the part of the two men who had hailed them. 
Apparently neither of the men was hostile, at least 
in his manner. Amos had easily recognized the old 
sailor of the DuJce of Gloucester who had befriended 
him on so many occasions. Of his friendly feeling 
he had no doubt, but his companion, who had claimed 
the name which Amos believed to be solely his own, 
was a man unknown and naturally the lad was sus- 
picious of his motives. 

^‘Run in a little closer shore, Amos,” said Hiram 
in a low voice, as he again turned for a moment to 
look behind him. have my gun close by and 
you must keep yours where you can put your hand 
upon it in a second. We don’t know these fel- 
lows, and they may be planning some mischief for 
us.” 

Don’t land,” suggested Amos. ‘‘We are safe in 
our boat, anyway, and nobody knows what may hap- 
pen if we go ashore, nor how many of these men 
there may be on Snow-shoe.” 

“There are only these two,” replied Hiram con- 
fidently. “If you and I can’t hold our own against 


118 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


them, then they may take us with them wherever 
they are going and welcome.’^ 

Amos said no more, though he was by no means 
convinced that his older brother was acting wisely. 

In a brief time the sail of the catboat was lowered 
and the anchor was cast out from the stern. The 
water, as the boys saw, was only two or three feet 
in depth and it was possible almost anywhere to 
wade ashore. 

‘‘Keep your gun in your hand, Amos,’^ said Hiram 
in a whisper to his brother. “Don’t get your powder 
wet. Keep your eye every minute on these fel- 
lows!” 

“I don’t see why you want to land,” protested 
Amos; but as his brother made no response, the lad 
stepped carefully over the side of the boat into the 
water, and followed Hiram, as he led the way to the 
shore. 

There had been no sign of any disposition to 
dispute their approach on the part of the waiting 
men, and when at last the shore was gained Tom 
said, “Look ’e ’ere, lads. What ’ave ’e in the 
locker?” 

“Not much,” replied Amos, 

“A little is more nor we ’ave.” 

“Tell me first,” broke in Hiram, “what you two 
men are doing here. How did you get away from 
Sackett’s?” 

“I got away on account of my name,” spoke up 


CHANGING CREWS 


119 


the second sailor, and a broad grin appeared upon his 
face as he spoke. 

‘‘But that is not your name!’^ protested Amos 
quickly. 

“How does the lad know it is not my name?’’ in- 
quired the sailor as he turned, in a pretended puz- 
zled way, to his companion. 

“The name served a good turn, anyway,” retorted 
Tom, with a laugh. “Which lets my friend out and 
my friend lets me out,” he explained. 

“So that is the way you both escaped, is it?” asked 
Amos. 

“A man doesn’t escape,” laughed the sailor, “be- 
cause he gets out of the guardhouse.” 

Hiram, who had taken but little part in the con- 
versation was watching both men with an expression 
on his face that betrayed his perplexity. It was 
manifest also that Tom, the older of the two sailors, 
was aware of the feeling in the heart of the young 
soldier. Facing him he said, “Don’t ’e be afraid, 
lad.” 

“I am not afraid,” replied Hiram promptly. 

“Well, then don’t think ’e must take us back to 
Sackett’s Harbor!” 

“Why not?” 

“We’ll talk more about that after we have seen 
what you have to eat. We ’ave a fire all waiting for 
’e. We’ll share a bite first, and then talk about the 
other part afterwards.” 


120 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


Hiram smiled and nodded to his brother to follow 
the two men as they led the way across the strip of 
land toward the smoke, which the boys had seen when 
they had approached the island. The shimmering 
waters of the lake were almost mirror-like in their 
smoothness. The sun was pouring down its rays upon 
the great expanse of water, almost as in a summer 
day. In the clumps of bushes and low trees that 
were growing here and there upon the island, the 
songs of birds could be heard, and Amos was im- 
pressed most of all by the hundreds of gulls that 
were circling about the region, or standing in multi- 
tudes upon the strip of sandy beach. Like a fine 
thread, the shore of the distant mainland could be 
seen. The lad concluded that they must be several 
miles out in the lake. No other islands were to be 
seen. 

As they approached the fire Amos and Hiram, 
who were walking along the shore still carrying 
their flintlocks with them, saw that the opposite 
side of the island here was rough and rocky. The 
water too in places was very deep even close to the 
land. 

When the boys approached the fire they saw that 
there were several birds ready for roasting. Noticing 
the glance of Amos, Tom said good-naturedly, ‘‘Sea- 
gulls is not the best heating in the world, but it is 
better nor crow, besides it is a bit easier to knock 
over a gull with a club or a bit of a rock than it is 


CHANGING CREWS 


121 


to catch any of the bass in the lake, when you ’aven’t 
any hook or line.’’ 

‘^Is that all you have to eat?” inquired Hiram. 

^‘It is,” replied Tom. ‘^Beggars can’t he 
choosers. ’ ’ 

‘‘We have something on the catboat, I think. I 
will go back and get that?” 

“I will go with you, Hiram,” spoke up Amos 
promptly, whereat Tom laughed and said, “Don’t 
you be sheared, lad. Nobody will hurt ’e, leastwise, 
before we find out what the catboat has on board. 
’Ere, lad,” continued Tom, as he pushed a small skiff 
out from the bushes, and held it by its long painter, 
as it floated on the water. “Take this, and ’e won’t 
have to wade ashore.” 

Both boys glanced quickly at the little skiff and 
then looked meaningly at each other. It was plain 
now how the two men had escaped from Sackett’s Har- 
bor, and made their way to Snow-shoe Island. The 
“freedom” which the name had brought to Tom’s 
companion was not quite so apparent now as it had 
been, and both were convinced that the sailor in 
some way had outwitted his guard and then hadl 
aided Tom also to escape. 

“Amos, you take the skiff and go back to the cat- 
boat and get some of the bacon and some other things 
for our dinner,” said Hiram. 

“Will you stay here?” asked Amos in a low voice. 
“Will it be safe?” 


122 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


am all right/’ laughed Hiram glancing mean- 
ingly at the two flintlocks which were in their hands. 

^‘You had better take mine, too,” said Amos, hand- 
ing his gun to his brother. 

^‘All right,” laughed Hiram, as Amos speedily en- 
tered the skiff and began to row toward the lower end 
of the Island. 

There was no conversation while the boy was gone, 
perhaps the two guns, which were in the possession 
of Hiram, having something to do with the silence. 

In a brief time Amos returned in the skiff and as 
soon as he landed placed the few provisions which had 
been brought from Sackett ’s Harbor, on a rock on the 
shore. The sight of a prospective dinner manifestly 
was more interesting at the time to the two British 
sailors than thoughts of escape or even of the success 
of their nation. Indeed all four men were hungry. 

When at last the small and savory meal was served, 
the suspicions which the men had of one another 
somehow seemed to be cast into the background. 
Apparently the thoughts of war and of the terrible 
struggle which then was going on between the United 
States and the mother country were forgotten. Even 
the scene itself was indicative of peace. The little 
curl of smoke rising from the ashes of the fire which 
had been kindled among the rocks on the shore, — the 
sight of four men seated near by on the grassy bank, 
— the clear waters of the lake, the almost cloudless 


CHANGING CREWS 


123 


sky, — all blended in a picture which was one of peace 
and not of war. 

When, however, the simple meal had been eaten, 
as the wind had not yet arisen, departure, at least 
for Hiram and Amos, was still impossible. Neither 
of the two boys was unmindful of the possible dan- 
ger which beset them and they remained seated a 
little apart from their companions. The feeling of 
good-nature, however, was apparently uppermost in 
all, and it was Hiram who said, ‘‘What a shame our 
two countries cannot get along as peacefully as we 
four are here. We might, too,’^ he added, “if you 
didn’t try to ‘press’ our men.” 

“ ‘Once a Briton always a Briton,’ ” spoke up the 
sailor who had assumed Amos’s name. 

“We’ll show you that this is not true before this 
war is ended, ’ ’ retorted Amos sharply. 

“General Hull at Detroit didn’t seem to show very 
much of it,” remarked Tom dryly. “He seemed to 
be willing to let General Brock ’ave his army and hall 
’ehad.” 

“General Hull was a coward and a traitor,” de- 
clared Amos hotly. “He sold out for British gold,” 
and the boy began to sing, — 

“Let William Hull be counted null, 

A coward and a traitor; 

For British gold, his army sold 
To Brock, — the speculator.” 


124 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


“You have a young man out on Lake Erie who is 
likely to make trouble, I am told,’’ suggested Amos’s 
double. 

“Who is that?” asked Hiram quickly. 

“His name is Perry. I am told he is from Rhode 
Island and is as full of fight as an egg is of meat. 
At the same time he won ’t be able to do much against 
our Jackies.” 

“What is he doing now?” inquired Hiram. 

“I hear he is building a fleet. A man has to build 
his own boats as well as fight in them, here in this 
wilderness.” 

“Our fleet seemed to do all right at York, any- 
way,” spoke up Amos. 

“That won’t bother us any more than a flea bite 
bothers a dog,” laughed the sailor. “You go back 
and you will meet a warmer reception than you had 
the other day.” 

“But we brought away over two hundred and 
ninety prisoners,” asserted Amos. 

“Two of whom are here with you,” laughed the 
sailor. “And that brings up the question, what are 
we going to do now?” 

“I know what Amos and I are going to do,” said 
Hiram quietly. 

“What’s that?” 

“We are going to set sail. There’s a little wind 
coming up and those clouds yonder look as if we 
might have more. ’ ’ 


CHANGING CREWS 


125 


“Are you going to take us with you?” spoke up 
Tom. 

“That is what I have been thinking about,” re- 
plied Hiram. “I am headed for Oswego, and if you 
come with me you may be safer there than you were 
in Sackett’s Harbor. I don’t know but I ought to 
take both of you, for I am not sure you would be 
better off than when we saw you here on Snow- 
shoe.” 

“We will go with ’e and take hour chances,” spoke 
up Tom promptly. “I don’t like the look o’ this 
island, hand our skiff is not good for riding hout the 
gale.” 

“I might shut you in the hold,” suggested Hiram. 

“No, you let us sit for’ard, and keep your guns 
with you and we won’t give you any trouble,” said 
Amos’s namesake with a grin that was intended to 
be reassuring. 

“That’s what we’ll do,” said Hiram promptly, as 
he arose, “and we’ll set sail right away. There is 
a puff of wind and that means that where there’s one 
there will be another.” 

“It’s likely to be plenty of wind before sundown,” 
said Tom, as he looked toward some clouds that were 
rising in the west. 

Conversation ceased as Hiram bade the men stay 
where they were while he and his brother at once 
prepared the catboat for their departure. 

When these preparations at last were completed, 


126 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


Amos pushed the skiff ashore and bade the men come 
out to the boat in it. There was no delay and they 
soon were on board the catboat taking their places 
obediently in the bow, while Amos made fast the 
skiff and took it in tow. Sitting close to his 
brother with the two flintlocks so placed that each 
could be seized if occasion demanded, the lad soon 
lost his fears as the boat drew away from the island. 

The wind held well and for a half hour steady 
progress was made as Hiram sailed toward Oswego. 
He was unfamiliar with the region but believed that 
he would be able to make the harbor that night if the 
wind continued at all favorable. 

In accordance with the predictions of the old 
sailor, Tom, the wind soon began to rise, until at last 
the little boat was tossing over the boisterous waves 
of the lake, which were quickly aroused by any strong 
breeze. White caps now were dashing their spray 
over the faces of the boys, and the prisoners in the 
bow soon were thoroughly drenched. 

‘^We’ll have to take a reef,’^ said Hiram at 
last, directing his younger brother to take the 
tiller while he himself advanced to the bow to take 
in some of the sail. He had however scarcely stepped 
on the deck, before, with a sudden push by Amos’s 
namesake he was sent overboard and in a moment 
was far behind the racing boat. 

“Get into your skiff, lad,’^ called Tom to Amos. 
“It’s your only way to save your brother. We are 


CHANGING CREWS 


127 


desperate and not going to Oswego with you. Take 
your choice ! Is it into the skiff you go to save your 
brother, or do you go with us across the lake to 
Yorkr^ 

Without replying, Amos quickly jumped into the 
skiff and as he leaped on board, the painter was cast 
off and in a brief time he had been left far behind. 

Then for the first time the lad was fully aware of 
what had befallen him and his brother. Hiram was 
struggling in the midst of the tossing waves, while he 
was in a skiff without any means of defense, both 
guns in his haste having been left on board the cat- 
boat. 


CHAPTER X 


RETAKEN 

H astily righting himself Amos took his seat 
and grasping the oars began to row in the di- 
rection in which he had last seen his brother. The 
rolling waves prevented him from seeing just where 
Hiram now was, but aware of the general direction, 
the lad was pulling with all his strength. He saw 
the catboat speeding away and rapidly increasing the 
distance between it and the helpless brothers. Con- 
vinced now. that no help was to be expected from 
the men on board, he redoubled his efforts, exerting 
aU his energy in his efforts to rescue Hiram from his 
perilous position. His progress necessarily was slow 
and his fears increased when, after repeated efforts 
to see where his brother was struggling in the wave, 
he had been unable to discern him. At last however 
he saw Hiram’s arm raised in the distance. 

Made doubly anxious by what might be a final 
appeal for help, Amos exerted himself as he had never 
done before. The heavy skiff moving against the wind 
was driven by his steady efforts toward the place 
where the arm had appeared for a moment. It was 
useless to shout or call and the lad reserved all his 
128 


RETAKEN 


129 


strength for the effort required in driving the skiff 
against the wind and waves. In spite of the obstacles 
some progress was made and the next time he ob- 
tained a glimpse of his brother he was delighted to 
discover that the very difficulties which had beset 
him had been a help to Hiram. He was being steadily 
driven toward the approaching skiff. 

At last only a few yards remained between Amos 
and his brother. The waves were so rough that the 
skiff became doubly unwieldy, but at last Amos man- 
aged to reach his brother with the oar which he ex- 
tended, and as Hiram grasped the blade he was drawn 
speedily to the side of the skiff. 

The little skiff was nearly capsized in the efforts 
of Amos to pull his brother on board. But at last 
success crowned his efforts. 

Hiram, dripping, and for a moment almost ex- 
hausted by his struggles, sat back in the stern of the 
boat, unable to speak. Amos’s efforts were immedi- 
ately required to keep the little boat out of the trough 
of the sea. For a time no one spoke. 

As soon as Hiram regained a measure of his strength 
he pointed in the direction of the departing catboat 
and said, ‘‘Have they left us, Amos? They must 
have pushed me overboard, intending to drown me.” 

“They gave me the skiff,” replied Amos, “and 
it’s lucky for you that they did.” 

“Are they coming back?” 

“They said they were going straight to York.” 


130 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


“They will go to the bottom if they try to cross 
the lake in such a wind as this/^ 

“They are too wise to try that. They are more 
likely to land somewhere and wait until they get a 
fair wind.’’ 

“That’s what we’ll have to do, Hiram, won’t we?” 
inquired Amos. 

“Do what?” 

“Why try to make the shore. We can’t stay out 
here in the lake in this leaky old tub. Hadn’t I better 
try to run before the wind and make the nearest shore 
I can?” 

“Go ahead,” replied his brother. “We’ll have to 
take our chances.” 

The “chances,” however, did not seem to favor 
the boys or boat. 

The skiff was leaking badly. The oars were heavy 
and not adapted for use in such a little craft and 
despite Amos’s endeavors the most he could accom- 
plish was to keep the boat head on, permitting the 
wind to drive them toward the shore in the distance. 

When Hiram regained more strength he insisted 
upon taking his turn at the oars though the exchange 
of seats had perils of its own. He had scarcely un- 
dertaken his task before his right oar snapped near 
the blade. An exclamation of dismay escaped from 
his lips at the mishap and he stared blankly at his 
brother. 

“Take this oar,” called Hiram, shifting his remain- 


RETAKEN 


131 


ing oar, “and see if you can steer with it! If we 
can keep on going before the wind we may be able 
to get ashore/’ Hiram’s voice was trembling and 
he was more fully aware of their peril than he ac- 
knowledged to his younger brother. 

The little boat appeared to be making greater prog- 
ress than it really accomplished. Occasionally, in 
spite of Amos’s efforts, it turned and twisted and 
several times the boys were in danger of capsizing. 
Each time, however, the boat finally righted itself 
and plunged forward into the splashing waves. 

The sun, meanwhile, was dropping lower in the 
western sky and night was not far distant. The out- 
line of the shore toward which they were headed 
was more distinct now, but still at least two miles 
intervened between them and the haven which they 
were seeking. 

“We’ll never make it,” said Amos, his chin quiver- 
ing as he spoke. 

“Yes, we shall make it,” replied Hiram, striving 
to keep up his own courage as well as that of the 
frightened boy. “Besides, the wind may die down 
at sunset. It does that very often.” 

But even Hiram ceased talking as the wind con- 
tinued unabated and no signs of relief were to be 
seen. He looked at Amos, who was doing his ut- 
most to guide their course with the rude oar in his 
hands. The catboat had long since disappeared. 
Their sole hope depended upon their ability to gain 


132 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


the distant shore before darkness crept over the 
land. Had the end of all things come? Was the 
opportunity to which Hiram had so long been look- 
ing forward, of returning to his home, to be lost? 
If the little boat went down it was doubtful if any 
word ever would be received by the members of his 
family concerning its strange disappearance. 

The thought was more than the young soldier was 
able to bear. Calling to his brother to be careful, he 
started to rise from his seat to exchange places. As 
he did so, he suddenly sank back on the seat with an 
exclamation of surprise. 

‘‘Look yonder, he exclaimed, as he pointed toward 
the open lake. 

Glancing quickly behind him Amos saw not far 
away a sloop apparently following a course parallel 
to that of the boys. It was strange, he thought, that 
the boat had not been seen before. And yet there 
she was now in plain sight and apparently no more 
than a half a mile away. 

“Can we make her hear?’^ inquired Amos ex- 
citedly. 

“No,” replied Hiram. “Our only hope is to get 
their attention somehow, — if we can. I will take my 
coat and put it on the end of this broken oar and try 
to make some one on board see our signal of dis- 
tress. Keep tight hold of your oar,” he added warn- 
ingly, as in his tense interest, Amos for a moment 
neglected his task and allowed the skiff to be caught 


RETAKEN 


133 


once more in the trough of the sea. Both boys were 
thoroughly drenched now, but the little boat was 
righted, and headed again toward the shore. 

For a time Hiram waved the improvised signal, 
but apparently his efforts were unseen on board the 
sloop. 

To Amos's suggestion that the gunboat— for it 
was plain that the passing vessel belonged to the 
navy — might now see their signal, Hiram did not 
respond. The craft must be American he assured 
himself striving to maintain his courage. 

will have to stand up and try it," he said at 
last. ‘‘I am afraid we are so low on the water that 
the watch won 't sight us. ’ ’ 

“He will have to see us pretty soon, or it will be 
so dark he never will find us." 

“Keep up your courage, Amos," said Hiram, as, 
balancing himself carefully, he arose and renewed the 
waving of his coat in a last desperate attempt to at- 
tract the attention of the passing gunboat. 

“Let's try a call," suggested Amos anxiously. 
“It won't do any harm and they might hear us." 

Together the two brothers united in a shout that 
was loud and long; but the raging wind carried the 
sound toward the shore and both were convinced that 
the call for help could not be heard on board the 
sloop. 

“She's American, all right," suggested Hiram. 
“Look at her flag." 


134 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


The colors were visible now for the gunboat was 
nearer than when she had first been sighted. She 
was not more than a quarter mile distant. 

‘‘Will she come nearer?’’ inquired Amos trem- 
bling, as he watched the tossing sloop, which was so 
near and yet so far away that it did not seem possible 
their signal could be discovered. 

“I don’t know,” replied Hiram desperately. “We 
must make her see us. Get down on the bottom of the 
boat for a minute and brace me. I am going to make 
one more desperate attempt to attract their atten- 
tion.” 

The younger brother did as he was bidden, and 
rising to his full height Hiram again waved the im- 
provised signal. His arms were aching now and ho 
felt as if he were attempting to lift impossible weights. 
It was his last desperate effort. 

“They have seen us!” he exclaimed suddenly. 
“She’s coming up into the wind! That’s just what 
she’s doing! They are lowering a yawl, too! Yes, 
they have seen us. There are five men in the yawl,” 
he added as he anxiously watched the movements of 
the men. 

“It isn’t a yawl, it’s a four-oared gig/’ said Amos. 

“I don’t care what it is,” said Hiram laughing 
loudly in his excitement. “If it’s only a raft that will 
come near enough to take us on board I shall be sat- 
isfied.” 


RETAKEN 


135 


It was manifest, however, that the signal had been 
discovered and that help was coming from the gun- 
boat. With the steady pulling of the men the gig 
swept nearer and nearer. It was soon possible for 
the excited boys to discern the men on the approach- 
ing boat. A young boatswain was seated in the stern 
steering the boat, while four sailors clad in the uni- 
form of the United States Navy were pulling at the 
oars. In a few minutes the gig swept alongside, 
though the intervening time to Amos had seemed al- 
most endless. 

‘‘Give us your painter,’’ called the boatswain. 

“We haven’t any,” replied Amos. 

“Then stand by to take this rope!” said the boat- 
swain, at the same time rising from his seat and bal- 
ancing himself as he took a coil of rope which he pre- 
pared to throw. 

Twice his efforts failed and the coil fell short, but 
his third attempt was crowned with success, and 
Amos managed to seize the end of the rope before 
it slipped over the side of the skiff. 

“Hold fast!” called the boatswain. “We’ll take 
you in tow.” 

“Ay, ay, sir!” replied Amos, as he made the rope 
fast. His face was shining when he turned to look 
at his brother, and saw that Hiram’s excitement was 
scarcely less than his own. 

“Who are you?” inquired the boatswain as the 


136 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


skiff was drawn nearer. ‘‘Where did you come 
from ? What are you doing out here in the open lake 
in such a craft as that ? ’ ’ 

“Well tell you all about it/^ replied Hiram, “as 
soon as we get aboard. What sloop is that?^^ 

“ ‘That sloop’ is the Lady of the Lake. I’ll wait 
until I get you aboard before I ask any more ques- 
tions. ’ ’ 

Quickly resuming his seat, the boatswain ordered 
the men to give way and in a brief time the entire 
party was alongside the gunboat. A rope ladder was 
lowered, up which Hiram and Amos quickly climbed, 
and soon after were followed by the boatswain and 
his men, as soon as they had let the gig drop back to 
the stern of the sloop. 

The Lady of the Lake meanwhile had resumed her 
course and as the wind still held strong, she swept 
swiftly over the tossing waves. 

The rescue of the boys had been keenly watched 
by all the crew and as soon as the sloop had resumed 
her course, the captain, bidding Hiram and his 
brother follow him, led the way to his cabin. As 
soon as they entered, the officer turned to Hiram 
and said, “Who are you?” 

“My name is Hiram Proper, and this is my younger 
brother, Amos. I have been serving in the army at 
Niagara, and was sent with a message by General 
McClure for General Dearborn at Sackett’s Harbor. 
I gave him the message all right and then, as the 


RETAKEN 


137 


tirae for which I had enlisted had expired, I was to be 
permitted to return to my home/’ 

“Where is your home?” asked the officer sharply. 

“About one hundred miles up the shore from Os- 
wego. ’ ’ 

“Did you say your time had expired?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“Did you start from Sackett’s Harbor in that tub?” 

“No, sir,” replied Hiram in some confusion. “We 
had a catboat, which we were to use as far as Os- 
wego. The wind died down and we stopped this 
noon at Snow-shoe Island. There we found a couple 
of men who had escaped from the guardhouse — ” 

“Escaped?” interrupted the captain. “Were they 
Americans or British ? ’ ’ 

“British,” answered Hiram. “They were cap- 
tured at York.” 

“And escaped the guard at Sackett’s Harbor?” 

“That’s what they said.” 

“What were they doing on Snow-shoe Island?” 

“They said they had just stopped there to rest. 
They were in this skiff,” Hiram added, his confusion 
increasing. 

“And they took your catboat, and left you the 
skiff?” inquired the captain sharply. 

“No, sir, we took them with us in the catboat. We 
had two flintlocks and they had no arms at all. 
We thought we could take them on to Oswego and 
turn them over to the fort there.” 


138 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


‘^Why didn’t you do that? That was a good 
plan, ’ ’ said the captain, smiling grimly. 

“The wind came up,” exclaimed Hiram, “and I 
was afraid the catboat would capsize. While I was 
trying to take a reef in the sail one of them pushed 
me overboard. Then they gave my brother his 
choice between going on with them, or taking the 
skiff and trying to save me.” 

“And his choice was the latter?” inquired the cap- 
tain glancing not unkindly at Amos, as he spoke. 

“Yes, sir,” replied Amos, “that is what I did.” 

“I will talk with you more about this a little 
later. Just now you can make yourselves at home, 
or keep out of the way and we’ll take you to Oswego, 
where, if there is anything more I want to know, I 
shall be able to find it out.” 

Abruptly dismissed in this manner, Hiram and 
Amos walked toward the bow of the swiftly sailing 
sloop. Neither before had ever been on board such 
a craft. Her lines were beautiful. Her sails and 
rigging were new and her bow was cutting the waters 
like a knife. 

The interest of the two boys continued keen in 
their surroundings for an hour or more, and they 
were not unmindful of the glances of curiosity which 
were frequently given them by the members of the 
crew. 

No one among the sailors, however, was recognized 


RETAKEN 


139 


as an acquaintance by either of the impromptu pas- 
sengers, and as the boat sped on in her course, the 
interest in their immediate surroundings soon began 
to lessen. 

The sun by this time was just above the western 
horizon. The eastern shore toward which, only a 
little while before, they had been struggling desper- 
ately to make their way, was scarcely to be seen. 
There was only a faint line where the sky and the 
waters seemed to meet. 

The gale had ceased and the wind now was fair and 
not strong. At the rate at which they were moving, 
Oswego would be reached before many hours had 
elapsed. Suddenly Amos clutched his brother by the 
arm and as he pointed toward the shore he exclaimed, 
“Look at that sail, Hiram.’’ 

His brother instantly turned and looked in the di- 
rection Amos had indicated and after a brief silence 
said, “What do you make of it?” 

“I cannot just tell,” replied Amos, “but I think 
it may be our catboat.” 

“Go call the captain,” said Hiram quickly. “Per- 
haps with his glass he may be able to tell us what it 
is.” 

The younger brother did as he was bidden and in 
response to his announcement, the captain brought 
his glass and at once came to the place where the boys 
had been standing. For several minutes he looked 


140 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


carefully at the little sail in the distance and then 
handing the glass to Hiram said, ‘‘See what you can 
make of it/’ 

“I think that is our boat,” said Hiram after he 
had made his inspection. “Of course I can’t be sure, 
but it looks like it and there is not likely to be any 
sail in this part of the lake at such a time as this. 
It’s headed across the lake, too, and the men said 
they were going to try to make York.” 

Without another word the captain departed and 
in a brief time both boys were excited as well as 
pleased when they saw that the course of the Lady 
of the Lake was changed and that she was bearing 
down upon the little sail in the distance. It became 
evident in a little while that the catboat had dis- 
covered that she was an object of interest, for her 
own course speedily was changed and she was headed 
once more for the shore. The speed of the gunboat, 
however, was so much greater that she gained steadily 
upon the little craft and in the course of a half-hour 
Hiram was able, by means of the captain’s glass, to 
make out that there were only two men on board. 
Amos’s excitement increased greatly at the announce- 
ment and even the captain and the various members 
of the crew manifestly were interested now as the 
distance between the two vessels speedily decreased. 

On and on sped the Lady of the Lake until at last 
she was within a hundred feet of the little catboat. 


RETAKEN 


141 


^^What do you make of it now?’^ inquired the cap- 
tain, as he was standing beside the hoys. 

* ‘ I am sure that is our boat I ^ ^ replied Amos. ‘ ‘ And 
those two men on board are the prisoners who were 
brought from York and escaped at Sackett’s Harbor.” 


CHAPTER XI 


A MYSTERIOUS EPISTLE 

T he chase was ended and at the call from the cap- 
tain of the gunboat the smaller craft was brought 
about and the sail was lowered. In a brief time it 
was hauled close to the side of the sloop and the two 
prisoners were taken on board and their recent boat 
was dropped back to the stern where it was made 
fast and the voyage of the Lady of the Lake was 
speedily resumed. 

The interest of all on board had been centered on 
the two men and as soon as it was seen that each was 
wearing the uniform of a British sailor a shout went 
up from the Americans. 

Disregarding the interest of his crew, the captain 
at once ordered the two men to follow him to his 
quarters, and as the prisoners quietly obeyed, the one 
who had assumed the name of Amos Proper suddenly 
looked up and found himself face to face with the 
lad. His expression of astonishment was so evident 
that Amos laughed and when he saw the consterna- 
tion of the man Tom, who, aware of the interest of 
his companion, also glanced at the lad, and in open- 
142 


A MYSTERIOUS EPISTLE 


143 


mouthed wonder was staring at the boy as if he had 
seen his ghost, the delight of Amos increased. But 
there was no opportunity for conversation, because 
the men were not permitted to stop and soon disap- 
peared in the cabin of the captain. 

Hiram,” said Amos, ‘^who do you think those 
men thought we were?” 

‘^They acted as if they had seen you before,” 
laughed Hiram. 

“Yes, and they didn’t seem very glad to renew 
my acquaintance. It must strike them as a little 
strange to leave us out there in that old tub of a skiff 
and then after two or three hours have a gunboat 
swoop down from the lake and take them, and the 
minute they are on board to find themselves face to 
face with the men whom they had set adrift. ’ ’ 

“ ^Men’ is good,” replied Hiram, laughing. 

“Well, call us boys then; that’s all I am, but I 
thought you counted yourself among the men of the 
army.” 

“The men of the army aren’t very old,” replied 
Hiram. “Colonel Scott says the army of Washing- 
ton never averaged much more than eighteen years 
of age, and I don’t think the armies in this war of 
1812 are very much older, though they may be a 
little.” 

“Well, anyway,” said Amos, “I am waiting to see 
these men again and wondering what they will have 
to say to us. Tom was a good friend to me and I 


144 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


hope he won’t have too much trouble with the cap- 
tain.” 

As Amos spoke the boatswain, who had rescued: 
them from their plight in the gale, approached and 
said, ‘^The captain’s orders are for you to report in 
his cabin.” 

“Both of us?” inquired Hiram in surprise. 

“That’s what he said.” 

“Then there is nothing for us to do, Amos, but to 
go and find out what he w^ants.” 

The two boys at once made their way to the cap- 
tain’s quarters where they were speedily admitted. 
They found Captain Taylor seated before a small table 
in his tiny room, and before him were standing the 
two men who had been taken from the catboat. 
“Amos” was apparently unconcerned and grinned 
good-naturedly at the entrance of the boys. Tom, 
however, was awkwardly twirling his hat and gazing 
at the floor. Manifestly his plight was troubling him 
and he had slight interest even when the two boys 
were summoned. 

“Which one of you,” inquired the captain, turn- 
ing to the boys, “knows these men?” 

“I saw them,” replied Amos, “in York and then 
I saw them after they were taken to Sackett’s Har- 
bor. Indeed,” he added, “I saw Tom,” and he 
pointed to the sailor at his left, “before I went to 
York. He was one of the crew of the Duke of Glou- 


A MYSTERIOUS EPISTLE 


145 


cester, and when it came across the lake and the 
men landed on the shore near our place — ” 

‘^Why did they land there?’’ 

‘‘Because they were looking for a man who had 
been taken by the press-gang and had managed to get 
ashore. ’ ’ 

“Did you know who he was?” 

“No, sir.” 

“Did you see him?” 

“Yes, sir; he came to our house.” 

“When?” 

“While he was trying to get away. He was black 
and blue and had been whipped with the ‘cat’ so 
many times that his body was a mass of bruises.” 

“Did they get him?” inquired the captain, his face 
darkening with anger. 

“No, sir. We hid him in the corncrib and cov- 
ered him over with bags. They went around the 
place several times but they didn’t find him. They 
searched our house from cellar to garret, and finally 
when they went back they had not found their man 
and there were two of their gang that I had locked in 
our cellar.” Amos smiled somewhat consciously as he 
looked up and saw that Tom and his companion were 
staring at him and that his statement had been of 
intense interest to both of them. 

“And the gang took you in place of the man who 
got away from them?” inquired the captain. 


146 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


*^They took me with them,” replied Amos, smil- 
ing. 

^‘And did they give you the ‘cat’?” 

‘ ‘ They threatened to, but I made up my mind that 
I would do what they told me until my chance of es- 
cape came.” 

“And did you escape?” 

“No, sir. I was on board the Duke of Gloucester 
when she was taken by our fleet and I didn’t have 
a chance to tell any one who I was until we were 
landed in Sackett’s Harbor, and there I had some 
trouble because this man,” and Amos pointed to his 
double as he spoke, “said he had the same name I 
have, and after my brother got permission for me to 
go and there was a call made for me, this man said 
he was Amos Proper and that the call was for him.” 

‘ ‘ Is that the way you escaped ? ’ ’ 

“I suppose so. I know I didn’t get away for some 
time and if my brother had not been in Sackett’s 
Harbor I don’t believe I would have gotten away at 
all.” 

“What were you doing in Sackett’s Harbor?” in- 
quired the captain, as he turned to Hiram. 

“I was sent there with a message from Niagara, 
sir, as I told you when we first came ^aboard the 
Lady of the Lahe/^ 

“Yes, I recollect,” said the captain, “and I think 
you told me also that your time had expired.” 

“Yes, sir,” replied Hiram, “and I was in the cat- 


A MYSTERIOUS EPISTLE 


147 


boat on my way to Oswego. We were to have the 
boat as far as the Fort and then I was to go home the 
best way I could.” 

“Why do you want to go home again at this time of 
the year? We are just beginning our activities, and 
before the summer is ended Lake Ontario and Lake 
Erie, for the matter of that, will see some lively times. 
Perhaps you have heard what is being done on Lake 
Erie?” 

“This man,” said Hiram, pointing to one of the 
prisoners, “told me that a young captain named 
Perry, from Rhode Island, was building a fleet at 
Erie.” 

“How did you know that?” demanded Captain 
Taylor, turning sharply to one of the prisoners. 

“I am thinking every one in the British Army 
and Navy knows what is going on on Lake Erie,” re- 
torted the second “Amos” unabashed. 

Once more the captain turned to the two brothers 
and said, “You recognize these two men, do you, as 
the prisoners who escaped from SacketFs Harbor?” 

“Yes, sir,” replied Amos. 

Again the captain turned to the prisoners and 
said, “I want your names. What is yours?” he 
added, looking at the sailor who had been Amos’s 
friend in his time of need. 

“My name is Tom ’Arris.” 

“And you are one of the crew of the Duke of Glou- 
cester?^^ 


148 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


“Hi were, sir.” 

“And you were taken prisoner by our fleet T’ 

“Hi were, sir.” 

“And escaped from Sackett^s Harbor?’^ 

“Hi wouldn’t called it escaping bexactly, sir.” 

“What do you call it?” broke in the captain 
sharply. 

“You see, sir,” replied Tom, “it were this way, 
sir.” 

Abruptly breaking in upon the explanation, the 
captain turned to the second prisoner and inquired; 

“What is your name?” 

“Amos Proper,” replied the man with a grin. 

“That isn’t his name,” spoke up the real Amos. 
“That’s my name.” 

“What have you to say to that?” asked th« cap- 
tain turning sharply to the prisoner. 

“My name is Amos Proper,” said the sailor again, 
winking at the true Amos as he did so. 

“If you give me a false name it will be the worse 
for you,” retorted the captain. “Is that your 
name?” 

“It is, sir,” maintained the prisoner. 

“Very well,” said the captain, writing the name in 
the book before him on his desk. “And were you 
one of the crew of the Duke of Gloucester?” 

“No, sir.” 

“Where do you belong?” 

“I belong along the lake somewhere,” replied the 


A MYSTERIOUS EPISTLE 


149 


prisoner. have served at Quebec, and I have been 
stationed at Montreal, and I was brought up the St. 
Lawrence to Kingston and I had just arrived at 
York a little while before your fleet came. I hap- 
pened to be on board the Duke of Gloucester and that 
is the way it was that your men got me. ’ ’ 

Amos noticed that Tom was staring blankly at his 
companion and that his declaration was as surprising 
to him as it was to the true Amos Proper. 

‘‘Captain Taylor,’’ spoke up Amos quickly, “ask 
the other man what this fellow’s name is.” 

“That’s a good suggestion,” said the captain with 
a smile. “What is his name?” he asked of Tom. 

‘ ‘ I can ’t readily say, sir, ’ ’ replied Tom in some em- 
barrassment, “seeing as I never saw him until the day 
your fleet came to York.” 

“What did you call him?” 

“I can’t recollect, sir, as ’ow Hi called him by any 
name, sir.” 

“You will have a chance, each of you,” said the 
captain sharply, “to tell all you know about each 
other when we come to Oswego. Until that time I 
will have you kept in the forecastle. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ There isn ’t much danger, captain, ’ ’ said the sailor 
who had appropriated Amos’s name, “that we shall 
be able to get away from your sloop. Why not let us 
stay out on deck. We’ll be glad to lend a hand any- 
way you want us to.” 

“Very well,” replied Captain Taylor good-na- 


150 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


turedly. “I guess there isn’t much danger of your 
going ashore right away, and before we reach Os- 
wego I will see that you both are looked after prop- 
erly.” 

Thank you kindly, sir,” replied the sailor in a 
manner that, to Amos, seemed almost disrespectful. 
As the captain, however, apparently did not heed the 
manner of his prisoner, Amos did not feel called upon 
to make any suggestions, and aware that he and his 
brother were dismissed from the cabin, they both 
made their way to the deck. 

* ‘ That other man means mischief. I don ’t see why 
the captain gave him the liberty of the deck when 
he is a British prisoner, and ought to be shut up,” 
said Hiram when they once more were in the open 
air. 

‘‘I don’t either,” assented Amos. don’t like 
the fellow and I believe he means mischief before 
we’re done with him. Here he comes now,” added 
Amos hastily, as the sailor was seen approaching 
the place where the two boys were standing on the 
deck. 

believe your name is Amos Proper?” said the 
man mockingly as he drew near. 

‘‘That’s my name,” replied Amos, “and I only 
wish I knew what your name is, too/’ 

“You ought to be familiar with my name,” replied 
the man. “We’ll have to call you Amos the First 
and I will be Amos the Second, or you can be num- 


A MYSTERIOUS EPISTLE 


151 


ber 1 and I’ll be number 2. I wanted to be sure 
you were the man,” he added banteringly. that 
is your name before I — ” 

is my name all right,” broke* in Amos angrily. 

‘‘Very good, sir,” respoi^ided the prisoner, his smile 
becoming still more mocking, as he noticed the anger 
of the lad. “You see I have something which I 
thought perhaps I had better give you.” 

“I guess it doesn’t belong to me,” said Amos. 

“No, it doesn’t, but it is for your sister.” 

“For whom?” demanded Hiram promptly. 

“For Prudy Proper,” said the prisoner as he took 
a letter from the inner pocket of his coat and handed 
it to Amos. “That’s the proper direction, is it not?” 
he added with a smile of meaning. 

In surprise Amos took the letter and as he looked 
at the address he was silent when he saw that the 
man had spoken truly, for the missive was addressed 
to ; 

“Miss Prudy Proper, 

“Kindness of Amos Proper.” 

“You see,” continued the prisoner, “the letter was 
for your sister and was to be delivered to her by 
Amos Proper. From present appearances this Amos 
Proper,” he patted himself on his chest as he spoke, 

‘ ‘ may be slightly delayed in his attempt to carry out 
the plans of the sender. You, however, are also 
Amos Proper and to you I will commit the care of 


152 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


this epistle, believing that some time you may be able 
to return to your home.’’ 

The language and manner as well as the expression 
on his face were so puzzling to Amos that it was diffi- 
cult for him to determine whether or not he was in 
earnest. The letter which he held in his hand, how- 
ever, was evidently correct and Amos at once placed 
it within his own pocket. 

^‘I don’t understand,” he said, as he looked up at 
the man. 

‘‘You don’t have to,” replied the prisoner. “No 
gentleman ever breaks the seal of a letter which has 
been directed to another, much less if the epistle 
chances to be written to a lady. If you will kindly 
deliver that epistle which was entrusted to me, I shall 
be your very humble servant.” And the man bowed 
low and did not attempt to conceal the expression 
of mockery that appeared on his face as he did so. 
Amos looked questioningly at his brother and at a 
nod from him he decided to retain the message which 
had been given him. 

Both the manner of its deliverer and the difficulty 
of understanding how he had come into possession of a 
message for his sister were matters for which Amos 
could not find any explanation at the time. 

It was not long afterwards, however, before the 
prisoners were taken below, and the boys, after 
sharing the supper provided for the crew, were once 
more on deck. 


A MYSTERIOUS EPISTLE 


153 


The stars had appeared by this time and the waters 
of the lake were glittering like specks of silver in the 
wake of the swiftly-moving sloop. Apparently the 
offer of the boys to assist the members of the crew 
had not been accepted, and they were looked upon 
as passengers who were to be carried to the Fort at 
Oswego. 

‘‘What do you suppose this letter means T’ in- 
quired Amos of his brother when the boys were stand- 
ing together by the rail. 

“I haven’t the slightest idea,” responded Hiram. 

‘‘Do you think I ought to give it to Prudy 

“I don’t see any harm in doing that.” 

“Who do you suppose wrote it?” 

“I told you I haven’t the slightest idea. It may 
be a good while before she will have it, anyway, so 
I shouldn’t worry very much about it,” suggested 
Hiram with a smile, as one of the crew approached 
and told the boys where they would find hammocks 
slung for them, and to which they might retire if 
they desired. 

The suggestion was at once acted upon and the 
brothers speedily disappeared from the deck. 


CHAPTER XII 


THE RETURN 

E arly the following morning when Hiram and 
Amos appeared on deck they saw that the Lady 
of the Lake had been made fast to the dock not far 
from the ancient fort, which had been erected at 
Oswego. As it was the first time either of the boys 
had been in the place their interest in the sight be- 
fore them naturally was keen. 

Sackett’s Harbor had been made the headquarters 
of the Northern Army of which General Dearborn was 
in command at the time. Oswego was a general and 
important station on the southern shore of the lake 
and supplies for the army as well as equipments for 
those who were to march westward to Niagara, 
through what was largely an unbroken wilderness, 
had been collected here. 

Here, also, were supplies which were to be taken, 
some by boat and some overland, to Sackett’s Harbor. 
What the plans for the armies for the coming sum- 
mer were to be, few knew. 

Afterward it was declared that the leaders were 
without very definite plans at all and that this very 
164 


THE RETURN 


155 


fact had led to much of the confusion and inactivity 
which marked the efforts of the Americans through- 
out the year 1813. 

The victories on the ocean, which already had be- 
gun to make this year famous were at this time mostly 
unknown by the soldiers and sailors of the north. 
News traveled slowly and even when it was received 
the report ofttimes was treated as if it were a mere 
rumor. Indeed, rumors and reliable reports were 
so strongly mingled, to the confusion of the men, 
that it was difficult for any one to distinguish the 
true from the false. 

Hiram and Amos Proper were deeply interested in 
the current reports which they heard at Oswego, but 
the desire of both boys was so keen to depart on their 
long journey homeward, that as soon as they had 
heard what the latest rumors were they were eager 
to be gone. 

It was easy for them to obtain this permission 
and the captain of the Lady of the Lake, who ap- 
parently was more kindly disposed than most of 
the officers of that time, even suggested to the boys 
that they might take the catboat, in which they had 
set sail from Sackett's Harbor. The suggestion, how- 
ever, was quickly opposed by the authorities at Os- 
wego, who claimed that the little craft was needed 
by them. Against such a declaration there was no 
appeal, though each of the boys was permitted to 
take a flint-lock and a goodly supply of bullets and 


156 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


powder, before they started along the trail which 
led to what was then known as the far west. 

It was noon when Hiram and Amos left Oswego. 
Over the shoulders of each boy were slung the pow- 
der-horns and bullet-pouches, and with a rifle in the 
hands of each, they departed on their long and peril- 
ous journey. The season of the year, however, was 
one in which their traveling would be comparatively 
easy. The snows had disappeared and yet the 
weather was not yet intensely warm; besides, their 
way led through many a forest where the shade would 
be grateful in the heat of the day. It was true that 
there were dangers to be faced and in certain places 
there was the possibility of losing their way, but for 
the greater part of the journey a rough road had 
been made by the army for the transportation of its 
artillery and heavier supplies. In some cases, too, 
there were strips of corduroy road — roadways made 
of rough logs placed in parallel lines in the muddy 
places. A scanty supply of food had been secured, 
before the boys departed and they were hopeful of 
obtaining some game, which abounded in parts of the 
forests. 

The walking they discovered was not difficult and 
they estimated that at least twelve miles had been cov- 
ered when near nightfall they stopped for supper 
and to secure a place where they might sleep. Each 
of the boys carried a blanket strapped on his back 
and a few small tin cooking utensils. 


THE RETURN 


157 


^‘Here’s our place,” said Amos when they dis- 
covered a bubbling spring of water near the side of 
the road. Behind the spring were clumps of cedar 
trees growing on the slope of a small hill, or mound. 
Beyond this apparently there was a little valley 
on the farther side of which a high hill was to be 
seen. 

‘‘All right, lad,” responded Hiram. “I guess you 
are ready to stop.” 

“I am no more ready than you are,” retorted the 
younger brother, sensitive to any implication of in- 
ability on his part to keep up with his companion. 

“Have it your own way,” laughed Hiram good- 
naturedly, as he swung his pack to the ground and 
drew a huge knife from his pocket. “Which will 
you do,” he added, “take this and cut some wood 
for the fire, or will you be the cook?” 

“I’ll cut the wood,” laughed Amos; “then I can 
find fault with the cook and the cooking if I want to. ’ ’ 

“Go ahead,” rejoined his brother; and both boys 
were quickly at work. 

In a few minutes Amos had provided a roaring fire, 
having first secured several flat stones out of which 
he fashioned an improvised fireplace. Strips of bacon 
were cut from the piece which had been secured be- 
fore their departure from Oswego and placed in the 
small frying pan over the flames. Quantities of In- 
dian-meal were stirred and boiled and then, by Hi- 
ram, were made into flap- jacks. Indeed the young 


158 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


soldier prided hirnself upon his skill in the prepara- 
tion of this part of their meal. It was a simple 
supper, hut the hunger of the young travellers made 
them forgetful of its lack of variety and when at 
last it was ended both declared that they had had a 
supper ‘‘fit for a King.’’ Later they secured a dry 
place among the trees on the hillside beyond, where 
they cut the balsam tips and made a bed on which, 
wrapped in their blankets, they slept soundly until 
morning. 

When morning came the day promised to be one of 
the fairest that May could produce. The trees now 
were clad in their new garments of spring. The heat 
of the sun was tempered by the shade of the forest 
and the songs of multitudes of birds in the near-by 
trees all combined to make the time one that appealed 
strongly to Amos. The pleasure too of being in the 
company of Hiram, for he entertained all a younger 
brother’s respect for his elder brother, as well as the 
knowledge that they were now free to continue on 
their way homeward, increased Amos’s delight. 

The breakfast which was soon prepared was not 
unlike the evening meal of the preceding day, but 
the appetites of the boys were keen, and neither com- 
plained of the lack of variety. 

In a brief time both were ready to resume their 
journey and were about to depart from the camp 
when they were startled by the sound of the voices 
of men approaching from the rear. To Amos’s sug- 


THE RETURN 


159 


gestion that they should withdraw into the bushes 
and permit the approaching band to pass, Hiram 
shook his head and insisted that both should remain 
within plain sight in the rough roadway. 

It was not long before it was seen that a half dozen 
or more men were drawing near, but as there was no 
fear of their being from the enemy ^s lines their ap- 
proach was eagerly awaited. 

When the strangers discovered the two boys, the 
entire band stopped for a moment to make certain 
that others also were not with them. Confident that 
they had no one to fear, the band resumed its ap- 
proach, to the place where Hiram and Amos were 
awaiting their coming. 

‘‘Morn’n!’’ called one who seemed to be the leader, 
as he hailed the boys. 

‘‘Good morning to you,^^ responded Hiram. “You 
have an early start. 

“Yes, we left Oswego soon after midnight. Did 
you come from there? 

“Yes, we left early in the afternoon.” 

“Where are you bound?” 

“Just now,” responded Hiram, “we are bound for 
my father’s house, which is about seventy miles from 
here.” 

“Going to follow the corduroy road?” 

“We expect to.” 

“We are going in the same direction. The more 
there are of us the safer we’ll be, though I guess we 


160 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


shall not have to be on our guard very much against 
any redcoats on this side of the lake. ’ ’ 

“You can’t always tell about that,” replied Hiram. 
“Here’s my young brother just now on his way home. 
The press-gang got him a few days ago and took 
him to York.” 

“Did they come on this side of the lake?” asked 
the man in surprise. 

“Yes, they came right to our house. They were 
chasing a man who had got away from the Duke 
of Gloucester.^ ^ 

“Did they get him?” 

“No, they didn’t; but they took Amos in his place.” 

“How did he get away from them?” 

“Why, he was taken to Sackett’s Harbor with the 
crew of the Duke of Gloucester and there, of course, 
he explained who he was and they let him start for 
home. Where are you bound?” 

“We’re for Lake Erie,” replied the man. “We’re 
expecting to join young Perry and help him build 
his fleet.” 

“Good for you!” exclaimed Hiram with enthu- 
siasm. “If I enlist again I’m thinking pretty 
strongly of going out there, too.” 

“You’ll have to make haste if you want to get into 
action this summer.” 

“Is his fleet ready?” 

“It ought to be. He has been working on it since 
winter. ’ ’ 


THE RETURN 


161 


Where do you come from?” inquired Hiram. 

‘‘All along the line,” laughed the man good-na- 
turedly. “I sailed from Newport for New York, then 
sailed up the Hudson to Albany, and from Albany 
I have been working my way up to Oswego, some- 
times marching with the troops and sometimes go- 
ing alone. On the way up, these fellows joined 
me,” he continued as he pointed to the men who 
were with him, “and maybe now you’ll join the 
band, too. If we keep on this way by the time 
we see Lake Erie we’ll have a very respectable com- 
pany to add to the forces which Captain Perry has 
now. ’ ’ 

“He came from Newport, too, didn’t he?” inquired 
Hiram interested at once. 

“He did that. Little Rhody can provide the men 
to sail the seas, if I do say it!” 

“Then you belong in Rhode Island too?” laughed 
Hiram. 

“I live in Jamestown, which is in the Providence 
Plantations, but this is all one so far as we are con- 
cerned now, though we still call our little State the 
State of Rhode Island and Providence Plantations. 
I guess these men who are up here on these fresh- 
water ponds won’t be sorry to have a few men who 
have had a taste of salt water to help them out in 
their troubles. ’ ’ 

“What is your name?” inquired Hiram. 

“Gordon Hopkins. My uncle was the first man in 


162 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


the Revolution to have command of an American 
fleet/' 

The relative of the Revolutionary naval leader was 
a young man, not much, if any, older than Hiram. 
He was possessed of a strong, well-knit frame and 
black eyes, which showed the keen interest which he 
took in all that was occurring about him. It was 
manifest that his opinion of himself and his ability 
was not slight, but there was also an air of confidence 
which was somewhat reassuring. Indeed, both boys 
felt somehow drawn to the young man though his 
companions had not especially appealed to them. 

In a brief time the journey was resumed and the 
men had not advanced far on their march before it 
became evident that although Gordon's knowledge of 
the sea might be all that he claimed for it, his ex- 
periences in the woods had been somewhat limited. 
It was Hiram who several times had to select the way 
and lead his companions into the rough roadway from 
which frequently they were tempted to stray. * A 
stop at noon was made for dinner and the supplies 
which the newcomers provided added much to the en- 
joyment of all. 

Amos, being the youngest in the entire party, was 
given the privilege of cutting the wood and looking 
after the fire while Hiram assumed the duties of 
chief cook. There was an air of enthusiasm and in- 
terest in the entire band which was most inspiring. 
Perhaps their ignorance of what lay before them in- 


THE RETURN 


163 


creased their fearlessness, but at all events both boys 
found in the company a pleasure that was keen. Gor- 
don had many tales of the sea to relate and his en- 
thusiasm over the victory which the Americans had 
already won on the ocean was so contagious that he 
almost persuaded his companions that the success 
might be repeated on the Great Lakes. 

The young sailor’s opinion of these fresh inland 
seas, however, was one of good-natured tolerance as 
he compared them with the great ocean upon which 
he had sailed since he was a boy. But Gordon Hop- 
kins, as well as Hiram and Amos Proper, was soon 
to find that these ^^fresh-water ponds,” as they were 
slightingly termed, were to provide excitement greater 
than any of them had experienced. 

About the middle of the afternoon of the third day 
of their journey Hiram and Amos led the way from 
the road and turned from the woods toward their 
home, which now was only a few miles distant. 

Accepting the urgent invitation of the boys, their 
six companions followed them. The Proper home 
near the shore of Lake Ontario might be a rude af- 
fair and its quarters might be somewhat cramped, 
but its spirit of hospitality and welcome for the 
friends of its inmates was unquestionable, as the 
visitors soon were to learn. In spite of the long, 
wearisome journey both Hiram and Amos now began 
to walk more rapidly, the thought of soon being at 
home providing an additional incentive. 


164 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


‘‘There’s More!” exclaimed Amos excitedly as in 
the distance sounds of a dog barking was heard. 

“What did you call him?” inquired Gordon. 

“More.” 

“Is that the name of the dog?” asked the young 
Rhode Islander in surprise. 

“Yes,” laughed Amos. 

“Where in the world did you find that name, and 
what does it mean?” 

“When he was a puppy,” explained Amos, “an 
old sailor spent one night at our house and he wanted 
to name the dog after the one that he said took care 
of Lazarus, the beggar.” 

“Nobody ever knew the name of that dog,” pro- 
tested Gordon. 

“This sailor said that Lazarus’s dog was named 
‘Moreover,’ and he wanted us to name our puppy 
that. ’ ’ 

“Where did he find the name of that dog?” 

“Why the sailor said it was gotten from the Bi- 
ble — ‘Moreover the dog(s) came and licked his 
sores.’ We all laughed when he told us about it, but 
he was so strong in his opinion and as we all liked 
the old fellow we told him we would do it, and so we 
called our puppy ‘Moreover’ and then shortened it to 
‘More.’ Here he comes now!” added Arnos eagerly 
as the sound of a body crushing through the brush 
was heard, and a moment later the dog plainly was 


seen. 


THE RETURN 


165 


In response to a loud whistle, the intelligent ani- 
mal, which had stopped for a. moment and stared at 
the approaching men as if he were uncertain what 
the character of his welcome ought to be, disregarding 
all other things ran swiftly to Amos, whining and 
crying, and frantically leaping about him and show- 
ing his delight at the return of his young master. 

In a brief time the little company had advanced 
to a place from which the log house could he seen. 
Bidding their companions follow, the boys now began 
to run. ‘‘Who^s that in the door?’’ inquired Amos 
abruptly as he saw a stranger standing there. 

Instantly both hoys halted and looked keenly at the 
man who was also plainly interested in their approach. 
Thoughts of the man who had escaped from the press- 
gang, as well as of the two British sailors whom he 
had shut in the cellar of the house, flashed through 
Amos’s mind. Was the man before them a friend or 
an enemy? Quickly disregarding the questions and 
the fear that had arisen at the sight of an unknown 
man in his father’s house, Amos called to his older 
brother and both boys ran swiftly toward the house. 
More following at the heels of the boys in his delight 
at the return of the long absent members of the house- 
hold. 


CHAPTER XIII 


GUESTS 



HE approach of Hiram and Amos, followed as 


1 they were at a distance by the men who had 
joined them on the way for Oswego, seemed to have 
a startling effect upon the stranger in the doorway. 
Abruptly he disappeared within the house, but Mr. 
Proper himself took his place and as soon as he dis- 
covered who the approaching visitors were, began to 
run to meet them. 

The first impression of the boys was speedily for- 
gotten in their eagerness to greet their father. As 
soon as these greetings were given both boys pushed 
past their father and rushed into the house where a 
similar scene was enacted when they discovered their 
mother and Prudy, both waiting to receive them. 

‘‘Who are the men with you?’^ inquired Mr. Proper 
when a measure of quiet had been restored. 

“They joined us on the way from Oswego,’^ ex- 
plained Hiram. 

“Yes, but who are theyT’ 

“They are bound for Erie, where they are to join 
Captain Perry.’’ 

“How do you know they are?” 


166 


GUESTS 


167 


‘'Why they said so/’ replied Hiram in surprise. 

“Our friend Simeon was suspicious of them. He 
thought they might be another press-gang looking for 
him.” 

“WTio is Simeon?” inquired Hiram. 

“Why, of course, you don’t know,” explained his 
father, “but while I was away it seems he came to 
the house one day when the crew of the Duke of Glou- 
cester was chasing him. It was about the same time 
when Amos, here, disappeared,” added Mr. Proper 
glancing affectionately at his youngest boy as he 
spoke. “We have kept Simeon here ever since, and 
now, Amos, tell us where have you been? Your 
mother has been almost distracted not knowing 
whether you had been shot, or drowned in the lake, 
or what had become of you.” 

“The gang took me,” responded Amos, not without 
pride now that he had come safely through the event. 
“When they couldn’t have the man they were look- 
ing for, they — ” 

“They took you, did they?” inquired his father. 

“They did. And they carried me away in the 
Duke of Gloucester; but lucky for me right after 
they arrived at York the expedition from Sackett’s 
Harbor came there and got me away.” 

“What expedition?” 

“Why, haven’t you heard about that, father?” 
Amos's feeling of importance was increasing rapidly 
for not only was he the center of attraction, as the 


168 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


lost that had been found, but he was also to be the 
bearer of important and exciting news of events in 
which he had had no small part. 

“Why,” continued the boy, “the Americans sent 
all their fleet over there and General Dearborn and 
General Pike brought their men. General Pike was 
killed and they took me away with the prisoners and 
if it hadn’t been for Hiram, I guess I’d still be shut 
up at Saekett’s Harbor and maybe sent to Kingston 
or Montreal.” 

“Explain yourself, boy,” said his father sternly. 
“I don’t know what you’re talking about.” 

“Why, the press-gang took me when they couldn’t 
find the man they were looking for,” repeated Amos 
still more excitedly, “and they carried me in the 
Duke of Gloucester across the lake to York, when the 
magazine blew up.” 

“What magazine?” broke in his father. 

“Why, the redcoats at York. It killed a lot of the 
redcoats and a good many of our men, too, and Gen- 
eral Pike was one of them. Then they took the Duke 
of Gloucester and about two hundred and ninety pris- 
oners, after the rest of the redcoats had run away, 
and sailed back to Sackett’s Harbor. When we got 
there I tried to tell some of them that I wasn’t a 
Jackie at all even if I did wear a uniform, and then 
Hiram helped me out and I came home with him.” 

“What were you doing in Sackett’s Harbor?” asked 
Mr. Proper in surprise of his older boy. 


GUESTS 


169 


^‘Why, I went there from Niagara,” explained Hi- 
ram, “with a message. It took me a little longer 
for my time was out; but I didn’t mind.” 

“Yes,” broke in Amos, “and we took the two 
prisoners that got away, — ” 

“What is the boy talking about,” asked his father, 
nevertheless smiling at the lad as he spoke. 

‘ ‘ Why, it was this way, ’ ’ explained Amos. ‘ ‘ When 
they said Amos Proper might be released there was 
another prisoner there who said that was his name 
and he walked out almost before any one knew what 
he was doing and he helped another man out too. 
They got our boat away from us and then the Lady 
of the Lake took them and we left them at Oswego.” 

“This story,” said Mr. Proper shaking his head, 
“is all mixed up for me. You will have to tell me 
more about it some other time. We’ll talk about 
that afterward.” 

While Hiram and his father and mother were busy, 
Amos beckoned to his sister to come with him out of 
the house. 

“Who are these men?” inquired Prudy as she saw 
the six recent companions of her brothers lying on the 
grass near the house. 

“They are some men who joined us on our way 
from Oswego,” replied Amos in an important man- 
ner. 

Indeed Amos’s feeling that he was one of the chief 
causes in the excitement of the homecoming had 


170 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


manifestly added much to his general air of satis- 
faction with the world at large and with himself in 
particular. 

‘‘IVe got something for you, Prudy,’’ he said, ‘‘but 
I don’t know whether I shall give it to you or not.” 

“What is it? Why not?” demanded the girl. 

“It is a letter,” said Amos. 

“A letter! Let me have it right away!” 

“But I’m not sure that I ought to give it to you.” 

“If it’s for me, you’re not the judge of that at 
all,” said Prudy. “Let me have it this minute!” 

Amos took the letter in his hand and extended it 
toward his sister, hut as she reached for it he abruptly 
drew it back and thrust it into his pocket. 

“I guess I will ask mother about it first,” he said. 

“Give me that letter this minute!” 

“What will you do if I don’t?” inquired Amos 
banteringly. 

“Take it away from you.” 

“You might try that if you want to, Prudy, but 
I don’t believe you can do that any more. Honest 
Injun, though, if you can get it that way, I will let 
you have it.” 

“That’s very kind of you,” replied the girl scorn- 
fully. “If I can get it of course you will let me have 
it. You let me have it anyway, won’t you, Amos?” 
she begged, her voice and manner quickly changing. 
“Where did you get it?” she added. 

“A man gave it to me.” 


GUESTS 


171 


‘‘Who was he?” 

“I don’t know.” 

“You don’t know?” she demanded. “Are you 
sure the letter was for me?” 

“That’s what it says,” said Amos, drawing the 
letter from his pocket and looking at the directions, 
“Miss Prudy Proper,” he read aloud, hut he stopped 
abruptly, for the letter suddenly was seized by his 
sister, who ran swiftly toward the house with her 
brother in swift pursuit. 

Perhaps the long journey which Amos had made 
had left him somewhat weary, but at all events he did 
not overtake the fleeing girl until she had arrived in 
the house where she instantly claimed the protection 
of her mother, who was beaming affectionately upon 
her lost boy, as he darted into the room. 

“You’re at your old tricks again, Amos,” she said 
reprovingly, though she smiled as she spoke. 

“What old tricks?” asked Amos. 

“Why, teasing your sister.” 

“I’m not teasing her, ’ ’ said Amos. ‘ ‘ She snatched 
something out of my hand.” 

“It was mine, anyway,” asserted Prudy, “and it’s 
no crime to take what belongs to you.” 

The girl looked fearlessly at her brother, confident 
that he would make no reference to what the posses- 
sion was. 

“Prudy,” said Mrs. Proper quickly, “you and 
Amos must help me set the table. There are six 


172 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


men who are to be here to-night besides our own 
family/’ 

^ ‘ Where ’s Hiram ? ’ ’ demanded Amos abruptly. ‘ ‘ I 
want him to help, too.” 

‘^He’s gone home,” explained his mother. 

^‘He might have stayed long enough to help us out,” 
growled the boy, though there was no ill nature in his 
word or manner. 

^‘He was anxious to get home,” said his mother, 
“and I don’t believe it will take him very long to 
cover the half-mile between our house and his.” 

“I guess it wouldn’t, if he thought he had to do 
a girl’s work if he stayed here,” grumbled Amos. 
Nevertheless, the lad at once entered upon the task 
which was not unfamiliar to him, because within the 
past year he had been compelled not only to look 
after the farm but also to be helpful to his mother 
and sister as well. There were no opportunities for 
conversation concerning the letter which Prudy had 
secured while the others were in the same room with 
them. 

It was not long before the guests were summoned 
and were seated about the long, rude table in the 
kitchen. Both table and house were the results of 
the work of Mr. Proper’s own hands. The furnish- 
ings were so simple as almost to be crude and the 
fare was equally simple, but the warm hospitality 
was manifest, and at any event the manifest pleasure 
of the men in once more being able to share in a fam- 


GUESTS 


173 


ily meal was even more evident than the satisfaction 
of the warm-hearted woman providing for her unex- 
pected visitors. 

For a few minutes there was silence following the 
simple grace that was said by the head of the house- 
hold. Every man was busy in the task of rightly 
disposing of the food which had been heaped upon 
his plate. 

Conversation, however, could not long be delayed, 
for the recent excitement in the Proper household 
as well as the exciting evidences of the war were 
continually in every man’s mind. 

Amos’s story was again related and this time by 
means of certain questions, all the desired informa- 
tion was obtained. The lad was complimented upon 
his success in being made a prisoner in such a way 
that it eventually made him free and restored him to 
his home. 

‘‘It is not often,” said Gordon, “that a man can 
work that. If it wasn’t for going out to join Cap- 
tain Perry, I would be almost tempted to try it my- 
self if I thought I could get back to Newport that 
way.” 

“Do you know Captain Perry?” inquired Mr. 
Proper. 

“Know 01 Perry? I should say I did!” replied 
the man enthusiastically. “He’s a little older than 
I am; but we have shot yellow legs and gone blue- 
fishing and dug clams together ever since we could 


174 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


toddle on the beach. He has been off on one or 
two voyages when I wasn’t with him, but I guess 
I know him a good deal better than I know you, Mr. 
Proper. ’ ’ 

“You’d have to if you know him at all,’’ replied 
the host with a smile. “Why do you go out on Lake 
Erie?” 

“I told you,” replied Gordon in apparent sur- 
prise. “It’s to join 01 — I mean Captain Perry. He 
is building a fleet there, you know.” 

“And some say he will never be able to use it.” 

“Use it ?” exclaimed Gordon. “Use it? Don’t you 
be in doubt that he will use it if he has to come 
straight up Niagara Falls, and do his flghting on 
Lake Ontario.” 

“I guess you mean he’ll go over the Falls, if he 
went to fight on Ontario,” spoke up Amos. 

“Maybe so,” replied Gordon with a laugh. “I 
don’t know much about your geography out here. 
They tell me that is quite a good-sized waterfall.” 

“I think you will agree that it is after you have 
seen it and heard it. How many boats is Captain 
Perry building?” 

“I don’t know,” replied Gordon. “He will build 
all he needs if he has money and men enough, and 
if he hasn’t he will make what he has do the work 
just the same. You’re going to be proud of that 
man some day, or I miss my guess.” 

“I have no doubt he is a very energetic young man, 


GUESTS 


175 


but these are serious times and he will need something 
more than energy.’’ 

“There doesn’t seem to be any too much of that 
shown up on these fresh-water ponds!” laughed Gor- 
don. “One of your boys was singing every little 
while something about William Hull being counted 
null—” 

“William Hull was a traitor I” said Amos promptly. 

“Well, you don’t seem to have been specially ac- 
tive even here on Lake Ontario, and what has been 
done at Niagara won’t shake the British king on his 
throne very much, I’m thinking.” 

“It will take some time to prepare,” suggested Mr. 
Proper. 

“Yes, I heard about a Dutchman,” said Gordon 
good-naturedly, “who was watching some men jump 
over a brook. The men would go back a few steps 
and get under good headway, and clear the brook 
all right. The Dutchman watched them and then 
had a bright idea. He thought if he went back far- 
ther than these men had gone, it would be easier 
still to jump over the brook, so he went back two 
miles and when he came to the brook he was out of 
breath and fell into the water, and couldn’t jump 
at all. I’m afraid it is that way with some of your 
preparations up here on the lakes. I’m telling you, 
though, it won’t be that w^ay with young Perry!” 

“I hope not,” said Mr. Proper, quietly. 

“I know it won’t!” asserted Gordon confidently. 


176 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


'‘He will try something, anyway. Maybe he will 
leave some of his preparations until afterwards, but 
he will try something ! I was told before I left New- 
port that he had his younger brother with him. He 
is a little fellow not nearly as big as this boy of 
yours. 

Amos looked up eagerly into his father’s face and 
said, “Do you know how old I am?” 

“Why, you are fourteen, aren’t you, my son?” 

“No, sir, I’m fifteen going on sixteen,” replied 
Amos with great assurance. 

“How long have you been Agoing on’ sixteen?” 
asked his father. 

“Since the third of March.” 

“You haven’t been ‘going’ very far.” 

“WTell, I want to go farther,” said Amos. “Hi 
and I talked it all over on our way from Oswego. 
He wants to go out to Erie and work on that fleet 
for Captain Perry and I want to go, too. I guess, 
if I can go to York and get away by being taken 
prisoner I have shown I can make some chips fly 
out in the shipyard.” 

As Amos looked up he saw a startled expression 
on the face of his mother, but disregarding it he 
continued earnestly, “A good many boys not as old 
as I am have gone and here Gordon Hopkins says that 
Captain Perry’s brother is not as old as I am.” 

“There will be nobody here to look after your 
mother and Prudy and take care of the place,” sug- 


GUESTS 


177 


gested Mr. Proper, nevertheless showing by the ex- 
pression of his face that the suggestion of Amos had 
appealed to him. 

“You will be here this summer, father,’’ pro- 
tested Amos still more excitedly. “You can look 
after them, and let me go with Hi. There won’t be 
any danger there,” he added as he turned to his 
mother. “You see all we’ll be doing will be to build 
some boats.” 

“What are the boats being built for?” inquired 
his mother soberly. 

“W'hy, to drive the British off the lakes.” 

“Oh, then there will be something to be done be- 
sides building ships?” 

“Of course,” said Amos. “They are not going to 
let the ships rot on the stocks.” 

“We’ll talk more about this later,” said Mr. 
Proper; and Amos was aware that the conversation 
on that topic, at least, was ended for the present. 

A few moments afterwards Prudy beckoned to her 
brother and when he joined her outside the kitchen 
door she said to him, ^ ^ That letter was for me, Amos. ’ ’ 

“Of course it was,” replied her brother. “What 
I can’t see is how that man ever got it. Who wrote 
it, Prudy?” 

“You could never guess.” 

“All right then, tell me,” said Amos. 

“I shan’t tell you.” 

“Yes, you will! WTiy not?” 


178 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


‘^Because you would never believe what I said if 
I should tell you. It is the strangest thing!’' 

Despite Amos’s continued pleadings, Prudy was 
firm and refused to disclose the contents of the let- 
ter or the name of its writer. She was, however, some- 
what startled when she turned about to reenter the 
house to discover that Simeon, who had been a mem- 
ber of the household since his escape from the press- 
gang and the strange disappearance of Amos, was 
standing in the doorway, apparently listening eagerly 
to what had been said. 


CHAPTER XIV 


ABOUT CAPTAIN PERRY 

do you thow about that man?’^ in- 
V V quired Amos in a low voice as he and his 
sister turned to reenter the house as soon as Simeon 
disappeared from sight. 

'‘Only two things,” replied Prudy, with a smile. 
‘ ‘ One is what he tells us about himself and the other 
is that he can eat more than any man I ever saw.” 

“Making up for lost time, I guess,” laughed Amos. 
“The press-gang does not feed its prisoners very 
well.” 

“You were a lucky boy to escape the way you 
did,” said Prudy glancing proudly at Amos. 

As the brother and sister stood side by side the re- 
semblance in the features of the two was almost 
startling. There were the same black eyes, the con- 
tour of their faces was almost alike and even in the 
height and weight the two were still almost on the 
same plane. 

Amos’s thoughts, however, were turned now from 
the mysterious letter which Prudy had secured and 
whose contents she alone had read. She had not seen 
179 


180 


THB BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


fit to confide in her brother the message she had re- 
ceived and, not a little piqued by what he called the 
“contrariness’’ of Prudy, Amos perhaps was glad of 
some distraction that drew the thoughts of both to 
other things. 

The continued presence of Simeon in his father’s 
household was perplexing to Amos. The man himself 
apparently w^as peculiar. He had little to say con- 
cerning himself and still less to say to any of the 
members of the family. He had regained a large 
measure of his former strength and now ought to be 
ready for service somewhere, or so at least, Amos de- 
clared. However, when the lad once more was in the 
house and saw Gordon Hopkins and his companions 
conversing with his father, the boy’s interest quickly 
was centered in what was being said. 

“How old a man is this Captain Perry?” inquired 
Mr. Proper. 

“Let me see,” replied Gordon thoughtfully, “he 
was born in August, 1785. That would make him less 
than twenty-eight years old.” 

“He’s a young man to be in charge of such a great 
work, as you suggest.” 

“It may never amount to anything,” replied Gor- 
don. “It is not said out loud, but it is common talk 
that he and Commodore Chauncey did not get along 
very well and Commodore Chauncey is sending him 
out there to be rid of him as much as for anything 
else.” 


ABOUT CAPTAIN PERRY 


181 


“Has he had any experience at allT’ inquired Mr. 
Proper. 

“The first breath he ever drew was from the sea! 
The first thing he ever saw, next to his mother’s face, 
was the rocky shore and the roaring waves of the 
ocean! His father was a sailor before him, and it 
was as natural as breathing for young Perry to be 
interested in what his father was doing. He had seen 
the ships come and go, and from the time when he 
could toddle down to the dock he had heard the songs 
and the stories of the sailors. His father, too, had 
done a bit of fighting on the sea in the Revolution and 
so 01 was ready for anything that might come when 
this War of 1812 broke out. When the war first be- 
gan he was put in command of a division, but he had 
about as much to do as he would have had if he had 
been cooped up somewhere in England. If there was 
any fighting to be done he wanted to have a share in 
it and so last February he was sent up here.” 

“Up where?” inquired Mr. Proper. 

“Here. He and his men were transferred to Lake 
Ontario to be under the command of Commodore 
Chauncey. He didn’t let the grass grow under his 
feet very long either. The sun had not set on the 
very day when he received his orders from the Sec- 
retary of the Navy before he sent fifty of his best 
men and officers to Sackett’s Harbor and within four 
days afterwards he had equipped and sent the full one 
hundred men.” 


182 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


‘‘Didn’t he go with them, then?” inquired Amos. 

“Just as soon as he had made sure that his orders 
had been obeyed and everything had been done as 
he had directed, Captain Perry himself started in a 
sleigh on his long ride through the wilderness. There 
were reports when he came to Sackett’s Harbor that 
the British were going to attack that place and every 
day there were special watches kept for a sight of the 
British fleet. Two weeks passed, however, and noth- 
ing was done, so Perry and his men were sent to 
Presque Isle,* to take up the work of fitting out a 
fleet there.” 

‘ ‘ Fitting out a fleet ! ’ ’ exclaimed Amos. ‘ ‘ I thought 
you said he had to huild a fleet.” 

“Yes, he had to do that, too,” laughed Gordon. 
“Why, his men, I am told, had to chop down the 
trees in the forests and fashion them with their own 
tools for the gun-boats and brigs and schooners that 
he was building.” 

“You said his young brother was with him, didn’t 
you?” inquired Amos. 

“Yes, I did,” replied Gordon. 

“Wasn’t his brother younger than Captain Perry 
was when he first started in?” 

‘ ‘ 01 Perry doesn ’t look the part now, but when he 
was a youngster, his health wasn’t very good and I 
think that was one reason why his father, who was in 
command of a frigate, got the lad appointed as a 


Erie. 


ABOUT CAPTAIN PERRY 


183 


midshipman on his own craft and took him to the 
West Indies.’’ 

“How old was Captain Perry then?” 

“About fifteen.” 

“It was lucky for him he was with his own father,” 
suggested Mr. Proper. 

“You might ask him about that,” replied Gordon 
drolly. ‘^He was worked day and night. He had 
to do his studying besides all the other things that a 
midshipman is called on to do, but I guess that the 
biggest lesson he had to learn after all was. to obey 
orders. Somehow that didn’t come easy to him. But 
he told me the last time I saw him that that was the 
best as well as the biggest lesson ever set before him. 
He said a man never knows how to lead others until 
he has learned first how to follow some one.” 

“Did he keep on with his father?” inquired Amos. 

“Oh, yes, for a while and he has been at it ever 
since. He sailed in the John Adams for the Mediter- 
ranean, — ^let me see, that was in 1802, and he had al- 
ready had some pretty lively battles down along 
the shores of the gulf, before that time. Then three 
years after he went to the Mediterranean he was one 
of the crew of the Constitution and a little later, 
when he was twenty-two years old, he was appointed 
lieutenant and two years afterwards he was given the 
command of the schooner Revenge 

“How big a boat was that?” 

“Fourteen guns.” 


184 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


^^Whew!^^ whistled Amos. “And how old did you 
say he was then?’’ 

“Almost twenty- two.” 

“And he did his share as midshipman when he was 
fifteen?” 

“That’s right, lad,” acknowledged Gordon. 

“Just my age,” said Amos so soberly that all the 
men in the room laughed. Even Mr. Proper smiled 
as he glanced at the face of his eager boy. 

“If his work aboard the Revenge had been all there 
was to it,” continued Gordon, “I am afraid he 
wouldn’t have been sent up here to the Great Lakes. 
Once not long after he was made captain his pilot ran 
the Revenge aground off the shore of Rhode Island. 
Captain 01 saw quick as a wink that his schooner was 
lost so he went to work to save everything that could 
be taken off the schooner. He got the sails, the spars 
'and guns and even the personal belongings of his 
officers and men ashore and when at last the Revenge 
went dovm there wasn’t much more than just the hulk 
to sink.” 

“It’s a wonder he didn’t lose his position after 
that,” suggested Mr. Proper. 

“That’s what one might think,” acknowledged Gor- 
don. “It did seem like pretty hard luck for a young 
chap like Captain 01 in his first command to run 
against such a misfortune as that, but after all I 
guess it helped to make him. He knew he might be 
blamed for the wreck so the first thing he did was to 


ABOUT CAPTAIN PERRY 


185 


demand a Court of Investigation. It didn’t take this 
court more than a few minutes to find out that instead 
of being to blame, young Perry ought to be praised 
for his bravery and his quick wit in such an hour. 
You see the Revenge was fast aground on some sharp 
rocks and there wasn’t any chance for him at all, so 
the court was pretty warm in its appreciation of 
what he had done in saving all the guns and the sails 
and even what belonged to the officers and men.’^ 

‘^I don’t believe,” said Amos, *‘that Rhode Island 
boys can do any better than the boys from New York 
State.” 

^‘You think if your father were to let you go with 
us that in a little while you will be in command of a 
schooner like the Revenge, too, do you?” laughed 
Gordon. 

‘‘I don’t know anything about that,” retorted 
Amos. ‘‘All I know is that I am as old as you say 
Captain Perry was when he went into the navy and 
I don’t see why I can’t have as good a chance as he 
did. I would like to go with you to Presque Isle 
anyway and see this man and lend a hand in building 
his fleet. I guess I can shoot as well as the average, 
and when it comes to a saw, my father doesn’t think 
I am too young to pull one end of it when he’s work- 
ing at the other.” 

“Better let the lad start with us in the morning,” 
laughed Gordon. “We’ll keep an eye on him and 
see that he doesn’t get into mischief.” 


186 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


‘‘I’ll keep an eye on him, too,” suggested Amos. 

“I’m afraid you will both be cross-eyed before the 
war is ended,” laughed Mr. Proper. 

The men who were guests in the Proper household, 
wearied by their long march from Oswego, were soon 
in bed. The novelty of being once more in his own 
home was too strong in the feelings of Amos to per- 
mit him to leave the room as soon as his companions 
had done. 

Sitting with the family on the grass outside the 
house, he was compelled to answer many questions 
concerning the adventures through which he had re- 
cently passed and to describe again and again what he 
had seen of the successful attack upon York. His ex- 
periences at Sackett’s Harbor also were of special in- 
terest, not only because of what the lad himself had 
gone through, but also because the place was the 
headquarters of the Northern Army, and what was 
occurring there was of deep concern to all who were 
interested in the struggle that was going on between 
the little new nation and the old. 

Suddenly Amos inquired, “Whatever became of 
those two prisoners I shut in the cellar?” 

“There!” exclaimed Prudy. “I told mother that 
you played that prank on us.” 

“Prank!” retorted Amos. “It wasn’t a ‘prank’ 
and even if it was I didn’t play it on you. I sent 
them down cellar to look for some cider and bolted 
the door on them after they went down the stairs. 


ABOUT CAPTAIN PERRY 


187 


Prudy, do you know whether they found any cider 
or not?” 

“I never heard them say anything about it,” 
laughed the girl. 

‘‘Well, what happened after the press-gang took 
me away?” 

“Do you mean what happened to the men?” 

“Of course.” 

“Why, when we missed you and waited for you 
to come back and you didn’t come, we thought some- 
thing must have happened to you, so mother and I got 
ready to do the work. I was going to milk the two 
cows and I had just left the door to go down cellar 
that very night for a pail, when out rushed those two 
men. We didn’t dream there was anybody left about 
the place except the man who hid under the meal 
sacks in the corn crib.” 

“Did you yell?” inquired Amos. 

‘ ‘ I don ’t remember. All I can think of is that one 
of the men gave me a push and then they both ran 
as fast as they could go down the lane toward the 
shore.” 

“Was that the last you saw of them?” 

“Yes.” 

“They could not have reached the shore,” said 
Amos thoughtfully, “until long after the yawl had 
gone back to the Duke of Gloucester, so their friends 
could not have taken them away. They must have 
spent some time on this side of the lake. It is a 


188 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


wonder they didn’t show up again and make trouble 
for you after they found out that you and mother 
were home alone.” 

“I wasn’t afraid of them,” said Prudy confidently, 
have known lots of people to be brave after all 
the danger was gone.” 

^‘So have I!” retorted the girl sharply. have 
even heard of boys being taken away by press-gangs 
and being as brave as a lion all the time, that is if one 
could believe all one heard about their stories after- 
ward.” 

‘‘That’s all right, Prudy,” said Amos pleas- 
antly. “There’s no use in my trying to talk that 
way to-day, you always can think of one more thing 
to say than I can and after I think everything is all 
told.” 

“Of course,” replied Prudy. “It’s a pity you 
didn’t learn that long ago!” 

The brother and sister looked at each other with 
such admiration and affection that the striking re- 
semblance between the two became still more mani- 
fest in the expression of their countenances. 

“Amos,” said Prudy in a low voice, “I believe 
father intends to let you go with Hi.” 

“What makes you think so?” demanded Amos in- 
stantly aroused. 

“I can’t give you all my reasons,” replied the girl, 
“but you just wait and see if what I tell you doesn’t 
come true.” 


ABOUT CAPTAIN PERRY 


189 


you tell me now what that letter was that I 
gave you?’^ asked Amos. 

“No, not yet.’’ 

“Why not?” 

“Because it was a letter to me and not to you.” 

“But who was it that wrote you a letter?” de- 
manded Amos. “What I cannot understand is how 
that letter should have been in the hands of that man 
who stole my name.” 

“Maybe that is his name,” suggested Prudy. 

“It isn’t!” said Amos confidently. “It can’t be. 
I would like to know what became of him, too. He 
and Tom — ” 

“Who is Tom?” broke in Prudy. 

“Why, I told you he was one of the crew of the 
Duke of Gloucester and was mighty good to me after 
the press-gang took me aboard.” 

“They are probably with the other prisoners by 
this time,” said the girl. 

“That’s where they belong!” said Amos positively. 

His sister laughed as she arose and said half seri- 
ously, half mockingly, “You are going to be a sailor 
boy, Amos Proper, and fight under Captain Perry.” 

“That’s what I want,” said Amos quickly, as they 
joined the family and soon prepared for the night. 


CHAPTER XV 


THE LONG MARCH 

T he following day the visitors departed, the man 
who had escaped from the press-gang, however, 
still remaining a member of the household. As yet 
he had not given any intimation as to his departure 
for his home or as to his plans. He had explained 
only that his name was Simeon Jones. He entered 
quietly and simply into the home life and continued 
in the spring work on the farm in which he had 
been assisting Prudy up to the return of her father. 

To the work of planting and other duties that must 
be attended to, Amos gave himself in the days that 
followed. Not a word had been said to him con- 
cerning the prophecy that his sister had made that 
he soon would be with the men who were building 
Perry’s fleet at Presque Isle. There were days when 
Hiram too joined his father and brother and then 
in turn they went to his little clearing where they 
reciprocated the favor which had been given them. 

The farm implements were few and rude, and al- 
most every task required heavy muscular exertion on 
the part of the laborers. When night came Amos 
190 


THE LONG MARCH 


191 


usually was in bed soon after the sun disappeared be- 
yond the western boundaries of the lake. 

When three weeks had elapsed Mr. Proper said to 
his boy one morning when they were departing from 
the house to look after some rail fences which ex- 
tended to the borders of the woods, ^‘Do you really 
feel, my son, that you would like to go with your 
brother?’’ 

“Yes, sir!” exclaimed Amos eagerly, his face flush- 
ing in his excitement. 

“You feel sure, do you, that you would rather 
serve there than at Niagara?” 

“Yes, sir,” replied Amos promptly. “I am not a 
lubber and what little I can do I can make count for 
more on the lake than if I was left on the land.” 

Mr. Proper smiled, as if the conviction of his son 
was not altogether disappointing, and then said, 
“Your mother and I have been talking over the mat- 
ter and have decided to let you go with Hiram.” 

“And are you going to enlist again?” inquired the 
boy. 

“Not this summer. After my term of three 
months expired I felt almost guilty when I left the 
army, but if you are to be away I don’t feel that I 
ought to leave your mother and Prudy here alone 
with no one to protect them.” 

Amos, touched by the appeal to his own manliness, 
flushed again slightly and suggested, “Perhaps Sim- 


192. 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


eon will be able to look after them if you think you 
ought to go back/^ 

‘^Simeon is not one to be relied upon/^ replied his 
father. ‘‘I know but little more about him now than 
when I first saw him. He has not explained who he 
is nor where he came from nor does he ever refer 
to what he proposes to do, I think he is harmless, but 
still I don’t feel that I could leave your mother and 
your sister alone with him to look after their wants. 
Perhaps another press-gang might land from some 
one of the British fleet and this time they might find 
the man they were looking for.” 

^‘When does Hiram start?” inquired Amos unable 
to be silent long concerning the future which appealed 
to him now with renewed power. 

think he is planning to leave day after to-mor- 
row. ’ ’ 

^^Will he go by boat?” 

‘^No. He will follow the road to Niagara and from 
there have to take his chances of being carried to 
Presque Isle, or of making his way overland alone. 
I understand from Gordon Hopkins that Captain 
Perry is in great need of men and I have no doubt 
that you and Hiram will find others in your march 
who are intending to join Perry’s command.” 

No reference was made that evening in the home to 
the proposed departure of Amos. People in those 
days were not demonstrative and even in the home 


THE LONG MARCH 


193 


where the family affection was very strong, few indi- 
cations of the presence of such a feeling were ever 
displayed. Children grew up to respect their father 
and mother, but compared with the boys and girls 
of our own time they did not have that intimate 
association or close confidence which is one of the 
best elements in the life of to-day. Even when the 
morning arrived when Amos was about to depart 
with his brother, there were few words spoken. That 
his mother was suffering was apparent to Amos, and 
Prudy^s black eyes were shining even more than they 
usually did. As for Amos, despite his eagerness to 
go with his older brother, there was a strange lump 
in his throat when at last he spoke the simple good- 
byes, and started in the path through the woods that 
led to Hiram’s humble home. 

On his back was strapped a blanket which his 
mother had woven with her own hands, and inside 
the bundle were some articles not to be found in the 
equipment of the ordinary soldier. His own powder- 
horn and bullet pouch were taken with him and the 
trusty flint-lock which he carried on his shoulder had 
been used in many a shot which the lad had made at 
the prowling wolves or bears. 

There was only a brief delay at Hiram’s home and 
after his brother’s young wife had started on the 
pathway toward his father’s house, of which she was 
to be an inmate during the three months which the 


194 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


boys expected to be gone, the two brothers, both 
strangely silent, resolutely started on their long 
march. 

At Batavia they were fortunate in finding a small 
company of men on their way from Albany to Niagara. 
The boys then joined this departing band and pro- 
ceeded with them on their journey. The new com- 
panions were a somewhat nondescript crowd, some 
of them being clad in uniforms while others were 
wearing the homespun garments which had been 
made in the homes from which they had come. Some 
of the men were young, being little older than Amos, 
while others were nearer his father ^s age. In the 
most of them, however, there was manifest a resolute 
purpose to do their utmost to drive back the redcoats 
and establish the right of the new country to claim 
as well as protect its own men. The line of march 
was somewhat broken and but few demands for an 
orderly procedure were made. There were places 
where the men marched in single file after the manner 
of the Indians, then again they would be marshalled 
in order and for a time present something of the ap- 
pearance of a band of soldiers. The intercourse be- 
tween the men was somewhat free and the distance 
between the officers and the company were not always 
observed. 

On the second day Amos found himself marching 
beside a boy perhaps two years older than he. His 
companion appeared to be much more experienced in 


THE LONG MARCH 


195 


the ways of the world than the boy by his side, and 
seemed to enjoy the privilege, in giving advice and 
magnifying the youthfulness of Amos Proper. For 
a time Amos made no protest, but at last when the 
stories of his comrade became so “ large as to be 
unbelievable and his condescending manner was made 
still more manifest the heart of Amos rebelled within 
him. 

^‘My name,’’ observed Amos’s companion, ‘^is one 
I think you must have heard.” 

never heard it,” replied Amos. ‘‘What is it?” 

“Walter Raleigh.” 

“Yes, I have heard that name,” said Amos slowly. 
“Did you ever hear mine?” 

“No, what is your name?” 

“George Washington,” replied Amos without 
changing the expression of his face. 

“Yes, I have heard that, too,” said his companion 
with a laugh. “George Washington is a boy though, 
compared with Walter Raleigh.” 

“What did Walter Raleigh do?” asked Amos. 

“There have been several by that name,” laughed 
the young soldier. “One came over to America to 
found a colony and to try to find gold. He found 
that he couldn’t found a colony and he found that he 
couldn’t find gold, so he went back to England, and 
told them they might have his head.” 

“Yes, I understand,” said Amos. “There have 
been several of us named George Washington, too. 


196 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


One George threw a silver dollar over the natural 
bridge in Virgina. I think that if I ever found a 
silver dollar I wouldn^t throw it away.’’ 

^‘Of course you wouldn’t,” said his companion cor- 
dially. ^‘But Walter Raleigh always had all the 
money he wanted.” 

^‘Did he?” asked Amos. ‘^Well, if he lived 
where I do he wouldn’t have been troubled by it. 
I never see much money. Sometimes when I sell my 
potash I get a few shillings for it. That’s about all 
I ever see.” 

“Potash?” inquired his companion. “What’s 
that?” 

“It’s a lye.” 

“It’s a what?” repeated “Walter Raleigh,” 
sharply. 

“It’s a lye,” said Amos again. 

“Are you talking to me?” demanded the older boy. 

“Of course,” replied Amos in a matter of fact 
tone. 

“You call me a liar?” 

“I don’t have to,” replied Amos. “Everybody 
knows that Walter Raleigh could tell some big 
stories.” 

“But you said something about a lie.” 

“I didn’t mention it.” 

“What was it you said you sold, then?” 

“L-y-e.” 

“Either you are crazy or I am,” said the older lad. 


THE LONG MARCH 


197 


‘‘I’m not crazy,” said Amos promptly, “so if one 
of us is crazy you know which one it is.” 

For a moment the young soldier glared at his boy- 
ish companion as if something personal had been said 
and it was his duty to resent an implied charge of 
being dishonest. However, the march was continued 
without any further manifestations of anger and as 
the hours passed the boys’ stories not only increased 
in number, but in magnitude. One would relate an 
instance in which he declared he was the important 
character, only to be followed by a story still more im- 
probable by the other. 

As the days passed and they came nearer the end 
of their journey, the feeling of affection in Amos’s 
heart for his boyish comrade increased. In spite of 
his ways and manner of condescending to his younger 
companion, Amos was aware that behind it all 
there was a feeling of affection that was steadily in- 
creasing. Of Hiram he saw but little in these days, 
though his brother was marching only a few lines 
in advance. 

When the boys arrived at the quarters of the army 
at Niagara they decided to remain a day or two, hop- 
ing to find some men who also might be planning to 
go on to the place where young Captain Perry was 
busily engaged in providing a fleet to protect the 
shores of Lake Erie. 

In the interim, Hiram, who had been stationed at 
the post during the three months which he had served 


198 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


in the army, showed his brother many of the places 
of interest in the vicinity. It was the first time that 
Amos had ever looked upon the great volume of 
waters that fell over the cliffs of Niagara. The roar 
that could he heard for miles, as well as the sight of 
the surging, tossing, rushing waters in the gorge were 
alike impressive to the lad. 

His chief interest, however, was centered in the 
men who were preparing to repel the redcoats who 
were expected any time to approach from the opposite 
side of the roaring river. 

On the third day when still no one had been found 
who was expecting to go to Presque Isle the brothers 
decided that they would delay no longer. 

Accordingly early in the morning they set forth 
on the last stage of their long journey. Accustomed 
as they were to the woods, they had slight fear of 
losing their way. Indeed there were a few times 
when neglecting the more frequent pathway or road 
they advanced through the forest as no one who was 
not a skilled woodsman could have done. Steadily 
they kept to their task, becoming more interested in 
the work that lay before them, as they drew nearer 
the destination they were seeking. How many men 
had Captain Perry? What was he expecting to ac- 
complish? Were there possibilities of an attack by 
the British ? All these were problems interesting and 
for which as yet no solution was found by either of 
the boys. All that was in their minds was the thought 


THE LONG MARCH 


199 


of the young Rhode Island captain who, with a little 
band of men, was doing his utmost to provide and 
equip a fleet with which to regain the control of Lake 
Erie which the surrender of Detroit by General Hull 
the preceding year had given the British. 

At night the brothers had found a resting-place 
usually in a clump of cedars where they had spread 
their blankets as on many times before they had done 
when they had been on hunting expeditions. There 
was greater need of watchfulness against prowling 
wild beasts than against men dressed in red coats 
along the pathway they now were following. 

^‘I think we shall make the place to-day,’^ sug- 
gested Hiram on the third day after they had de- 
parted from Niagara. 

“I shall be glad of it,” responded Amos quickly. 

“You may not be so glad,” responded his brother 
dryly, “if what Gordon Hopkins says is true. I guess 
Captain Perry doesn’t give his men very many holi- 
days. ’ ’ 

“I didn’t come out here for holidays,” said Amos 
promptly, nevertheless feeling somewhat chagrined as 
his brother laughed good-naturedly and made no re- 
sponse. 

Their hasty meal was speedily prepared and they 
were about to resume their journey when Amos said 
quickly, “There’s somebody coming.” 

Hiram instantly stepped back and listened intently 
and then in a low voice said, “Yes, there is somebody 


200 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


coming. I guess whoever it is he must be coming 
from Niagara.’^ 

The approaching stranger was whistling on his way 
as if thoughts of danger were not even present in his 
mind. 

“Take your gun/’ said Hiram in a low voice, “and 
go over there behind that oak. It may be just as well 
for you not to be seen unless there is a call for you. 
I don’t believe this fellow amounts to much, or he 
w^ouldn’t be whistling to let even the very birds know 
that he is coming. But I guess it will be just as well 
for me to find out who he is and what he has before he 
goes any further.” 

It was not long before the stranger appeared. He 
discerned the presence of Hiram who at the same 
moment became aware that the man for whose coming 
he was waiting had appeared. Amos w^as peer- 
ing out from behind his hiding place, and his expres- 
sion of astonishment when he beheld the advancing 
man, was as great as that upon the face of his brother, 
Hiram. 


CHAPTER XVI 


IN THE MIDST OP ALARMS 

^^TT’S Sir Walter!’^ exclaimed Amos in a low 
1 voice. 

‘‘And there is somebody with him/’ added Hiram 
in surprise. 

“He ought to know enough not to come whistling 
through the woods when they are filled with Indians 
or redcoats,” exclaimed Amos. 

“He has stopped now,” suggested Hiram as the 
sound of whistling abruptly ceased, .and it became 
manifest that the approaching men were not yet aware 
who the boys were. They had discerned the forms as 
they advanced from the midst of the trees but they 
were still too far away to recognize who they were, 
while both Hiram and Amos had no difficulty from 
their point of vantage in recognizing the approaching 
strangers. 

Before either of the boys had spoken to the ap- 
proaching men both Sir Walter and his companion, 
who Amos thought was Simeon, stopped and stared 
intently about them. Suddenly they both darted 
into the woods at their right and disappeared from 
sight. 


201 


202 


TPIE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


“What does that mean?” inquired Amos of his 
brother. 

“It looks as if they had seen something or some- 
body,” whispered Hiram in reply. 

Several minutes elapsed and not a sound disturbed 
the silence of the forest nor had either of the approach- 
ing men advanced. Where they had gone, or what 
had startled them, was not apparent. Their actions, 
however, had been of such a character that both boys 
surmised that danger was not far away. 

Trembling with suspense, Amos waited for his 
brother to decide upon the proper course for them 
to follow. Both boys were still more alarmed when 
the report of a rifle was heard far away in the forest 
and to both of them it seemed that the startling sound 
was followed by a cry. Neither the shot nor the shout 
was repeated though the boys listened intently, and 
waited until at least a quarter of an hour had elapsed. 

“We might as well go on,” suggested Hiram at 
last. “I don’t know what this means, but we’ll be 
just as safe to be on our way as we are waiting here 
in the forest. I — ” 

Hiram stopped abruptly as the sound of men run- 
ning rapidly toward them was heard. The fallen 
branches snapped under the feet of the fleeing stran- 
gers and it was manifest that they were running at 
their utmost speed. And both boys were aware that 
the men were coming directly toward them. 

A brief time only elapsed when out from the for- 


IN THE MIDST OP ALARMS 


203 


est, running swiftly, Simeon and Sir Walter were seen 
approaching. The discovery of the two boys, who 
were seen at the same time by both men, instantly 
caused them to change their course and they ran 
eagerly to the place where the brothers were waiting. 
Breathing heavily and glancing frequently behind 
them as if they were in fear of pursuers the two men 
halted when they gained the place where the boys 
were standing. 

*‘What is itr’ demanded Hiram. ‘‘What is 
wrong?’’ 

“Indians!” replied Sir Walter, glancing fearfully 
behind him as he spoke. 

“How many?” asked Hiram in a low voice. 

“I don’t know. The woods are full of them.” 

“Were they following you?” 

“Yes, and they were in front of us, too. I think 
they are trying to cut us off from Presque Isle. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ Could you see who they were ? ’ ’ 

“No,” replied Sir Walter. “They were Indians, 
and on the warpath too and that was enough for me.” 

“If they are between us and Presque Isle we’ll have 
to leave the main trail if we get rid of them. ’ ’ 

“Yes,” said Sir Walter, “and run plumb into one 
of their bands.” 

“What makes you think there are more than one 
band ? ’ ’ 

“Because we have seen three different ones. First 
we saw some of them following us and didn’t pay 


204 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


very much attention to them. Then we saw another 
band of twenty or more off on our right and when 
we left the trail and ran into the opposite direction 
we almost ran right into the arms of another band. 
They fired at us, too. ’ ’ 

heard the shot,’’ said Hiram, ‘‘and then we 
thought we heard somebody cry out.” 

“It was only a yell by the Indians. They were 
shooting at us and then let out a great whoop when 
they saw that we ran away from them. ’ ’ 

“Probably they were letting some of the other bands 
know that you had gotten away from them,” sug- 
gested Amos. 

“What shall we do now?” inquired Simeon, who 
thus far had not taken any part in the conversa- 
tion. 

“Get away from here just as fast as we can,” said 
Amos positively. 

“Go on to Presque Isle?” inquired Simeon. 

“We might just as well go in that direction as any 
other,” answered Hiram. 

“I’m sure they are trying to cut us off,” said Sir 
Walter, “and in the night we shall run straight into 
their hands. How far is Presque Isle from here?” 

“I think it must be about twenty miles,” replied 
Hiram. “We have kept pretty close to the trail and 
I think we have covered all but about that distance.” 

“We can’t make it before dark,” suggested Sim- 


eon, 


IN THE MIDST OP ALARMS 


205 


‘‘That may be so/^ acknowledged Hiram, “but ev- 
ery mile we go nearer our own men the less danger we 
shall be in. We’ll start now,” he added. “Every 
one of you look to the priming of his gun and see he 
is ready for whatever may happen.” 

In Indian file the four then advanced along the 
trail, watchful of every sign and though they were 
moving rapidly they were all fearful of being shot 
at by some of their foes hidden among the trees or 
concealed in some ambuscade. 

Nor were the fears of the young soldiers without 
meaning. They had advanced only a few miles when 
Hiram, who was leading the way, abruptly stopped 
and pointed to some fresh imprints of moccasined 
feet in a muddy place near the trail. “Some of 
them,” he said in a whisper, “are ahead of us. They 
are there for no good purpose, either. ’ ’ 

“We cannot go back,” suggested Simeon. 

“And we can’t go ahead,” said Amos, his excite- 
ment apparently greater than that of any of his com- 
panions. 

“We must leave the trail,” said Hiram positively. 
“ If we can only make the shore of Lake Erie we shall 
stand a chance of getting into Presque Isle. It’s al- 
most our only chance, too. ’ ’ 

“Go ahead then,” said Sir Walter brusquely. “We 
don’t want to waste any time here.” 

Immediately departing from the trail the band 
turned into the woods at their right and endeavored 


206 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


to make their way noiselessly through the primeval 
forest. The fears of every one were strong. The 
great trunks might be hiding places for their foes 
and even the branches of the great beeches and oaks 
might afford a refuge for the dark-eyed warriors, who, 
they feared, had not lost sight of the white men even 
for a minute. 

In the midst of such forebodings the young sol- 
diers moved cautiously, keeping well together and Hi- 
ram leading the way, while Sir Walter, at his own 
request, marched as the rear guard. 

In this manner they advanced a half-hour, cover- 
ing as well as they could estimate about two miles 
of the distance which must be traversed. As yet no 
fresh signs of danger had appeared. The sun was 
sinking lower in the western sky and within two hours 
would disappear from sight. It would be impossible 
for the boys to cover the entire distance before night 
would be upon them, but to proceed in the darkness 
was too perilous to be considered for a moment. 

The party now were climbing a small hill. At its 
very top a clump of cedars was growing, and when 
Hiram discovered this he instantly turned to his com- 
panions and said, ‘‘That’s the place for us! We’ll 
get up there and stay to-night and wait for the morn- 
ing.” 

“But it won’t be dark for a good while yet,” sug- 
gested Simeon. “Why don’t we keep on our way? 
If the redskins are trailing us they will be able to 


IN THE MIDST OP ALARMS 


207 


find us before night and if they are not, we might as 
well be doing all in our power to get out of the for- 
est.’’ 

Hiram shook his head, as he said, ‘^We may never 
find another such spot as this. Nobody can go up 
the side of the mound without being seen and if the 
Indians are still following us they won’t be likely to 
come up in the face of our guns.” 

‘ ‘ But they outnumber us, ’ ’ suggested Simeon ; ‘ ‘ ten 
to one, probably.” 

“More than that,” suggested Sir Walter emphat- 
ically. 

“I don’t believe that will make any difference,” 
said Hiram. ‘ ‘ They know we are armed and it is not 
their way of fighting to come up a hill in the open 
and face any band that is armed, no matter how small 
it is. They will be more likely to try to work some 
trick on us than to fight us in the open.” 

Hiram’s advice was followed and the entire band 
sought the top of the small hill behind which they 
discovered that within the cluster of cedars there was 
an open space which from its appearance might have 
been used as a hiding place by other parties. 

“The first thing that we must do,” said Hiram, as 
soon as all were within the enclosure, “is to have a 
guard. Two of us will have to keep watch all the 
while, one looking out on one side and the other on 
the other. We’ll take turns at this, for a while any- 
way. Amos and I will go on duty first.” 


208 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


^^What shall we do?’^ inquired Sir Walter. ‘‘We 
might keep watch, too.’’ 

“There is no use in that,” answered Hiram posi- 
tively. “We can’t have any fire, but if you have any- 
thing to eat you might get it ready for us.” 

Hiram, who was the natural leader of the band, 
at once sought his station, lying prostrate on the 
ground and peering through the trees from whence he 
could see a considerable distance in that direction. 

Amos followed his brother ’s example, he too stretch- 
ing himself on the ground on a place from which he 
would he able to behold the approach of their enemies. 

Meanwhile, Sir Walter cut strips of jerked venison 
and then with some of the hard biscuit served every 
one his supper. 

The hunger of the boys was keen in spite of their 
fear, and courage returned with the food. The scanty 
repast, however, had hardly been completed when a 
low warning was given by Amos. 

Instantly Simeon and Sir Walter threw themselves 
on the ground beside their companion and peering in 
the direction which he silently indicated, they looked 
down into the little valley below them. 

Moving silently was a band of red men. Some were 
stooping low and all of them running in the lope 
which many of the tribes used on the warpath or on 
hunting expeditions. The men plainly could be seen 
as every one passed across an open space between the 
trees at the foot of the hill. 


IN THE MIDST OF ALARMS 


209 


“That’s all,” whispered Sir Walter at last, when 
apparently the entire band had disappeared. 

How many did you make ? ’ ’ inquired Simeon. 

' ‘ Twenty-one. ’ ’ 

“That’s what I made it, too,” said Amos. “Where 
do you suppose they have gone ? ’ ’ 

“They have gone ahead of us for one thing,” re- 
plied Sir Walter. “What I can’t account for is that 
they didn’t discover our tracks.” 

“It’s a little dark now,” suggested Amos. “They 
may have lost them. But they will come back as sure 
as you’re born!” 

Leaving Simeon on guard, his companions withdrew 
to the open space among the cedars and Amos sum- 
moned Hiram and briefly related to him what had just 
been seen. 

“Keep up the watch,” was Hiram’s direction. 
“And there will be need to keep a good lookout on the 
side where I was, too.” 

Quickly retaking the place where he had been sta- 
tioned and at the same time cautioning his friends to 
redouble their efforts on the opposite side of the 
mound, the watch was resumed. 

A few minutes only had elapsed before Hiram dis- 
covered a band almost as large as the one which Amos 
had seen passing the mound on his side. The sight 
was startling, and confirmed the fears which were in 
Hiram’s heart. 

Once more a conference was held and it was speed- 


210 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


ily decided that the attempt to gain the shore of Lake 
Erie by the way which Hiram had suggested must 
be abandoned. The Indians were on every side. 
And the out-look for reaching the haven where Cap- 
tain Perry and his men were building the little fleet 
was dark. 

The shades of approaching evening now were long 
and only the rim of the great sun could be seen as 
it hung below the tree-tops. The supreme fear in the 
minds of all was that the Indians would discover that 
the band which they evidently had been following 
had not advanced and that they would return to 
search for their hiding place. 

^‘We won’t any of us go to sleep to-night,” said 
Hiram. ^‘All four of us must keep watch. If one 
sees anything suspicious he must warn the rest of 
us before he shoots. It is going to be a close call, any- 
way, and if we ever get to Presque Isle well remem- 
ber this night.” 

No one replied to the suggestion though each at 
once resumed the station assigned him as a lookout. 
The twilight deepened and the night came on and 
still no evidence of the presence of their enemies was 
discovered. 

None of the boys was aware that the British gen- 
eral at last had yielded to the urgent pleadings of 
Tecumseh, who presumably had more than 1,500 of 
the red warriors at the British headquarters at Mal- 
den, and that they were no longer able to be re- 


IN THE MIDST OF ALARMS 


211 


strained. The attack sometime before upon the Mau- 
mee Valley and upon Fort Meigs had been repulsed 
by the heroic action of young Major Croghan, who, 
directly contrary to the orders of General Harrison, 
had held the little Fort. 

The young major, who was less than twenty-two 
years of age, had only one six-pounder to aid in the de- 
fense of the place. Rejecting the pleadings of the 
British who had sent messengers in the Fort begging 
for its surrender so that bloodshed might be avoided 
and the red men be prevented from the indiscrim- 
inate slaughter which all knew would follow a success- 
ful attack on the place, he had replied that “when 
the Fort should be taken there would be none left to 
massacre. ’ ^ 

Around the Fort was a deep ditch, and in their con- 
fidence of speedily possessing themselves of the place, 
the redcoats and the red men had leaped into the 
ditch preparing to scale the walls. It was then that 
young Major Croghan turned “Good Bess,^’ the 
name of his six-pound cannon, upon the struggling 
mass of men in the ditch and a frightful slaughter 
followed. 

Although the British were not ready to abandon 
the attack, their red allies fled with shouts and cries 
to the shelter of the adjacent forests; but the rifles 
of the few defenders and the activity of “Good Bess’’ 
prevented the taking of the Fort, and the bold young 
commander soon was permitted to send a message 


212 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


of his success to General Harrison, who was in com- 
mand of the Western Army. 

But Tecumseh’s followers, as well as many of the 
followers of General Proctor, were determined to 
atone for the disaster. At last a second attack was 
planned and preliminary to this undertaking many 
of Teeumseh’s warriors were let loose in the region. 
Some of them planned to intercept men who were 
advancing from the south, while others were to at- 
tempt to cut off any additions to Perry’s little force 
at Presque Isle. 

But Hiram Proper and his friends on that June 
night in 1813 when they were in the shelter of the 
cedar trees on the top of the little mound, only a few 
miles from Lake Erie, were not aware of any of these 
things, and consequently were in ignorance also of the 
cause of the presence of the warriors in the woods. 


CHAPTER XVII 


PURSUED 

T he evening advanced and the careful watch was 
unbroken. An occasional call of a night-bird 
or the snapping of a branch under the footfall of 
some prowling beast were the only sounds that were 
heard. The light of the stars in a measure enabled 
the anxious young soldier to see a short distance into 
the surrounding forest, but even the forms of passing 
men would have been difBcult to distinguish from 
the trunks of the tall trees. 

Apparently their enemies either had withdrawn or 
were waiting until a more suitable time before they 
made their attack. The custom of the red men of 
beginning their attacks just before dawn was known 
to the four watchers, but the knowledge did not 
interfere with the careful guard that was main- 
tained. 

Occasionally Hiram withdrew from his post to con- 
sult with his companions and learn whether or not 
any sign of danger had been seen by them. Each 
time he returned to his position without any further 
knowledge of the conditions that surrounded them. 
At last midnight arrived. Summoning his friends 
213 


214 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


once more, Hiram held a whispered conversation in 
the center of the open place among the cedars. 

*^Do you think they have gone on?’’ inquired 
Simeon. 

Hiram shook his head as he replied, ^^They 
saw our footprints as plainly as we can see the 
stars. They haven’t left us and they know where we 
are.” 

“How will it do for us to try to get away in the 
darkness?” inquired Sir Walter. 

“It won’t do at all,” replied Hiram positively. 
“They outnumber us ten to one, anyway. Some of 
them now are right near the base of the hill, I am 
sure.” 

“Can’t we make our way through them?” inquired 
Amos. 

“Not all of us. If we should make a rush together 
some of us would be hit and probably every one. If 
we went one by one, perhaps some of us might get 
away, but that is a question.” 

“What can we do, then?” inquired Simeon seri- 
ously. 

“I don’t know,” answered Hiram. “Perhaps 
we’ll know more when morning comes.” 

“We’ll know more of what we don’t want to know,” 
suggested Sir Walter. “I have a plan to suggest, 
and I think it is the only one we can try. ’ ’ 

“What is it?” asked Hiram. 

“It is for one of us to try to make his way to 


PURSUED 


215 


Presque Isle and get a detachment to come out here 
to rescue the rest of us — who will stay here.’’ 

‘‘I am not sure,” said Hiram thoughtfully, ^‘hut 
that suggestion is the best. I have thought of some- 
thing of the kind myself. It may be that I shall 
succeed in making my w^ay through the woods. If 
I don’t, you will know it by to-morrow night.” 

‘‘What are you talking about?” demanded Sir Wal- 
ter sharply. “Do you think you are the only one 
who can get through the lines of these redskins?” 

“I don’t know that I do,” replied Hiram. “I 
hadn’t thought of any one else going.” 

“Well, think of it now!” retorted Sir Walter. 
“We’re going to settle that thing in the right way.” 

“How is that?” 

“We’ll draw lots for it.” 

“All right,” assented Hiram. “You fix your 
straws and we’ll all draw. Whoever goes ought to 
start from here before sunrise.” 

In the dim light Sir Walter selected four spears of 
grass which he cut into different lengths. These he 
arranged between the palms of his hands and then 
turning once more to his companions said, “Which 
shall it be — the longest or the shortest straw?” 

“The shortest,” answered Hiram promptly. “I’ll 
draw first.” As he spoke he selected one of the 
straws in Sir Walter’s hands and his example was 
followed in order by Amos and Simeon, Sir Walter 
retaining the one which was left. Comparing the 


21G 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


straws a moment later Amos in a low voice said, 
have the shortest, and I’m the one to go.” 

^‘No,” said Hiram quickly. ‘‘You are to stay here 
and I shall go.” 

“No, sir,” declared Amos promptly. “I drew the 
lot and I am going to do my part. Besides, who 
knows that I’ll not be a good deal safer in the woods 
than I would be if I stayed here cooped up on the top 
of this mound. ’ ’ 

Hiram made no further protest and all four re- 
sumed their watch. 

Several hours elapsed before Hiram sought his 
young brother and said to him earnestly, “Amos, if 
you are going, it is time for you to start.” 

“All right,” replied Amos. “I am going and am 
ready to start at any time.” 

“I’m not afraid of your losing your way,” con- 
tinued Hiram. “What you’ll have to look out for 
most is being followed by some of these redskins. 
Keep as straight a course as you can for the lake. 
It may be that you will find a brook and you can 
follow its course all the way. Usually there are 
bushes growing along the banks of the little stream 
and they will give you places where you can hide. I 
don’t know what your mother would say if she knew 
I was letting you go alone. ’ ’ 

“She’d say less than she would if both of us were 
going. Somebody will have to go, and it might as 
well be Amos Proper as any one.” 


PURSUED 


217 


No further words were spoken and in a brief time, 
Amos, having bidden his companions good-bye and 
shaken the hand of each, cautiously withdrew from 
the cedars and moving slowly made his way safely to 
the base of the little hill, where in a moment he was 
lost to sight in the darkness of the surrounding for- 
est. 

Halting long enough to convince himself that no 
one was near, Amos cautiously and carefully moved 
forward on his way. In the dim light he was aware 
that he had crossed the main trail. Beyond, there 
was only the pathless forest. All about him were the 
great trees with their shadows and their perils. Any 
treetop might be the hiding place of a treacherous 
foe; any bush might conceal a painted savage. 

At frequent intervals the boy stopped to listen and 
to look intently about him. At times he moved 
swiftly on his way. When the dawn appeared, he 
estimated that he must have covered two miles at 
least and as he had not yet obtained a glimpse of his 
fenemies, his heart became lighter. 

He believed that the first of his perils had been 
safely passed, but the greater danger was still to 
be met, when he should come nearer to the main body 
that was stationed at Presque Isle. Doubtless the 
red men now were near the little place, watchful of 
conditions there and ready to report by runner to 
their leaders if anything of unusual interest oc- 
curred. Convinced that for a time at least he might 


218 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


proceed with a measure of safety, Amos ran swiftly 
forward, sometimes leaping over the fallen branches, 
or compelled to push his way through the thick un- 
derbrush that like a wall disputed his passage. 

The May sun had climbed high in the heavens and 
the heat of the day increased. The young soldier had 
quenched his thirst at a spring he found on a little 
hillside, but he was hungry now. There was no time 
however to satisfy his craving, though with his knife 
he cut strips from the piece of jerked beef he was 
carrying, and ate as he ran. 

Suddenly he discovered before him a band of a half- 
dozen Indian braves. In the one quick glance he gave, 
he saw the hideous stripes and splashes of red and yel- 
low on their faces, which indicated only too clearly 
the purpose for which the warriors were advancing. 
"Whether or not he had been seen he did not know. 

The Indians were not more than twenty yards in 
advance of him and apparently were moving in the 
same direction in w^hich he was going. They were 
all armed and he was aware that if his presence was 
known, a fight for life must follow. 

Instantly Amos had darted to one side, striving to 
make his way noiselessly through the tangled brush 
and among the tall trees. He was fearful that the 
sound of his footfalls might have been heard and a 
moment later he was convinced that they had been, 
for there was a loud yell behind him that showed only 
too plainly that the red men had discovered his pres- 


PURSUED 


219 


ence on the trail and had turned in swift pur- 
suit of the stranger. The time for caution was now 
gone, and Amos Proper broke into his swiftest paces. 
On and on, leaping over the fallen trees, almost heed- 
less of his direction, the lad ran, hoping that he might 
be able to distance his pursuers. It was true he 
might lose his way, but it was better to lose that 
than his life at the hands of the merciless savages. 

Not many minutes had elapsed, however, before his 
ears were saluted by a whoop and he heard a musket 
ball ‘‘sing^^ uncomfortably close to his head. 

Instantly changing the direction in which he was 
running, Amos headed back toward the trail, hoping 
to gain it at a point in advance of the place where 
the Indians probably had abandoned it. In that 
clearer pathway he might be able to make such speed 
as he could not hope to make in the tangled brush 
of the forest. His body was trembling and great 
drops of perspiration stood out on his forehead, as he 
endeavored still more to increase his speed. 

A groan escaped the young soldier’s lips when, as 
he drew near the trail, his ears were again saluted 
by a whoop, and he was aware that the savages had 
guarded against the very attempt he was trying to 
make by stationing some of their number along the 
trail to thwart his scheme. 

The shots increased and the cries became fiercer 
as young Amos Proper again quickly changed his 
direction and once more turned back into the forest. 


220 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


Swift as was his pace, that of the pursuing Indians 
seemed to be still swifter. The cries were heard on 
almost every side and every fresh whoop sounded like 
a knell in the ears of the desperate boy. He came 
to the border of a stream and without hesitating a 
moment leaped in, holding his rifle about his head 
and hoping that his pursuers might hesitate to follow 
him into the water. Soon after he gained the bank 
he was conscious that the cries had redoubled and he 
was aware also that the chase was even keener than it 
had been. 

A moment later he came into a little opening and 
as he darted across it several shots rang out. Amos 
felt a stinging, burning sensation in his left arm, but 
there was neither faltering nor stopping. 

On and still on ran pursued and pursuers. Again 
several shots rang out behind him and once more the 
lad was aware that he had been wounded, but just 
where he could not determine. The wild cries ap- 
parently were on all sides, but now he was only 
partly aware of their terrible meaning. There was 
a ringing in his ears, but he still fled on. Life and 
safety for himself and for the friends he had left in 
the early dawn depended upon his eiforts. There 
must be no faltering at the last! The race for life 
must be won ! 

Only partly aware of the direction in which he had 
been running, Amos was ignorant of the region in 
which he now found himself after an hour had elapsed. 



Again several shots rang out behind him. Page 220, 




PURSUED 


221 


That he had not been overtaken seemed to the suffer- 
ing boy almost incredible. For some time the cries 
of his pursuers had not been heard, but uncertain 
whether this was due to their having abandoned their 
pursuit, or to the fact that they were saving their 
breath for the final race, he could not determine. 
Weary though he was, he did not think of stopping. 
His sole hope of safety lay in the possibility of his 
obtaining help from the garrison on the shore of Lake 
Erie. 

But even rugged Amos Proper was unable to con- 
tinue his flight much farther. Wild-eyed and blood- 
stained, and with a pain in his side that was almost 
unbearable, the lad looked about him for some place 
of refuge. 

Not far away he suddenly discovered the stream 
which several miles back he had seen before. Run- 
ning to its bank he leaped into the water and stum- 
bling, almost falling, and yet somehow contriving to 
keep on his way, he ran a hundred feet or more in the 
shallow waters, unconsciously following the current 
as he did so. 

The stream here became wider, and about twenty 
feet from the shore was an island perhaps forty feet 
long and fifteen wide and covered with brush. The 
sight suggested to the desperate boy a hiding-place, 
and instantly he turned toward the shore. He was 
surprised when he discovered that he was able to wade 
the entire distance, and in a few minutes he almost 


222 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


fell forward as he gained the bank and halted under 
the shelter of the bushes that grew near the border of 
the island. 

Closing his eyes and almost indifferent now to any 
result that might follow his efforts, the suffering boy 
lay still for several minutes. Restored in a measure 
by the rest he had been able to take, Amos then 
crawled on his hands and knees a little farther up the 
bank to a place where he would be able to see what 
might be passing on the main shore, without unduly 
exposing himself. Successful in his attempt he 
parted the bushes and carefully looked first up and 
then down the shore of the stream. 


CHAPTER XVIII 


ON THE SHORE OF LAKE ERIE 

S CARCELY conscious of the passing time and of 
his suffering, Amos Proper remained in his hid- 
ing place until at last he became aware that the ob- 
ject of his flight would be lost unless some action 
was taken speedily. How much time had elapsed 
since he had departed from the place where he had 
left his brother and his companions, he did not know. 
He glanced at the sun and concluded that it must be 
near the hour of noon. Crawling painfully to the 
borders of the stream he drank from the swiftly 
flowing water until his thirst was quenched and then 
he resumed his place behind the bushes. 

A long time had elapsed since he had seen any of 
his enemies and yet Amos was so familiar with the 
ways of the red men that it was impossible for him to 
believe that they really had departed. And yet what 
could he do? He still had the rifle which he had 
brought from the camp, and almost unconsciously 
looked to its priming, but he was unaware of the dis- 
tance to the lake shore and was confident that some, 
at least, of his enemies were still prowling about in the 
223 


224 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


vicinity. The Indian warriors did not readily retire 
from a place to which they once had laid siege. 

Fearful that harm might befall his brother and 
aware also that what he did must be done quickly, 
Amos at last decided to venture once more from his 
place of shelter. A final glance was given up and 
down the stream, which failed to disclose the presence 
of any of his enemies, and then the boy slowly made 
his way to the opposite side of the island. Here he 
was rejoiced when he found that the water was still 
shallow and that the distance to the mainland was not 
more than five or six yards. Delaying no longer, he 
plunged once more into the stream, gained the bank 
he was seeking and then summoning all his strength 
began to run along the bank, following the direction 
of the stream. 

In spite of the pain he suffered he was convinced 
that the two wounds he had received were not serious. 
One bullet had grazed his arm and though the wound 
had bled freely it was not deep. The other had 
passed through his jacket above his shoulder, but as he 
still was able to move his arm freely he was not fear- 
ful of evil results. The sense of his brother’s danger 
now returned with full force and Amos’s speed in- 
creased as he ran forward. It was not unlikely that 
some of his foes might have crossed the stream and 
were waiting for him further down, but as he had 
not yet seen any of them, he plunged forward 
running swiftly and stopping only occasionally 


ON THE SHORE OF LAKE ERIE 


225 


to look about him, or to make sure of what was 
behind. 

How far he had gone, he did not know, when at 
last he saw before him the blue waters of Lake Erie. 
Running swiftly to the shore he looked about in all 
directions for the presence of friends. In which di- 
rection was Presque Isle? Should he turn to his 
right, or should he go to the left? Unfamiliar as 
Amos was with the entire region, he was in a quan- 
dary. To proceed in the wrong direction now would 
lead him further away from the place where help was 
to be found, and might also take him into greater and 
unknown perils. 

At last the boy decided to cross the mouth of the 
stream, which, as far as he could see, was still shal- 
low. Instantly advancing into the water he was re- 
joiced when he found that he had no difficulty in 
wading to the opposite shore. The waters in places 
were somewhat noisy and there were certain swift 
currents where the stream dashed over slippery 
stones. Several times the eager boy nearly lost his 
balance and almost fell into the water, but each time 
he recovered himself and plunged forward. 

Without hesitating he ran swiftly along the shore as 
soon as he gained the desired bank, still driven by a 
sense of the fresh peril of going in the wrong di- 
rection. In most places the shore of the lake was 
sandy and wide so that he was running at a distance 
of fifteen yards or more from the trees that were 


226 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


growing on the sloping sides. As yet there had been 
no indication that he was seen or was being followed, 
but now his anxiety provided an incentive for speed 
greater even than his own fear. On and on the boy 
ran until at last he stopped abruptly when not far 
in advance of him he discovered a band of men. A 
hasty glance at once revealed the fact that they were 
white men and instantly he concluded he must be near 
the place he was seeking. 

With a shout Amos advanced and as he came nearer 
he was aware that the men had discovered his ap- 
proach and were curiously watching him. He saw 
that there were at least ten in the band and though 
they were armed they did not appear to be hostile. 

Amos’s appearance as he stumbled into the midst 
of the men was somewhat startling. His face and 
hands were blood-stained, while the dirt and streams 
of perspiration had made strange markings on his 
countenance. 

“Where is Presque Isle?” he asked breathlessly. 

“What do you want of that place ? Who are you ? ’ ’ 
demanded one of the young men in the band. 

“I want help!” replied Amos. “I left three men 
back on the trail and there is a band of Indians which 
has surrounded them. If they don’t get help right 
away they will be scalped, every one of them!” 

“Who are the men?” demanded the leader as 
his companions crowded about the boy in their in- 
terest. 


ON THE SHORE OF LAKE ERIE 


227 


\ 


‘^They are three men coming to join Captain 
Perry’s force,” explained Amos. 

‘‘How many Indians are there?” 

“I don’t know exactly,” responded Amos, “but 
there must be twenty-five or thirty, anyway.” 

“I am afraid nothing will save the men then,” re- 
plied the leader, shaking his head. 

“But they must be saved! One of them is my 
brother, Hiram! They sent me on to get help!” 

“Come with me,’^ said the young soldier, “and 
we’ll see what can be done.” 

Instantly obeying, Amos followed the young man 
along the winding shore until at last he found him- 
self on the beach of a broad bay. Before him he 
could see the vessels which Captain Perry’s men had 
been building. He had arrived at last at Presque 
Isle! Interest in his surroundings, however, for the 
time was forgotten, as he painfully followed the man 
who was conducting him toward the quarters of the 
men. 

“Stay here until I come back,” said the soldier 
sharply, as he turned to a band of his companions, 
just returning from the stocks. 

Amos saw that he held a hasty conversation with 
the men and as they all soon ran from the place he 
concluded the message they had received had pro- 
duced an immediate effect. 

Meanwhile the soldier returned to Amos and said, 
“Now tell me exactly where the place is.” 


228 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


‘‘I will do the best I can/^ replied Amos. ‘^It 
must be eighteen or twenty miles from here, and is 
on the main trail. It is a little hill or a big mound, 
whichever you want to call it. There are some cedar 
trees growing on the top and a noisy brook runs along 
one side at the base. There aren’t any trees very 
near it and it stands out all alone.” 

‘‘I guess I know the spot,” said the other man 
quickly. “It’s a place where some of the Indian 
tribes along the lake have buried their dead for no one 
knows how many generations.” 

“Maybe that was the reason why the Indians didn’t 
attack us last night,” suggested Amos. 

“Probably that was one of the reasons,” said the 
man. “Now if your brother and his friends can 
stave off an attack to-night, we may be able to get 
them out of the place before morning. It all depends 
on who the redskins were and what they were do- 
ing. Why,” he added suddenly, “you look as if 
you yourself had been hit ! ’ ’ 

“I guess I was,” said Amos, “but I couldn’t have 
been hit very hard because I kept on without stopping 
except for a little while on an island I found in a big 
creek up the shore.” 

“Yes, I know the place. You come with me, and 
I will see what can be done for you.” 

“But I’m going back with you,” replied Amos. 

“You’ll stay here,” said the man quickly; and the 
lad realized there was nothing more to be said. 


ON THE SHORE OF LAKE ERIE 


229 


Amos followed his new friend and was conducted 
by him into the presence of the surgeon who at once 
began an investigation. When at last Amos was re- 
leased, after having been informed that he would be 
all right again in a few days, he was also told by 
one of the men that had met him on the bank that a 
band of twenty men already had departed for the 
rescue of the little party. 

“What is your name?^’ demanded the stranger 
abruptly. 

“Amos Proper. 

“Did you come here to join one of the captain’s 
crews ? ’ ’ 

“Yes, that is, I came to join Captain Perry’s force, 
and my brother and the other men were coming, too. ’ ’ 

“We need every man we can get! Captain Perry 
has been sending couriers to Commodore Chauncey 
almost every day for the past two weeks begging for 
men. The fleet is almost ready.” 

“Yes!” said Amos in surprise. “I see it is,” he 
added, as he glanced at the boats, some of which al- 
ready were floating on the waters. Only a few at 
this time still remained on the stocks. 

“My name,” said the stranger, “is John Corneek.” 

“Do you come from Rhode Island?” inquired Amos 
with a smile. 

“How did you know that?” demanded the man in 
surprise. 

“Oh, I just guessed it. Some of the men here I 


230 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


know are from that State. Do you know Gordon 
Hopkins ? ^ ^ 

^‘Indeed I do/^ replied the man promptly. ‘‘He’s 
here now.” 

“Where is he?” asked Amos eagerly. 

“You’ll find him at work on the Lawrence along 
with a good many other good men.” 

“I brought some papers from Niagara,” explained 
Amos as he drew a letter from his pocket. “They 
will tell who I am and what I am to do.” 

“I guess the captain will explain all that,” laughed 
John. Although he was only a few years older than 
Amos, he assumed the manner of one who had had 
long experience. “I will go with you now,” he 
added. “We’ll find some quarters for you so that 
you’ll know when you’re at home.” 

As they advanced John began to sing, — 

“Long the tyrant of our coast, 

Reigned the famous Guerriere: 

Our little navy she defied 
Public ship and privateer: 

On her sails, in letters red 
To our captains were displayed 
Words of warning, words of dread: 

‘All who meet me have a care, 

I am England’s Guerriere,^ ” 

“That’s very good,” said Amos. 

“Of course,” replied John. “Then here’s another 


ON THE SHORE OF LAKE ERIE 


231 


“‘Clear ship for action!’ sounds the boatswain’s call; 

‘Clear ships for action!’ his three mimics bawl. 

Swift round the deck see war’s dread weapons hurled 
And floating ruins strew the watery world. 

‘All hands to quarters’ fore and aft resounds, 

Thrills from the fife and from the drum-head bounds. 
From crowded hatchways, scores on scores arise. 

Spring up the shrouds, and vault into the skies. 

Firm at his quarters each bold gunner stands. 

The death-fraught lightning flashes from his hands. 

“Haven’t you heard those songs about Captain 
Hull?” abruptly asked the singer. 

“Do you mean William Hull?” inquired Amos. 
‘ ‘ I know a song, it begins, — 

“Let William Hull be counted null, 

A coward and a traitor; 

His army sold for British gold 
To Brock, the speculator,” — 

“Oh, that is another Hull entirely,” broke in John. 
“I am singing about Captain Isaac Hull. You know 
he was in command of the Constitution last year when 
she captured the Guerriere, That was a great fight, 
boy, and I guess if our boats can win on the ocean, 
they can win on Lake Erie, too ! We’ll have a chance 
to try too pretty soon because the British fleet has 
been laying off and on outside the harbor for a good 
many days. Did you ever hear how Captain Isaac 
Hull got so excited when the fight began that he 
split his tight breeches from the waistband to the 
knee? He was one of the fattest men I ever saw and 


232 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


he always insisted upon wearing tight breeches. 
When the Guerriere opened fire Lieutenant Morris, 
who was second in command to Hull, came up to the 
captain and asked permission to open fire. ‘Not yet,* 
said Captain Hull. Nearer and nearer still the two 
vessels came together and then Lieutenant Morris 
asked again for permission to fire. ‘Not yet,* said 
Captain Hull as calmly as if he had been talking in 
some home. By and by when the Constitution 
reached just the place he wanted Captain Hull all at 
once was full of excitement and twice bending over he 
yelled: ‘Now, boys, pour it into them!* The Con- 
stitution opened her forward guns, — they were double 
shotted with round and grape, — with awful effect. 
Both boats were hidden in the smoke and perhaps it 
was just as well, for when Captain Isaac stood up 
he found that he had had the accident I told you 
about. * * 

“Did he stop to change his clothes?** laughed 
Amos. 

Looking sharply into his companion’s face, John 
replied, “I guess you don’t know much about Isaac 
Hull, or you wouldn’t ask that question. In a few 
minutes the Guerriere^ s mizzenmast was shot away 
and the cabin of the Constitution was on fire, and 
there were guns sounding on every side. The British 
piped, ‘All hands below,* and got ready to close in or 
board. So did our men. Just then the Constitu- 
tion caught a little breeze and fell away a short dis- 


ON THE SHORE OF LAKE ERIE 


233 


tance, and that gave her time to look after her own 
masts. They rove the rigging and, just before the 
sun set, the old frigate wheeled around and got just 
the position she wanted for raking the wreck of the 
Guerriere. There wasn’t any tiling left after that, 
and the Guerriere was Captain Isaac Hull’s prize. 
Captain Dacres, who was in command of the Guer- 
riere, didn’t want to own up that he had lowered his 
flag, but he thought better after a minute and owned 
up that he had. When Captain Hull asked him if 
he didn’t need a surgeon, or want the Constitution's 
surgeon to help his wounded, he said, H should sup- 
pose you had on board your own ship business enough 
for all your medical officers. ’ Then Lieutenant Read, 
who had been sent to take charge of the Guerriere 
spoke up. ‘Oh, no, we have only seven wounded and 
they were dressed last night.’ ” John once more be- 
gan to sing, — 

“Isaac did so maul and rake her, 

That the decks of Captain Dacres 
Were in such a woeful pickle. 

As if Death, with scythe and sickle. 

With his sling or with his shaft 
Had cut his harvest fore and aft. 

Thus, in thirty minutes ended 
Mischiefs that could not be mended; 

Masts and yards, and ship descended 
All to David Jones’s locker — 

Such a ship in such a pucker!” 


CHAPTER XIX 


SCOUTING 


MOS’S condition was such that he was prevented 



from immediately entering upon the work for 
which he had come. His wounded arm was carried 
in a sling, and there were other indications of the 
terrible experience through which he had passed. 

As the day drew to a close he was eagerly await- 
ing the return of the band which had been sent for 
the rescue of Hiram and his friends. The night, 
however, drew on and the men had not yet come. 

It was nearly noon the following day when the 
rescuing party returned to Presque Isle and when 
Amos was aware of their presence he ran eagerly 
to the place where they were to be seen, surrounded 
by their friends. To his dismay he did not see Hi- 
ram among the men, neither was either of the other 
of his recent companions there ! Startled and 
alarmed by the sight, as soon as he was able to do 
so he sought out the leader of the expedition and said 
to him, ^‘Didn^t you find my brother 

‘‘No,’’ replied the man gruffly. “There wasn’t a 
soul in the place where you said they were shut in by 
the redskins. We didn’t see an Indian either all 


234 


SCOUTING 


235 


the way going and coming. It is my opinion, young 
man, you sent us on a wild goose chase/’ 

“Perhaps you didn’t find the right place?” sug- 
gested Amos scarcely aware of the implied reproach 
in the man’s words so anxious was he concerning the 
safety of Hiram. What could have happened? Did 
the besieging Indians succeed in taking the men away 
from them? It was strange, too, that no sign of the 
presence of the red men had been discovered by the 
band, which had been sent for the relief of Hiram 
and his comrades. 

“How far did you go?” inquired Amos. 

“Ti^ice as far as we ought to have gone,” retorted 
the man almost angrily. “We might better have 
stayed here and kept up our work on the fleet. If I 
thought you — ” 

“Does this look like it?” broke in Amos quickly 
as he pointed to the arm which he ^ as carrying in a 
sling. 

“Maybe not,” said the man slightly mollified by 
the evident sincerity of the boy; but he added, “you 
may have been scared a good deal more than you had 
a right to be.” 

‘ ‘ But we saw two bands of Indians, and there must 
have been twenty in each of them,” protested Amos. 
“We kept guard all night and we all wondered why 
they didn’t attack us. Now you say that it was a 
burying-place. That may be the reason why we were 
left alone. Are you sure you cannot find them?” 


236 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


“Of course I am sure, I ought to know it if any- 
body does. We have tramped through the woods and 
kept on the lookout for the redskins, but we didn’t 
even find a white man for all our troubles.” 

“But where do you suppose my brother and the 
other men are?” 

“I haven’t the least idea,” retorted the man a little 
more sympathetic as he saw the manifest distress of 
Amos. “They may have slipped out just as you 
did. If one boy can make his way to Presque Isle, 
I guess the others can, too. I shouldn’t worry about 
it. They may have taken the wrong trail. If they 
did, it may be a day or two before they find it out. 
Take it easy for a while and let the other fellow do 
the worrying.” 

Amos said no more, but the following day found 
him anxiously watching the opening in the forest 
where Hiram and the others would be likely first to 
appear. 

Meanwhile although he was unable to take any 
share in the work, Amos was deeply interested in 
the labors of the men and the fleet which they were 
building. 

There were two brigs — the Lawrence, named by 
the Secretary of the Navy in honor of the gallant 
captain of the Chesapeake — and the other, the Niag- 
ara. In addition, there was a clipper schooner, the 
Ariel, and several sloops, the chief of which were 
the Porcupine and the Tigress. 


SCOUTINa 


237 


Several of these vessels were nearly completed, as 
we know, and the work upon the other boats was pro- 
gressing as rapidly as possible under the discouraging 
conditions that prevailed at Presque Isle. 

Captain Perry himself was ill, and the two doc- 
tors in the force had also about one-fifth of the entire 
number in their improvised hospitals. Besides these 
discouraging facts, there were others which must have 
increased the distress and anxiety of the energetic 
young commander. 

The Government at Washington failing to provide 
the captain with sufficient men to man his fleet, at 
the same time was calling loudly upon him to coop- 
erate with General Harrison, who was in command, 
as we know, of the Western Army. Indeed, within 
the space of four days, two couriers arrived who had 
been sent by the Secretary of the Treasury with posi- 
tive orders for the fleet on Lake Erie to enter at 
once into plans with General Harrison for active 
work. There is slight cause for surprise that the 
name of this Secretary was not popular among many 
of the soldiers in the War of 1812! At the same 
time General Harrison was sending messengers to 
Presque Isle and describing the dire perils of his 
little army and his pressing need of help. 

As if to make matters still worse, almost at the 
same time, word was received that a new and power- 
ful vessel, to be called the Detroit, was being built 
at Malden and now was almost ready to serve in the 


238 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


British fleet. Perhaps none of these things had a 
more depressing effect upon the little force at Presque 
Isle than the report which was sent that Captain 
Robert H. Barclay, who had served with Admiral 
Nelson at Trafalgar, had arrived at Malden and had 
brought with him many men and officers who had 
had experience under the great British Admiral. 

When it was said that Captain Barclay was to be 
the commander of the British fleet on Lake Erie the 
fears of the inexperienced Yankees were not allayed. 
Two hundred soldiers, who had been sent from Buf- 
falo had been ordered to return. Indeed, when 
Perry’s fleet at last was ready for action he had only 
about three hundred officers and men at Presque Isle 
to command two twenty-gun brigs and eight smaller 
vessels. IMany of the number were negroes, and many 
were boys not much older than Amos Proper. 

Replying to General Harrison’s appeals for help 
Captain Perry explained his own inability to do much 
because of his lack of men. 

This message soon afterward brought a sharp let- 
ter from the Secretary of the Navy, who rebuked 
the young commander sharply for thus “exposing 
his w^eakness.” 

When Captain Perry wrote to Commodore Chaun- 
cey, complaining not only of the small number of 
men sent him but also stating that they were an 
inferior lot, — “a motley set, — ^blacks, soldiers and 


SCOUTING 


239 


boys,’— he received in reply from the half-sick, 
nervous Commodore, such a letter that Captain Perry 
promptly asked for his removal from the station be- 
cause he ‘‘could not serve longer under an officer who 
had been so totally regardless of his feelings.” 

Commodore Chauncey, however, who was really a 
brave and true man, at once wrote a friendly letter to 
Captain Perry in which he generously withdrew the 
bitter words he had written and at once appealed to 
the manly spirit of the energetic young captain. 
Friendly relations were quickly restored between the 
captain on Lake Erie and the commodore on Lake 
Ontario. 

Amos Proper speedily made aware by his new com- 
rades of the condition which had arisen, was more 
seriously troubled by the continued failure of his 
brother and his companions to arrive at Presque Isle. 
When three days had elapsed and still no word of the 
missing men was received his fears still more in- 
creased. Not a courier entering the post brought 
word of having seen or heard anything concerning the 
missing band. Indeed there were some who were in- 
clined to question openly whether Amos had really 
seen any prowling Indians or had not been deceived 
by his own fears. However probable such declara- 
tions might be, they none of them could explain the 
wounds which the lad had received. Neither had 
they accounted for the interview which he had held 


240 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


with Hiram, that had resulted in the drawing of the 
lots and the selection of the youngest to try to make 
his way to Presque Isle to secure help for his three 
companions, who had been left behind. 

The days slipped away and two weeks had now gone 
and still Hiram Proper and his two comrades had not 
come. What had become of them was chiefly a matter 
of conjecture, but many of those who were familiar 
with Amos’s story still believed they had been lost in 
the great forest. Such an explanation, however, did 
not satisfy Amos, who was convinced that his brother’s 
long experience in the woods had been such that it 
would be impossible for him to be lost. Aware 
of the experiences through which he himself had 
passed Amos was more fearful of an evil fate having 
befallen the three men from the prowling Indians. 
Although they might not have attacked the party 
hidden among the cedars on the top of the mound, 
still if the place really was what some had declared 
it to be (the burial place of some of the Indian 
tribes), doubtless their resentment against the young 
soldiers, who had intruded in such a sacred spot, would 
make them still more relentless in their determina- 
tion to find them. It was more than probable, thought 
Amos, that Hiram, Sir Walter, and Simeon either 
had been taken away captives by the Indian war- 
riors, or already had fallen victims to their anger. 
Slight comfort was to be had from either solution 
of the distressing problem, but Amos Proper, as 


SCOUTING 


241 


soon as he was able to engage in the work for which 
he had come, entered into the labors of the men at 
Presque Isle. 

Gordon Hopkins, who now was one of the leading 
spirits of the post, was Amos’s warmest friend. His 
selection for tasks not quite so difficult as some of 
the older men were compelled to undertake was 
doubtless due to the friendly word of the young Rhode 
Islander. 

When a few days had elapsed Amos was greatly 
pleased to find that he was to move from the quarters 
he occupied and become a member of the same mess to 
which Gordon belonged, and later they were work- 
ing side by side; and finally there came a day when 
to Amos’s great delight Gordon said to him, “You 
and I are to take a sharpie and cruise off and on, off 
the bay.” 

Gordon did not explain the purpose for which he 
and the lad were to be sent on the voyage and it did 
not occur to Amos to inquire. He was delighted to 
have even the brief respite from the hard labor, and 
the prospect of a sail on Lake Erie of itself was too 
good to allow him to delay for any questions. 

Accordingly, the following day, soon after sun- 
rise, in a fleet little sharpie, Gordon and Amos sailed 
out from the harbor of Presque Isle toward the open 
Lake. 

“See how shallow the water is here!” exclaimed 
Amos in surprise as he glanced over the rail of the 


242 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


fleet little craft. ‘‘Why it looks almost as if one 
might wade ashore.’’ 

“It is shallow in most places,” said Gordon. 

“Is there a channel?” 

“There is what they call a channel,” laughed Gor- 
don. 

“How in the world will they ever get this fleet out 
of the harbor then? Here’s a long bar,” added 
Amos as he once more glanced over the side of the 
boat. “It looks as if it extended almost all the way 
across the bay.” 

“It does ‘almost,’ but not quite,” exclaimed Gor- 
don. “I guess it will be something of a job to get 
the Lawrence and the Niagara out into the open 
lake.” 

“Where are we going?” inquired Amos. 

“Nowhere in particular,” laughed. Gordon. 

“What are we out here for?” 

“Don’t you want to be here?” 

“Of course, I do. It’s great fun,” replied Amos 
as a fresh puff of wind sent the little boat’s rail al- 
most under. 

“Well, then why don’t you take the hours as they 
come?” 

“I am taking them,” laughed Amos. “Still I 
should like to know what we are here for.” 

“It may be for nothing at all,” suggested Gordon. 

Amos shook his head as he said, “Why don’t you 
tell me?” 


SCOUTING 


243 


‘‘You know almost as much as responded Gor- 
don. ‘ ‘ I think we have been sent out here to see what 
we can see.^' 

“What?^’ demanded Amos abruptly turning about 
and facing his companion. 

“That's it," said Gordon. 

“Do they think the British fleet is off here?" 

“They will know more about that when we get 
back," replied Gordon sagely. 

“But that's what we're here to look for?" 

“You can draw your own conclusions as well as 
I can draw mine. Meanwhile keep your eyes open 
and if you want to I will let you take your turn at 
the tiller. We don't want to get more than two or 
three miles out from the shore." 

“What shall we do if we happen to see the British 
fleet?" 

“Put straight back to the dock." 

“If we can make it," suggested Amos. 

“Look yonder!" suddenly exclaimed Gordon point- 
ing northward across the lake as he spoke. Instantly 
both young sailors were gazing in the direction in- 
dicated and what they saw in the distance confirmed 
the fears of both. 


CHAPTER XX 


THE DISTANT SAIL 

F ar away on the horizon a fleet of a half-dozen 
or more sails was seen. For a moment both of 
the boys were silent, as they gazed in consternation 
at the startling sight. 

‘ ^ How many do you make ? ’ ’ inquired Gordon in a 
low voice. 

‘ ‘ Six, ^ ^ replied Amos once more counting aloud the 
boats he could distinguish in the distance. ‘‘What is 
it ? ’ ^ he added in a still lower voice. 

“It is the British Fleet!’’ answered Gordon. 
“There isn’t any question about it.” 

“Do you think they are going to attack Presque 
Isle now?” 

“I don’t believe they are out here for a picnic,” 
replied Gordon tartly. 

“Then the thing for us to do is to put straight back 
for the harbor and bring word that we have sighted 
the fleet.” 

“They can’t get into the harbor, any of them,” an- 
swered Gordon, “and I think we would better wait 
and make sure before we go back with our word.” 
“Why can’t they get into the harbor?” 

244 


THE DISTANT SAIL 


245 


‘^Because there is a long sand-bar there that runs 
almost across from one side to the other. Unless they 
know the channel they will never be able to get in- 
side and while they are trying to find the way I guess 
the Lawrence and the Niagara now are far enough 
along to have something to say about it.’’ 

‘‘It’s plain enough,” said Amos a few minutes 
later, “that the fieet is coming this way.” 

“Yes,” absently answered Gordon, without turning 
his glance away from the sails that now had risen 
above the horizon and plainly were rapidly drawing 
near. 

“Why don’t we take word to Captain Perry? 
That’s what I can’t understand. How far are we 
out from the shore? It must be four miles, any- 
way.” 

“About that I should think. They will sight the 
fleet from the lookout possibly as soon as we do.” 

“Then what was the use in sending us out here?” 

“So that we can see further than they can,” grimly 
answered Gordon, as he lifted the glasses again to 
his eyes and looked long and carefully at the vessels 
in the distance. 

“I think we ought to go back with our message,” 
exclaimed Amos impatiently, as his companion seemed 
to show no disposition to come about. 

“We’ll go directly,” said Gordon. He sat with 
the tiller held between his legs while the little craft 
sped forward, it’s skipper still watching through his 


246 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


glasses the fleet of the enemy. ‘‘I want to get a little 
better view of those fellows/’ he added, “before we 
run back. We can make almost as good time as they 
can running before the wind and we may have some- 
thing more to report. Look yonder!” he exclaimed 
suddenly as he pointed to a tiny sail far away to their 
right. 

“What’s that?” asked Amos excitedly. 

“That’s Jack Dobbin. He went out on the other 
side of the harbor to keep watch there just as we have 
been doing this side.” 

“He’s making good time back.” 

“Yes; and we won’t have to run in quite so soon 
just because he is taking the word. We’ll stay out 
here a little longer and watch these fellows before 
we go back. Are you afraid?” 

“Not very much,” answered Amos making a wry 
face as he spoke. 

“You needn’t be,” said Gordon confidently. 
“We’ll run in before those fellows can get anywhere 
near us and besides they won’t pay any attention to 
such small fry as we are, anyway.” 

“Hasn’t Captain Perry been afraid that Barclay 
would attack him at Presque Isle before he could get 
his fleet out of the harbor?” 

“I guess he has, — some,” answered Gordon soberly. 
“That is the reason why he built what he calls 
Wayne’s Block House on one side of the harbor and 
put up the other block house on the other.” 


THE DISTANT SAIL 


247 


“The harbor itself,’^ suggested Amos, “must be 
five miles from the lake, isn ’t it ? ’ ’ 

“Just about. I think it’s about time for us to run 
in,” Gordon added, after taking another long look 
through his glasses when he saw that the fleet was 
swiftly approaching. 

The wind was strong and came directly across the 
lake, favoring the approaching fleet as it did also 
the little catboat when both were headed in the same 
direction. 

Amos, who only occasionally had been permitted to 
look through the long glasses was now gazing almost 
fascinated at the swiftly approaching sails. There was 
a fascination in the sight even if the vessels belonged 
to the enemy. 

The clear sunlight, reflected as it was from the blue 
waters of Lake Erie, lent a tint of color to the white 
caps that now were to be seen on the waves. The 
wind was becoming stronger and the little boat in 
which the two observers were sailing was beginning 
to toss more wildly. When Gordon declared that it 
was time to run for the harbor the mind of the younger 
boy was greatly relieved and he turned quickly to 
lend a hand to his more experienced companion. 

In a brief time the boat was running before the 
wind, on its way back toward the shelter of the long 
sandy peninsulas that shut in the mouth of Cascade 
Creek and helped in forming the harbor of Presque 
Isle. Their little boat was now almost at the mouth 


248 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


of the stream and in a brief time would enter the har- 
bor and its crew carry the word of tlie approaching 
fleet which doubtless had already been discovered by 
the watchers in one of the Block Houses. 

The exhilaration of the swiftly moving sharpie, the 
thought of the enemy’s boats not far away and the 
possibility of an attack upon the uncompleted Amer- 
ican fleet in the harbor of Presque Isle, all were alike 
sources of excitement to the two young sailors. 

“Where did they get the name, — Presque Isle? 
What is it, anyway?” asked Amos. 

“Why, it’s one of the chain of forts which the 
Frenchmen built all the way from Quebec down to 
the Mississippi and then down the river to New Or- 
leans. ’ ’ 

“Who built it?” 

“Jean Coeur, though almost everybody calls him 
‘Joncire.’ ” 

“Who was he?” 

“Oh, one of the big Indian agents of the French 
Governor-General of Canada. The Frenchmen had 
planned to make this fort the place where all the 
supplies for the inland fleet might be landed, but 
when the English whipped the French and took Can- 
ada away from them they didn’t pay much attention 
to the forts. It was General Wayne who built the 
blockhouse and fixed over the place, when he came 
back from the Maumee Valley after he had whipped 
the Indians. He lived there for a little while in a 


THE DISTANT SAIL 


249 


log house that he had put up, right near the block- 
house, but he got the gout so badly that at last he died 
there and Anthony Wayne was buried right at the 
foot of the bluff/’ 

‘‘Did he build the blockhouse that’s here now?” 

“No. This has been built since Captain Perry 
came.” 

“But General Wayne’s body isn’t there now, is 
it?” 

“Oh, no. Four years ago some of the friends took 
it to Radnor. You know he was a Pennsylvanian 
and thought there wasn’t any State like it. 

“I believe,” added Gordon suddenly, “that those 
rascals really are going to make an attack on Presque 
Isle! You see they are spreading out in the shape 
of a crescent and that looks as if they were planning 
something that the captain won’t like.” 

“It does look so,” joined in Amos, as again he looked 
long at the fleet whose glistening sails now could be 
plainly distinguished in the distance. “I happen to 
know,” explained Gordon thoughtfully, “that Cap- 
tain Perry has received word from General Porter 
over at Black Rock that the British were centered 
over at Long Point. That’s straight across the lake 
from where we are. And word has come, too, that 
some of the Indians with Tecumseh, who gathered at 
Long Point, or Malden, or on the Detroit River some- 
where — he has about 2,500 of them, I understand — 
have been turned loose on the country to cut off any 


250 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


of our men who might be on their way to Fort Meigs 
or Fort Stephenson and at the same time the British 
Fleet had disappeared as if it had been sunk in Lake 
Erie. But they didn’t fool Captain Perry, who knew 
that fleet would head for Presque Isle sooner or later 
and I guess he will be able to stave them off for a 
while anyway.” 

“If they get into the harbor they will make things 
lively for us!” 

“I don’t believe they can do that, now. The chan- 
nel is narrow. They will have their troubles trying 
to get in there because there will be some cannon and 
a lot of men stationed at the blockhouse and along 
the bluffs and Barclay will think twice before he 
tries to get across the bar.” 

Suddenly an exclamation of dismay escaped Gor- 
don’s lips as the sheet-rope which he had been haul- 
ing in snapped and the sail of the little boat began 
to flap wildly in the wind. 

“Take in the sail!” shouted Gordon. “Drop her! 
Look sharp! If she jibes she’ll knock you over- 
board ! Look sharp ! ” he called again as Amos sprang 
to obey the word. Fortunately the lad succeeded in 
taking in the sail without any mishap, though sev- 
eral times he was almost thrown from the deck as the 
little catboat lurched before the strong wind or was 
caught in the trough of the sea which was easily 
“kicked up” on shallow Lake Erie. 

As soon as the sail was lowered and the boom had 


THE DISTANT SAIL 


251 


been hauled in/’ Amos said excitedly, “This sheet 
rope won’t hold anything. I can break it with my 
hands. What shall we do?” 

“Do!” retorted Gordon sharply. “You take the 
tiller and I’ll see if I can rig up something to help 
us out of this scrape.” 

As the younger boy obediently took the tiller and 
tried to keep the bow pointed toward the harbor, 
which still was far away, his companion opening his 
knife quickly began to cut the short ropes which were 
used in taking reefs in the sails. It was his only 
recourse, for a hasty search had revealed the fact that 
there was no spare rope on board. 

Gordon’s task had only begun, when in a low voice 
Amos said, “What’s that sail off yonder?” pointing 
as he spoke behind him toward the extreme right of 
the fleet where a smaller sail now could be seen. 

For a moment Gordon did not reply, as he stood 
gazing at the sight to which his companion had called 
his attention; then seizing the glasses he lifted them 
to his eyes and again looked a long time at the far- 
away sight. 

“Can you make out what it is?” inquired Amos at 
last. 

“ Yes, ” replied Gordon sharply. “ It ’s a yawl with 
a half-dozen men or more in it. It is rigged up with 
a sail and my opinion is that they are headed for us.” 

Amos’s face turned pale at the words of his com- 
panion and he said eagerly, “If they are, they are a 


252 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


good way behind us! Can’t we do something to get 
away from them? There must be some rope some- 
where aboard. Let us — ” 

‘‘111 let you handle the tiller. You do that and 
111 rig up something which will serve to piece out 
the sheet rope. Maybe I can use a part of it.” 

Gordon was working rapidly now and it was mani- 
fest that his excitement was not less than that of his 
younger companion. 

Swiftly he cut the ropes from the sail, tying them 
hastily together as he did so. At last he had fash- 
ioned a rope that was perhaps eight feet in length, 
but it was so knotted that it would be impossible for 
it to be used in the block or tackle. A piece of the 
original sheet-rope several feet in length was secured, 
though Gordon shook his head doubtfully as he tested 
its strength with his hands and broke it after a slight 
effort. “We may be able to work it,” he exclaimed, 
“if we are close-hauled. That’s our only hope. If 
this breeze keeps up we can’t take in any reefs, and 
if the rope breaks, they will get us as sure as you’re 
born. They are bearing down at us at a great rate ! ’ ’ 
he added as he glanced once more at the little sail 
in the distance. 

Amos did not reply, though the expression on his 
face was eloquent of his fears. The little eatboat 
now was bounding over the waves, splashing the water 
until both boys soon were drenched although neither 
apparently was mindful of his condition. The issue 


THE DISTANT SAIL 


253 


of the race was too grave for them to think of other 
matters. 

Gordon was handling the sheet-rope while his com- 
panion held the tiller. It was comparatively easy to 
keep their boat headed toward the harbor. The great 
fear in the mind of each was that the rope itself, 
upon which so much now depended, would play them 
false. 

All conversation ceased while alternately they 
glanced at the far-away even line of white where the 
waves broke on the beach at the mouth of the harbor 
and at the little sail which steadily was gaining upon 
them. 

‘‘I don’t see why they want to chase us,” suggested 
Amos at last with something like a sob in his voice. 
‘‘We’re not doing any harm and we’re not worth 
much if they get us.” 

“Keep up your courage, lad!” said Gordon, striv- 
ing to speak cheerfully although as he spoke, he, too, 
looked fearfully behind him at the approaching yawl, 
in which the men now could be easily distinguished. 
“If I could only handle this sail, I would run away 
from them all right!” he declared; “but I haven’t a 
decent sheet! I am afraid it will break. There it 
goes now!” he shouted abruptly as the worn rope 
suddenly parted again, and, with the sail flapping 
almost as loudly as the report of a gun, the catboat 
was left helpless before the wind which threatened 
soon to become a gale. 


CHAPTER XXI 


A MEETING ON THE LAKE 


^ ^ AKE in yonr sail ! Look out for the boom ! 



1 Be lively or we shall be swamped!’’ shouted 
Gordon as the little catboat took in water until it 
seemed as if she must capsize. 

Amos instantly leaped to the bow and did his ut- 
most to lower the sail. As part of this was already 
under water and the waves were pounding heavily, it 
was with the utmost difficulty that at last he suc- 
ceeded in freeing his ropes and letting the water- 
soaked sail fall into the lake. Even then the peril of 
capsizing was not removed hut Gordon now rushed 
to his aid and with their combined efforts the two 
young sailors at last succeeded in pulling in the boom 
and then hauled the heavy sail on board. 

“Take the tiller,” ordered Gordon, “while I hail!” 
Seizing a wooden bowl, which by chance happened 
to be on board, he at once began to throw the water 
from the little catboat. When he began the water 
came almost to his knees, hut his efforts were unre- 
mitting and in a little while the peril which had been 
threatening was gone. 

“Look behind us!” suddenly exclaimed Amos. “I 


254 


A MEETING ON THE LAKE 


255 


believe they are after us!’^ he shouted in his excite- 
ment. Far away the small boat, which Gordon had 
suggested might be a big yawl rigged with a sail, was 
headed directly for the spot where the boys were 
struggling. 

Gordon did not speak for a time, but he seized the 
glasses and looked long and earnestly at the little ves- 
sel in the distance. 

^‘How many men are aboard asked Amos anx- 
iously. 

^‘Four, and perhaps five,’’ replied Gordon without 
taking the glasses from his eyes. ‘‘I can’t just make 
out. I guess there are six. Here, you take the 
glasses and see what you think of it.” 

Amos did as he was bidden and for a time he too 
was silent. At last turning once more to his com- 
panion he said, ‘‘They certainly are making time, 
and are headed straight for us ! Do you really think 
that we’re the ones they are after?” 

“I’ll tell you about that later,” replied Gordon, 
as he reached again for the glasses. A second inspec- 
tion, however, apparently did not provide any fresh 
hope. 

Nearer and nearer sped the little boat ; now bounding 
over the waves and then again sinking almost from 
sight as some unusually high crest hid them from 
view. 

“Take the tiller,” ordered Gordon, “and I’ll see 
what can be done with the oars.” 


256 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


Shall I get the guns?’’ inquired Amos in a low 
voice, as he glanced at the two heavy rifles which the 
boys had brought with them. 

“No,” exclaimed Gordon quickly, “not yet, any- 
way. If we have to at the last we’ll see what we 
can do with them, but they are so wet, I am afraid we 
can’t use either one of them. I’m going to take one of 
the oars and if you’ll keep the tiller hard up, I think 
we can get so near the shore that these fellows won’t 
try to overhaul us. ’ ’ 

For a time neither spoke, though the anxiety of 
each increased with every passing minute. Occasion- 
ally holding the tiller between his knees Amos took 
the glasses and looked back at the little boat in the 
distance. There could be no question now, he thought, 
that it was headed directly toward them. The figures 
of the men were more plainly to be seen and the 
steady course which was held increased his convic- 
tion that he and Gordon were the objects of the pur- 
suit. 

* ‘ Let me take the other oar, ’ ’ Amos exclaimed. 

“No,” replied Gordon sharply. “We’ll make bet- 
ter time if you’ll handle the tiller and leave the oars 
to me.” 

Gordon, whose arms were long and muscular, was 
pulling steadily upon the clumsy oars with which the 
boat was equipped. 

When Amos glanced back at the wake, apparently 
the catboat was moving swiftly, though how much 


A MEETING ON THE LAKE 


257 


of the disturbance of the water was due to the splash- 
ing they were making and how much to the effect 
of the wind and the waves he could not determine. 

For a time the labor was steadily continued. Mo- 
notonously Gordon swung back and forth, as he 
pulled the heavy oars. The little boat was moving 
steadily, but not many minutes had elapsed before 
both boys were convinced that the other boat was 
bearing down so rapidly upon them that escape was 
improbable. 

“Look yonder!’^ said Amos as he pointed toward; 
the distant fleet. “They are all going about! They 
are changing their course ! ’ ^ he added. 

“Maybe this boat will run away after all,’’ sug- 
gested Gordon in a low voice. “It’ll have to come 
about, too, and keep up with the others. If they do 
that will give us a chance to go ashore.” 

But the pursuing boat held steadily to its course. 
Nearer and still nearer it approached until the forms 
of the five men on board were distinctly seen. They 
were clad in the uniforms of the British sailors and 
there was no question now that they belonged to the 
crew of one of the ships in the near-by fleet. 

At last the boat of the pursuers was not more than 
a hundred feet behind the catboat. Gordon was still 
pulling on his oars with unchanging determination. 

The wind which had been holding strong now in 
a measure died away but the change was too late to 
affect the boys from Perry’s fleet. Once more Amos 


258 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


took the glasses, as what he thought was a hail came 
from the other boat, and he looked back at his pur- 
suers. Suddenly he uttered an exclamation of sur- 
prise, as he said, ^‘That’s Tom at the tiller 

‘‘Tom whoT^ inquired Gordon. 

“I don’t know the rest of his name,” said Amos, 
“but he was one of the press-gang that took me to 
York.” 

“What is he doing on Lake Erie, if he belonged to 
the Lake Ontario fleet?” 

“I can’t tell you, but I believe that’s Tom, as sure 
as you’re born!” 

“Will he know you?” 

‘ ‘ I guess so, though he never saw me dressed in this 
uniform.” 

“Well, if he belonged to the press-gang, he won’t 
be likely to show much mercy to you or me either. 
The only thing is to keep him from recognizing 
you if we can. Can’t you do something to your- 
self?” 

“I’m afraid not,” replied Amos, as he looked about 
for some means of disguising himself, but nothing 
was found, until he discovered a broken wooden bowl 
partly filled with the grease which was used to rub 
down the masts. The sight of some loose oakum in- 
stantly suggested a plan, however, and the lad soon 
daubed his face with the greasy mixture until it is 
doubtful if his own mother would have recognized 
him had she seen him in the boat. 


Jl meeting on the lake 


259 


At this moment there came a faint sound of a hail 
from the pursuers. Don’t answer them,” said Gor- 
don to his companion hastily in a low voice. 

The hail was repeated and as the boys looked hack 
they saw one of the British sailors standing on the 
bow of the little boat. In his hand was a large horse- 
pistol, and apparently he was prepared to enforce his 
demands in a way that could not be mistaken. 

“I am going to stop rowing,” said Gordon a mo- 
ment later, ‘‘and we’ll have to take what is coming 
to us. Shove those guns of ours under the sail. We 
won ’t give them up unless we have to. No, ’ ’ he added 
abruptly, “I am not going to stop rowing. If they 
want us they’ll have to come and take us where we 
are.” 

Twice the hail from the pursuing boat was re- 
peated and then to the consternation of both boys 
a small brass one-pounder, whose sides flashed in the 
sunlight, suddenly spoke. Even here fortune seemed 
to have failed the boys for the ball struck the mast, 
breaking it as if it had been of clay. When Gordon 
turned from the sight of the splintered mast and 
looked at his companion he saw that Amos’s face was 
deathly pale. 

The boat shivered under the shock as if it had been 
struck by some mighty invisible thing. 

“Don’t be scared,” said Gordon encouragingly. 
“They might have saved that shot, for we couldn’t 
get away from them, anyway. They have got us now 


260 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


and we’ll have to make the best of it. But keep a 
stiff upper lip, lad, and don’t show them, even if 
you are so afraid that you can’t keep inside your 
shoes. ’ ’ 

A shout from the pursuers followed and it was not 
long before, with a sweep, their boat came alongside 
and Tom sprang on hoard. 

As the sailor regained his footing, he found himself 
face to face with Amos, and the lad instantly was 
aware that he was recognized. ‘‘I think ’e is Amos 
Proper,” said Tom in surprise. ‘‘I’ll make fast this 
rope and then I’ll talk with ’e.” 

In a brief time the sailor made his rope fast about 
the base of the shattered mast and as his companion 
quickly lowered their sail, the two boats soon were 
lashed together. 

Apparently Tom was not in command of the little 
force, for another man dressed in the uniform of an 
ensign at once came on board and ignoring the sailor 
gave his attention to the boys. 

“Do you belong at Presque Isle?” he inquired 
sharply. 

“You guessed it the first time,” answered Gordon 
in apparent indifference. 

“What were you doing out here on the lake?” 

“We came out to see the redcoats scoot as soon as 
they thought Captain Perry would send anybody 
after them,” answered Amos, as he glanced at the 
British fieet which now was far away. 


A MEETING ON THE LAKE 


261 


‘^Just answer my questions!’^ said the young Brit- 
ish officer. “How many boats has Perry 

“Enough to sink the whole of Barclay’s squadron,” 
retorted Amos unabashed. 

“I don’t need you to tell me,” retorted the sailor 
with a scowl. “You have two Yankee brigs you call 
the Lawrence and the Niagara.*^ 

‘ ‘ Then why did you ask me ? ” demanded Amos im- 
patiently. 

“You have a little schooner called the Ariel, and 
two other little sloops, the Porcupine and the Tig- 
ress.^* 

“You seem to be very well acquainted with our 
fleet,” said Gordon. “Perhaps you will be better ac- 
quainted still, before many days have passed.” 

Ignoring the replies the ensign demanded quickly, 
“How many of these are ready to put to sea?” 

“You had better run into the harbor and find out 
for yourself! I might make a mistake, if I should 
give you the figures now,” answered Gordon. 

“How many men are there now at Presque Isle?” 

“I haven’t counted them lately,” replied Gordon. 
“I don’t know but there are more than I can count. 
There are enough to sing, ^Remember the Raisin 
River.’ ” 

Amos was more alarmed by the boldness of his com- 
panion than he was by the threats of the men who 
had boarded their little boat. Indeed, upon Tom’s 
face appeared an expression of such good-nature that 


262 


’HE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


he could not believe that any of the crew had evil de- 
signs against them. 

^^Do you see that flag yonder?” demanded Gordon, 
suddenly pointing to a flag on the Wayne Blockhouse, 
which could be faintly seen in the distance, 
do, sir,” replied the Briton. 

^^Well, there’s a flag that Captain Daeres called, 
when he saw it at the masthead of the Constitution, 
piece of Yankee bunting!’ He found out that it 
was a little more than that, and so will you! Your 
press-gangs are all of them going to learn pretty 
soon that they can’t steal men where the Yankee 
‘bunting’ is floating from any masthead of any boat 
of any fleet.” 

“Hi beg your pardon, sir,” interposed Tom, who 
had taken no part in the conversation, “but hif we’re 
going to join the fleet before night-fall, Hi’m thinkin’ 
we had better be starting. ’ ’ 

“Not until I have had a look at this craft,” said 
the ensign, and at once began his investigations. 
Every open or suggestive spot on board was searched, 
but nothing of any importance was found, the two 
wet guns being regarded as useless. Then turning 
to Amos the young officer demanded sharply, “How 
many boats has Perry besides those which are on the 
stocks ? ’ ’ 

“I don’t know,” answered Amos. “I have just 
come—” 

“How many men ar« there?” 


A MEETING ON THE LAKE 


263 


^‘I can’t tell you that either,” answered the lad 
quietly. 

^‘Have you heard any one say anything about his 
putting to sea?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“What have you heard?” 

“I have heard some of the men say that they would 
have to sail up the Detroit Kiver and search along the 
shores to find where the British fieet were hiding.” 

Tom laughed loudly at the boy’s words, but his 
companion scowled as he said, “You are a bold one, 
young man ; but you ’ll need all your spirits before you 
see Presque Isle again.” 

Once more Amos’s face blanched at the implied 
threat and he glanced at his comrade, who apparently 
was unmoved and was boldly staring at their ques- 
tioner. 

“Tom, I think you’re right,” said the ensign, turn- 
ing to his comrades after a momentary silence. “We 
must start back for the fleet. I am sorry we can’t 
go ashore, but I fancy there will be some way to make 
these two Yankee lubbers disgorge more of what they 
know of Captain Perry than they have told us. A 
taste of the cat or a few days in the brig are mighty 
big helps to conversation.” 

“Don’t ’e bother with the lad,” suggested Tom in 
apparent indifference. “Leave ’im to get ashore if 
’e can. Take this one,” he suggested, pointing to 
Gordon as he spoke, “and let the hinfant go free.” 


264 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


'‘That’s all right,” answered the ensign promptly. 
“That’s a good suggestion and that’s what I’ll do.” 

The two boys stared blankly at each other as they 
heard the decision and for a moment Amos was about 
to protest, but as his friend shook his head warningly 
he remained silent, fearful of the evils beyond those 
which were threatening. 

In spite of his disappointment he was plainly re- 
lieved when he saw that Gordon was not likely to 
offer any resistance, at least at the time, and in re- 
sponse to the ensign’s order speedily took his place 
in the other boat. Almost before Amos was aware of 
what had taken place, the eatboat was set free, the 
sail of the other boat was hoisted and his recent visit- 
ors were speeding over the waves of Lake Erie on 
their way to join the distant fleet. He soon saw 
that his own boat was drifting toward the shore and 
that unless he took the tiller in hand he would be 
landed a mile or more below the bay which he was 
seeking. 

Fascinated by the sight of the disappearing boat, 
however, it was several minutes before he was fully 
aware of his own risk. 

Then quickly taking advantage of the wind, and 
fearful that the promise which Tom had secured for 
him might be withdrawn he took the oar which Gordon 
recently had been using and desperately began to 
pull. 

Amos speedily discovered, however, that his prog- 


A MEETING ON THE LAKE 


265 


ress was in a direction which he could not altogether 
control and soon he abandoned the oar and grasped 
the tiller, once more trusting to the wind to help him. 
He knew that more time would be required in this 
manner before he could gain the shore, but he would 
be better able to select his landing-place and the lad 
was aware that this was a matter of even more im- 
portance than speed. 

It was difficult for him to turn away his gaze from 
the departing boat in which his companion now was 
a prisoner. Why he had been left and Gordon taken, 
was not altogether clear in his mind; but the fact 
was manifest and as the distance between the little 
boats increased Amos’s spirits rose and he gave him- 
self more completely to the task of heading the craft 
toward the bay where Perry’s men and fleet were to 
be found. 

Again the wind arose and drove the hapless cat- 
boat before it. It was more difficult now for Amos 
to keep the little craft headed for the opening in the 
bay. The waves were rising as the wind increased 
and what threatened to be a gale was almost upon 
him. The shore now was not more than a mile dis- 
tant, he thought, as he glanced at the wooded banks 
before him. 

Drenched with the spray, alarmed by the fact that 
the boat was filling and yet unable to protect him- 
self from the force of the wind, the lad was com- 
pelled to exert himself to the utmost of his strength 


260 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


in order to keep anything like a straight course. 
Even that plan soon was abandoned and his sole hope 
now was of being able to land anywhere on the Amer- 
ican side of the lake. 


CHAPTER XXII 


A YOUNGER PERRY 

D riven helpless before the wind Amos still clung 
to the tiller and waited. Glancing occasionally 
behind him he saw the British fleet now far away, 
hut the difficulties of his own position kept his 
thoughts mostly upon his own peril. The waves 
which frequently dashed completely over the cathoat 
had drenched him, but the difficulties of maintaining 
his hold upon the tiller kept him so busy that he was 
not suffering from cold. 

Steadily before the wind the lad was driven and at 
last he was rejoiced when he discovered that his ef- 
forts to get the little craft into the harbor were likely 
to meet with success. Glancing for a moment over 
the side he saw the shallow bottom beneath him. He 
was aware now that he was near the bar at the en- 
trance of the harbor, perhaps already was caught on 
it. He glanced toward the shore at either side and 
was convinced that he was correct in his surmise. 
As the harbor here was unusually shallow, and, driven 
by the force of the gale the waves were rougher than 
they had been in the open lake, he was compelled to 
267 


268 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


exert himself to the utmost of his strength in order to 
keep his boat head on. 

And yet swift as his flight was and compelled as 
he was to give his undivided attention to keeping the 
water-logged little craft from capsizing or from be- 
ing caught in the trough of the heavy seas, neverthe- 
less Amos was conscious of several questions which 
even then flashed into his mind. How would Captain 
Perry ever be able to take his fleet, after its comple- 
tion, across the shallow waters of the mouth of the 
bay? Why did not the British take the Americans 
before the latter were able to use the harbor? If 
the British gunboats should blockade the entrance, 
why could they not send men to Are at the brigs 
which were yet on the stocks? Many such questions 
were in the lad’s mind, despite his own peril, as his 
little boat, occasionally scraping the sand, swept across 
the bar, and at last was safe beyond the reach of the 
boisterous waves. He gave one final look behind him 
and saw just above the horizon the sails of the dis- 
appearing fleet. 

The seizure of Gordon Hopkins was depressing. 
Apparently the most of his warmest friends, Amos 
thought, were destined to fall into the hands of the 
enemy, or worse. Where was Hiram ? What had be- 
come of Simeon? Had he escaped from the press- 
gang only to become a victim of the vengeful followers 
of Tecumseh? What had become of “Sir Walter”? 
Amos recalled some of the bantering and not ill-na- 


A YOUNGER PERRY 


269 


tured boasting of his friend whose true name he did 
not know. And now Gordon Hopkins, too, had gone. 
Amos thought again of the genial face of the old 
sailor, Tom, and was hopeful that Gordon might re- 
ceive some of the care of the big-hearted man, which 
had been given him when he was a prisoner. 

The questions were all unanswered, however, and 
as Amoses progress was slow and there were still five 
miles to be covered' before he would be among his 
comrades once more, the lad endeavored to bail out 
his boat preparatory to rigging some kind of a sail, 
which would help him on his way. 

After repeated efforts, the little craft was made 
somewhat less unwieldy by the young sailor’s suc- 
cess in bailing out his boat. He was aware that it 
had been strained and was leaking, but now that his 
gravest peril was passed, with new courage he began 
to try to rig a sail. 

A measure of success attended his efforts and in a 
little while without any boom or sheet rope, Amos 
had succeeded in hoisting a small part of the main- 
sail and the catboat at once responded to the increased 
impetus. 

Ignorant of the shallows or perilous places in the 
bay, for a time the determined boy tried to follow 
the channel, but when a half hour had elapsed he 
discovered that his efforts were unavailing and that 
frequently he was sailing over stretches where the 
keel of his boat was only a few inches above the sandy 


270 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


bottom. He was much nearer the shore and also 
nearer the left bank now than he had been, and be- 
fore him he saw a low projecting point of land 
covered with trees and directly in his course. As he 
drew nearer he succeeded in guiding the little boat 
so that he was not more than fifty feet from the 
shore. Indeed it was in his mind to abandon the 
water-logged and leaking craft and make his way 
across the land back to the place where the fleet was 
waiting. 

Suddenly Amos saw before him on the extreme 
point, a boy who was apparently two or three years 
younger than he. The sight was so unexpected that 
Amos did not respond to the hail which he received. 

When the summons was repeated, however, he 
shouted, ‘‘Go down the beach. ITl come ashore, just 
as soon as I can make it. This tub is leaking and she 
doesn’t answer her tiller very well, so you’ll have to 
meet me where I can make a landing.” 

The boy on the shore instantly turned and did as 
he had been bidden. Sometimes Amos saw him as he 
came out against the trees and then again the lad 
would disappear from sight. 

After repeated efforts the young skipper at last 
succeeded in sending his boat ashore, and as he seized 
the painter and leaped out he quickly was assisted 
by the waiting boy. As soon as the catboat had been 
hauled as far up as Amos thought it was necessary to 
avoid her being drawn out to sea, still holding the 


A YOUNGER PERRY 


271 


painter in his hand, he turned and looked curiously 
at the boy before him. 

“My name is Alexander Perry,’’ said the lad with 
a laugh. 

“Where do you belong?” inquired Amos. 

“Oh, over here at Presque Isle,” said the boy, 
smiling again. “I have seen you there and that was 
the reason why I hailed you.” 

“What are you doing at Presque Isle?” asked 
Amos in surprise. “You aren’t enrolled there, are 
you?” 

“Yes, sir, I am,” replied the boy promptly. 

“I shouldn’t think they would take a fellow as 
young as you are.” 

Amos spoke not unkindly, hut there was in his tone, 
perhaps unconsciously, a note of superiority, due to 
the difference between their ages. 

Alexander was quick to perceive the implied con- 
descension and he said a little warmly, “I am almost 
as large as you are and I guess I am about as strong. 
If you want to try me, we’ll have a side-hold right 
here on the beach.” 

“I’ll take your word for it,” said Amos good-na- 
turedly. “I have had my hands full coming back 
from the Lake. I guess Captain Perry is going to 
have need of all of us strong fellows, whether we are 
boys or men.” 

“It’s a shame,” said Alexander, “the way my 
brother — 


272 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


^‘Your brother?’’ broke in Amos. ‘^Who is your 
brother?” He was looking with renewed interest at 
the lad before him for now he recalled several ru- 
mors which had been heard at Presque Isle. As he 
glanced at the face of the young stranger he now 
saw what he had not noticed before, and consequently 
was not unprepared for the answer which he received. 

‘‘My brother’s name is Oliver Hazard Perry,” said 
Alexander. 

“Are you his brother?” asked Amos slowly. 

“Yes, sir-ee!” 

“Did you come up here with him?” 

“I did. He said he wanted me to start in younger 
than he did, so all the way from Rhode Island, I have 
been with him.” 

“What are you doing out here now?” inquired 
Amos. 

“Oh, some of us were stationed along the shore to 
keep watch. If the British showed any signs of com- 
ing too near the harbor, I was to fire my pistol, and 
another man who is half a mile farther up the shore 
was to fire his as soon as he heard mine. ’ ’ 

“I see,” said Amos slowly. “He has a watch sta- 
tioned all along the water on both sides, probably. ’ ’ 

“That’s right.” 

“I have just come from the lake,” exclaimed Amos. 
“I went out with another man in a catboat to watch 
the fleet. ’ ’ 


A YOUNGER PERRY 


273 


“You look as if you had been in a fight with them/’ 
said Alexander, as he glanced at the shattered mast. 

“I have,” replied Amos, as an expression of doubt 
appeared on Alexander’s face; but Amos’s story soon 
convinced the lad that he was speaking truly. The in- 
terest of Alexander was keen now, and when Amos 
also told him about the seizure of Gordon Hopkins 
the younger boy’s anger was still more aroused. 

“Why don’t they go and fight like men?” he de- 
manded. “Even if we haven’t over three hundred 
to man all our fleet, we’ll meet them more than half 
way! I guess we can do a little of what Captain 
Lawrence did on the Point, — 

“Oh, Johnny Bull, my joe, John, your Peacocks keep at home. 

And ne’er let British seamen on a Frolic hither come, 

For we’ve Hornets and we’ve Wasps, John, who, as you 
doubtless know, 

Carry stingers in their tails, Oh, Johnny Bull, my joe.” 

“What’s that you’re singing?” inquired Amos, in- 
terested as much in the information as he was in the 
song. 

“Haven’t you ever heard ‘Brother Jonathan’s 
Epistle to Johnny Bull’?” 

“No.” 

“Where have you been all the time?” 

“I haven’t been here very long,” exclaimed Amos, 
now feeling somewhat uncomfortable himself at his 
lack of experience in the presence of a boy younger 


274 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


than himself, but who manifestly was familiar with 
more of the details of the war than he. 

‘^Why, you don’t mean to say that you never heard 
of what Captain Lawrence did to the Hornet 

'‘No, I never heard,” answered Amos, his face 
flushing slightly. 

“Whew! I have known that many weeks,” said 
Alexander, a trifle importantly. “You have heard of 
the Hornet, haven’t you?” 

“Yes,” replied Amos somewhat dubiously. 

“Why, the Hornet was one of the twenty-one boats 
that v/e had when we declared war on Great Britain. 
I can tell you the name of every one if you want it. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ What were they ? ’ ’ 

“The Constitution, rated 44, mounting 58 guns. 
Captain Hull; United States, rated 44, mounting 58, 
Captain Decatur; President, rated 44, mounting 58, 
Commodore Kodgers; Chesapeake, rated 36, mounting 
44, ordinary; New York, rated 36, mounting 44, or- 
dinary; Constellation, rated 36, mounting 44, ordi- 
nary; Congress, rated 36, mounting 44, Captain 
Smith; Boston, rated 32, ordinary; Essex, rated 32, 
Captain Porter; Adams, rated 32, ordinary; John 
Adams, rated 26, Captain Ludlow; Wasp, rated 16, 
mounting 18, Captain Jones; Hornet, rated 16, mount- 
ing 18, Captain Lawrence.” 

“Is that the Hornet you are talking about?” asked 
Amos. 

“Of course,” replied Alexander sagely. “The 


A YOUNGER PERRY 


275 


other vessels were the Siren, Argus, Oneida, Vixen, 
Notherless, Enterprise, and Viper. We had four 
bomb vessels named the Vengeance, Spitfire, Etna and 
Vesuvius. Of course we had a few gunboats scattered 
along the coast from Boston to New Orleans, but 
eighty-six of these were ordinary and only sixty- 
two were in commission. The gunboats you know 
were numbered, and didn’t have names.” 

Amos looked at his companion now with increased 
respect. The lad knew so much more than he con- 
cerning the conditions in the American navy at the 
outbreak of the war that he was entitled to respect. 
"‘Tell me about the fight of the Hornet. What was 
it she fought? Did she win? What became of her? 
Where is she now?” 

‘^Why, she put up as good a fight as the Wasp did 
when she took the Frolic the 18th of last Octo- 
ber.” 

‘‘I have heard about that,” said Amos. ^‘But tell 
me about the Hornet.’^ 

“Why it was this way,” said Alexander. “After 
the Constitution took the Java on the 29th of last 
December — ^you know that was off the coast of Brazil 
— Commodore Bainbridge started for home leaving 
Captain James Lawrence in command of the Hornet 
to blockade the Bon Citoyenne in the harbor of San 
Salvador. You see he had heard that she was loaded 
up with gold or some other valuable stuff, and Cap- 
tain Lawrence wanted her. ’ ’ 


276 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


‘‘I don’t wonder,” suggested Amos. ^^Did he get 
her?” 

‘‘No,” replied Alexander disgustedly. “On the 
24th of January a British ship of war, the Montagu, 
came up from Rio de Janerio and raised the blockade. 
You see she carried seventy-four guns, and the Hornet 
only eighteen, so, though she was driven back into 
the harbor and the redcoats thought they had her, 
as the very next night was dark as Egypt, the first 
thing they knew the Hornet slipped out and went 
cruising up the coast. She kept this up for a month 
and took I don’t know how many prizes. At last, 
about half past three o ’clock in the afternoon of Feb- 
ruary 24th, while she was chasing an English brig off 
the mouth of the Demerara River, Captain Lawrence 
suddenly found a man-of-war just outside the bar 
with her ensign all set. 

“Captain Lawrence made up his mind to fight the 
Britisher and he put out to sea. Between the Hornet 
and the boat she was after was the Carobana Bank. 
While he was going around it, he saw another sail 
bearing down upon him, and when she came near 
enough he saw that she was a man-of-war brig with 
the British colors flying at her masthead. Captain 
Lawrence called his men to quarters and cleared his 
ship for action, and got ready for his enemy, who was 
trying to do the same thing and before they knew it 
they became within half a pistol-shot of each other 
and both tried to fire broadsides at about the same 


A YOUNGER PERRY 


277 


time. After they had passed, each of them tried to 
wear short round to get a raking fire. With a perfect 
blaze the Hornet came down upon the Peacock, that 
was the name of the British brig, and in fifteen min- 
utes the brig not only struck her colors, but raised 
signals of distress. When Lieutenant Shubrick was 
sent to take possession of her, he found that the boat 
was sinking with six feet of water in her hold, that 
her commander was killed, and the most of her crew 
had fallen. The Hornet men now had to do their 
best to bring off the wounded and save the vessel. 
They threw the guns of the Peacock overboard, 
plugged up the holes made by the shot, but though 
they worked like Trojans, the boat finally sank and 
thirteen of the Peacock’s crew and several of the 
Hornet’s, suddenly went down.’’ 

“Were they all drowned?” asked Amos. 

“No, they picked up a few of them. The crew of 
the Hornet had to divide their clothes with the Pea- 
cock’s men.” 

“That was mighty good of them,” suggested 
Amos. 

“That’s what the Britishers thought, too,” said 
Alexander, “for when they finally got into New York 
they wrote a public letter of thanks to Captain Law- 
rence. And they had good reason for it,” he added, 
“because if the captain had sailed away after the Pea- 
cock struck her colors, he would have saved more of 
his own crew, for he lost more men trying to save 


278 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


the others than he had in the fight.” And Alexander 
began to sing, — 

“For ’twas the proud Peacock to the bottom did go; 

He lost more in saving than conquering the foe.** 

hope your brother,” said Amos, ^^will be able to 
do something like that on Lake Erie.” 

‘‘He will,” said Alexander confidently, “if the Gov- 
ernment will only give him something to fight with. 
But how are you going back?” he suddenly asked. 
“Will that boat take us across the bay?” 

“I’m afraid not,” said Amos. 

“Come on, then,” said Alexander cheerfully. 
“ We 11 make our way across the country. ’ ’ And once 
more he began to sing, — 

“Oh, Johnny Bull, my joe, John, your Peacocks keep at home. 
And ne’er let British seamen on a Frolic hither come, 

For we’ve Hornets and we’ve Wasps, John, who, as you 
doubtless know. 

Carry stingers in their tails, Oh, Johnny Bull, my joe.” 


CHAPTER XXIII 


AN ENCOUNTER IN THE WOODS 

first thing we’ll have to do,” suggested 
1 Amos quickly, “will be to take this catboat of 
mine and hide it somewhere.” 

“All right,” responded Alexander promptly. 
“That won’t take long. You get aboard and toss me 
the painter and I’ll tow you along the shore. Here’s 
the very place we want,” he said a few minutes later 
when the boys discovered a small cove on whose shores 
were thick bushes that would conceal any object 
within unless one were especially searching for it. 

Amos secured his gun which was on board, though 
now it was so wet as to be useless, and grasping a 
few other objects in his hand, leaped ashore and then 
helped his companion haul the yawl far up on the 
sandy beach in the hiding place which had been found. 

“We’ll be all right now,” said Alexander, as the 
boys turned away. 

“Are you sure you know the way?” asked Amos 
somewhat anxiously. 

The lad laughed as he replied, found my way 
out here and if I can do that I can find my way back, 
can’t I? You see,” he added, “I am a true Yankee, 
279 


280 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


I never answer one question except by asking an- 
other. ^ ’ 

Amos said no more and the boys at once started on 
their journey through the woods. 

Amos had no fear of losing his way if they kept 
close to the shore of the bay, but Alexander selected 
a route that was sometimes within sight of the blue 
waters and again would lead into the depths of the 
forest. However, Amos made no protest and fol- 
lowed his young guide until a quarter of an hour or 
more had elapsed since their start. 

Suddenly Alexander, who was in advance, stopped 
abruptly and placing the fingers of one hand on his 
lips motioned to Amos to stop. 

‘‘What is it?’’ asked Amos in a whisper as he cau- 
tiously advanced to the side of his companion. 

“Listen!” said the younger boy in a whisper. 

“What did you hear?” 

Both boys were silent for a brief time and then 
Amos understood the reason for his companion’s un- 
expected caution. 

Not far away he heard the voices of men engaged 
in a low conversation. It was impossible to see them 
or to determine how many there were, but the very 
fact that they were hidden among the trees and that 
their conversation was carried on in low tones im- 
plied that something was wrong and Amos was soon 
as excited as Alexander. 

“You wait here,” whispered Alexander, and be- 


AN ENCOUNTER IN THE WOODS 


281 


fore Amos was aware of what his companion was 
about to do, the lad had crept stealthily into the 
near-by bushes and disappeared from sight. Uncer- 
tain as to what he ought to do, Amos soon decided that 
he would remain where he was and await the return 
of his companion. 

The minutes slowly passed and the low tones of 
the men were unbroken. Occasionally the voice of 
one rose a little higher than the others’ and betrayed 
something of what Amos believed to be an excitement 
under which they were laboring. He was unable, 
however, to distinguish what they were saying and 
impatiently awaited the coming of Alexander. 

How much time had elapsed he was unable to decide 
when at last he saw the lad returning as cautiously 
as he previously had departed. In a brief time Alex- 
ander was by his side once more and as soon as Amos 
glanced at his face he knew that the boy had heard 
something that was startling. 

‘‘Who are they?” 

“British Jackies,” replied Alexander. “They 
came here last night, and slipped across the bar in the 
dark. ’ ’ 

“What were they doing?” 

“Making soundings in the harbor.” 

Startled by Alexander’s words Amos looked about 
him in alarm and for a brief time both boys were 
silent. 

The sound of the voices still could be heard and 


282 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


it was manifest that whoever the men might he they 
were not planning to depart at once. 

‘‘What did you make of it?’’ inquired Amos at last. 

“I make of it,” said Alexander, “that these men 
came in here to get these soundings, as I said, and 
have hidden here in the woods during the daytime 
and when night comes they ’re either going to slip out 
of the bay and go back to the fleet or wherever they 
came from, or else they are going to keep up the work 
they have begun. ’ ’ 

“How many are there?” 

“Three.” 

“Are you sure they are Jackies?” 

“Yes. They are all wearing the uniform anyway, 
and I guess they wouldn’t be doing that if they were 
Yankees.” 

“Let’s get a little further away from here,” sug- 
gested Amos, as he pulled his companion by the arm. 

Both boys at once hastily withdrew from the spot, 
though each carefully noted the landmarks by which 
it could again be found, if desired. When they had 
withdrawn far enough to make certain their voices 
could not be heard, Amos said, “They have got a 
boat landed somewhere here and we must find it.” 

“That’s right,” acknowledged Alexander quickly. 
“Strange I hadn’t thought of that, but where do you 
suppose it is?” 

“They have either drawn it up on the shore some- 
where, or have hidden it as we did ours. Did you 


AN ENCOUNTER IN THE WOODS 


283 


hear any of them say they were not going to try to 
go away before night? 

“That’s what they said.” 

“We might wait here and follow them when they 
start.” 

“And be in time to say good-by when they go on 
board their craft?” 

“It’s just about noon now,” suggested Amos as he 
looked at the sky. “If they really are not going to 
leave before night we might go back to Presque Isle 
and get help and take all three of them prisoners.” 

“That’s what we’ll do,” responded Alexander 
promptly. “Will you go or shall I?” 

“You know the way better than I do,” said Amos. 
“I have never been out here in the woods at all, 
though I guess I wouldn’t get lost, but you v»^ill make 
better time than I can and besides I think your 
brother will be more likely to listen to what you have 
to say and send men out here, than he would if I 
should carry him the word.” 

“I’ll do it,” said Alexander, promptly looking to 
the priming of his gun as he spoke. 

The lad, sturdy and well-grown for one of his years, 
would be no light foe if a man chanced to meet him in 
the forest. There was a determined expression in his 
face, and his eyes were shining in his excitement. 
“Hold on a minute,” called Amos; “we must decide 
where well meet when you come back.” 

“We’ll meet right here by this point,” replied 


284 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


Alexander as he pointed to a little promontory that 
extended a short distance into the waters of the bay. 

Before Amos could say more, his companion de- 
parted, moving swiftly into the depths of the forest 
and disappearing from sight before Amos was even 
aware that he had been left alone. 

For a brief time the lad sat on the bluff where his 
companion had left him and thought carefully over 
the best plan for him to follow. In a short time he 
concluded that the boat in which the men had come 
could not be far away. Neither had they left it where 
it might be seen by any of the Americans passing on 
the shore or bay. Perhaps they had it concealed as 
he and Alexander had hidden the catboat among the 
bushes. 

Cautiously and slowly the lad began to make his 
way amongst the trees, moving along the shore in the 
direction of the lake. His first impression was that 
the boat in which the men had come had been left 
nearer the outlet in order that they might save time 
and distance in case of danger, but when he had gone 
what he thought at least was a half mile and had 
found no indications of the boat for which he was 
searching, he retraced his way and as he came near 
the place where he had left the men, his precautions 
redoubled. He darted from tree to tree and before 
he advanced again glanced in every direction to make 
sure that he was not seen. He continued his search 
for a half-mile in the opposite direction, however, but 


AN ENCOUNTER IN THE WOODS 


285 


it still proved unavailable and he was almost on the 
point of deciding that the British sailors must have 
left their boat on the shore of the lake after their 
investigations in the bay and had returned to the 
woods so that they might more carefully watch events 
at Presque Isle. 

Convinced that his conclusion was correct Amos 
was about to return once more to the lake so that he 
might search at least a part of the adjacent shore, 
when suddenly he saw before him a pile of brush 
near the water. There was nothing suspicious in the 
branches, which might have been driven by some 
storm across the bay, but as he glanced at the sandy 
beach he discovered there several footprints of men. 
The sight instantly caused him to stop and in con- 
siderable excitement he cautiously began to tear the 
bushes apart. 

He had removed only a few of the dry branches 
when he saw that a boat had been concealed beneath 
the pile. Hastily restoring the branches which he 
had removed, he glanced quickly about him to make 
certain that he was not observed and then ran swiftly 
back into the forest. 

He was keenly elated over his success, and greatly 
excited by the discovery of the hidden boat. He had 
investigated far enough to discover that the sail had 
been carefully wrapped and was also placed beneath 
the brush-heap. The little which he saw of the boat 
also convinced him that his discovery was of no small 


286 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


value. Again he looked about him and concluded 
that the British sailors had not stationed any watch 
near the place where their boat had been concealed. 
He was doubly cautious now and eager for the return 
of Alexander and the men whom he doubtless could 
secure from his brother. 

“What did you think of 

Startled by the unexpected question Amos looked 
up and saw standing before him the man who had 
assumed his own name when the lad had been brought 
with the British as a prisoner to Sackett^s Harbor. 
It was true the man’s gun was held in such a position 
that it was ready for instant use, but the half-mock- 
ing smile on his face was almost as confusing to the 
startled lad as was the unexpected hail. 

“Think of what?” Amos managed to stammer. 

“Ha! Ha! Never mind waiting for me to ex- 
plain. I have been watching you for half an hour 
and suspected that you were looking for something.” 

“Well, I found it!” retorted Amos. His rifle was 
useless because it had been water-soaked in the cat- 
boat. It would be folly for him to attempt to strug- 
gle with this man, and he realized that his own posi- 
tion was exceedingly perilous. If only Alexander 
and the men from Presque Isle would come ! Almost 
unconsciously he glanced into the woods but no one 
could be seen. 

“Looking for anybody in particular?” laughed the 
man^ 


AN ENCOUNTER IN THE WOODS 


287 


There isn’t anybody around here except three 
British Jackies and you,” broke in Amos bitterly. 
‘ ‘ It usually takes about four British sailors to capture 
one Yankee boy.” 

‘^Come,” exclaimed the man in a tantalizing man- 
ner. “Then you have joined Perry’s band, have you ? 
It looks to me as if he was trying to rob the cradles. 
Oh, I know he hasn’t very many — not over three hun- 
dred men, all told. I know he has his two brigs about 
ready to slide off the stocks. I understand he has 
sent on to Commodore Chauncey for reenforcements, 
but I don’t believe any of them will surprise him the 
way Commodore Barclay will when he stops to pay a 
visit at Presque Isle.” 

“How did you know all that?” demanded Amos, 
looking at the man as he spoke, and unable to conceal 
his surprise. 

“Oh, the Yankees aren’t doing much that we don’t 
know,” retorted the man. “I don’t think you’re 
very much of a find, I ’ll be honest with you, but such 
as you are I think I had better take you along with 
me.” 

The sailor’s attitude and bearing were so indifferent 
and he was apparently so good-natured that at first 
Amos did not take in the full meaning of his words, 
but when the order was repeated and he was told to 
follow his captor the lad realized that his troubles 
were not slight. 

Apparently there was no escape, and yet in Amos’s 


288 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


heart there was a hope that Alexander and some of 
the men from Presque Isle might come to the place 
before he would be taken away by the British sailors 
who had been making their investigations in the har- 
bor. 

In sheer desperation and hardly aware of what 
he was doing, Amos suddenly leaped at the man be- 
side him and with one strong pull wrenched his gun 
from his hand. Before he could bring the weapon 
to his shoulder, his enemy instantly made an effort to 
regain the rifle ; but Amos with one strong effort flung 
the gun far out into the bay. 

The ‘^good-nature’^ of the man instantly disap- 
peared. Savagely he turned upon the boy striving 
to catch him by the neck, but Amos Proper was no 
weakling though he was only a lad in years. Under 
his smooth skin his muscles were almost as hard as 
wood and were plainly to be seen as he moved. 
Thrusting out one foot, after the manner in which 
he and his companions had been accustomed to trip 
one another in the games during the few days when 
they were privileged to attend school, his pursuer 
now fell headlong and before he could rise again 
Amos had begun to run swiftly from the place. 

He had not gone far, however, before misfortune 
again overtook him. His right foot caught under the 
projecting and exposed root of a tree and he in turn 
fell headlong upon the earth. Before he could rise, 
his pursuer was upon him, and though the lad strug- 


AN ENCOUNTER IN THE WOODS 289 

gled desperately, his efforts were without avail. His 
hands were securely bound by a leather strap, and 
then with a brutal kick his captor ordered him to 


rise. 


CHAPTER XXIV 


THE CAMELS^’ 

P AINFULLY Amos struggled to his feet and after 
a brief hesitation moved forward as his captor 
commanded. To defend himself was absolutely im- 
possible and indeed his arms were drawn so tightly 
behind him that he was suffering. 

The mocking manner of the second Amos now re- 
turned and he said jeeringly: “I am afraid your 
brother won^t be able to get you out of trouble this 
time.'' 

Amos did not reply. He was aware that the direc- 
tion in which he was moving was toward the place 
where the three men had been discovered in their hid- 
ing place. 

The suspicions which he and Alexander had had 
that the men were making investigations and secur- 
ing information about the conditions at Presque Isle 
and also trying to locate the channel of the harbor, 
were now confirmed. How it was that the man who 
escaped from Sackett^s Harbor by claiming the name 
under which Amos had been set free should now be 
with Barclay’s fleet on Lake Erie, was a mystery, but 
290 


THE ‘‘camels’’ 


291 


the young prisoner’s thoughts were drawn to his 
own peril, and other matters were soon ignored. 

They had advanced only a short distance when 
Amos was startled by what he thought was the sound 
of voices of men in the near-by forest. When the un- 
expected sound was repeated he was confirmed in his 
opinion. Instantly it flashed into his mind that Alex- 
ander and the men whom he had secured at Presque 
Isle were now approaching. Amos’s heart was heat- 
ing rapidly in his excitement, and he glanced at his 
captor to see whether or not he also had heard the 
sounds which had aroused him. There was, however, 
nothing in the manner of the man to betray any feeling 
of alarm, and satisfied that “Amos” was unaware of 
the presence of his enemies, the true Amos tried to 
bear off a little, as he advanced, toward the direction 
from which the sounds had come. 

His plight was desperate. Unless help came from 
Alexander and his followers, without doubt he would 
be carried away by the band and sent across the 
lake where Gordon Hopkins was to be taken. Amos, 
as he recalled how he had been left behind by the 
men in the British yawl, felt once more something of 
the chagrin that was mingled with his rejoicing over 
his escape, but the present pulling of his arms and 
hands was convincing of the fact that now he was 
no longer looked upon as an “hinfant” not worthy of 
consideration. 

To escape from his captor seemed to be out of the 


292 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


question. If once he should he taken into the pres- 
ence of the three men, either they would try to make 
him give them the information they desired or else 
they would take him with them when they departed. 

The lad was tempted to shout and thus inform his 
friends where he was. His uncertainty, however, as 
to whether the men whose coming he thought he had 
heard really were from Captain Perry’s force, or not, 
was so great that he dared not even make the at- 
tempt. The sounds which he had heard were not re- 
peated and almost convinced that he had been mis- 
taken, Amos Proper silently proceeded on his way, 
and in a brief time was pushed by his captor into the 
very midst of the little band, whose presence he and 
Alexander had discovered. 

The three sailors, with an exclamation of anger or 
surprise, leaped to their feet and as they did so every 
man drew his pistol from his belt. 

^‘Be easy, lads. It’s nothing but an ‘hinfant,’ ” ex- 
claimed Amos’s captor. “He won’t give us any 
trouble. But there are some other things he will give 
us!” he added. 

“Where did you find him, Dick?” asked one of the 
men. 

In spite of his fear Amos was aware that the name 
of the man who had made him prisoner was not Amos, 
but Dick. In a moment, however, he was listening 
to the questions which were rapidly being asked of 
him. He quietly told the men who he was and also 


293 


THE CAMELS 

acknowledged that he was one of the force that was 
working on the fleet at Presque Isle and that he ex- 
pected to put to sea with his companions as soon as 
Captain Perry decided that the proper time had come. 

‘ ‘ He will never find that time, ’ ’ laughed one of the 
men not ill-naturedly. 

‘^Barclay has him bottled up, and that’s where he 
will stay, I’m thinking. If he tries to get away he 
will run straight into the arms of the Commodore. 
He learned how to do that trick when he was with 
Nelson at Trafalgar.” 

When further questions were asked of Amos at 
first he refused to reply and then quickly changing 
his mind gave such exaggerated answers that the men 
at first stared at him, then laughed and at last became 
angry. 

‘‘We’ll have to teach the Yankee cub how to talk 
properly!” suggested one of the band. 

“That’s his name anyway,” exclaimed Dick. 
“His name is Amos Proper. I have met the lad be- 
fore. His father and all his brothers are in the 
Yankee Army or Navy. We caught this fellow young 
enough to check off any ambition he may have in the 
same line, though he is regularly enrolled here, he 
informs me, and expects some day to be a sailor-man. ’ ’ 

“We’ll have to show him how to live up to his 
name,” said one of the men as he drew back his fist, 
and struck the defenceless boy a blow that felled him 
to the ground. 


294 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


Before he could follow up his savage attack there 
was a call that seemed to come almost from the ground 
beneath them; — “Surrender, every one of you!’’ 

The startled men looked up at the unexpected hail 
and instantly were aware that the place was sur- 
rounded by a force that numbered not less than twenty 
men. And the band was on every side! Escape was 
impossible although it was manifest that all four men 
were not inclined to give up easily. The number 
against them, however, was too great, and at a word 
from Dick, they threw down their arms in response to 
the demand that was made and stood looking stolidly 
into the faces of the men who now crowded about 
them. 

It was Alexander Perry who ran quickly to aid 
Amos and cut the thongs that bound his hands. As 
soon as he was freed, Amos also became as interested 
a spectator in what was taking place as was his young 
companion. 

There was no delay, however, for at the command 
of the leader of the men whom Alexander had suc- 
ceeded in bringing from Presque Isle, the four British 
sailors were disarmed and compelled to march in the 
midst of the band, as it returned to the little settle- 
ment. 

The march was uneventful and the four prisoners 
were safely delivered into the hands of the officers, 
who at once declared that they should be sent on to 
Niagara with the first force that returned to the army 



“ Surrender, every one of you ! ” — Page 294 





I 


I 


I 






% 


I 







» 


I 






I 


t 


4 



> 






% 


« 

«# 




9 » 

A< 


« « 






I 




1 


f 


*« 


I 




t 



i 


I 


.i 








>• 



« 


rt 



1 






\ 





I 


I 


k 



1 






\ 


» 


V 









* W 


t 




» 


♦ 


I 


f 


« 


t 


« 


r 




I 



• • 


4 


• « 

•• 



4 


k 'i 



295 


THE ‘^camels’’ 

there. From Alexander, Amos learned that this was 
to occur the following day, and he was the more sur- 
prised, therefore, when word was sent him that night 
that one of the prisoners was desirous of speaking to 
him. 

When Amos came into the room in which the J ackies 
were confined, he was not surprised when Dick, whom 
he had formerly known as ‘‘Amos’’ was found to be 
the man who wished to see him. 

“I wanted to ask you,” said the sailor, “if you 
know where your brother is?” 

“No,” replied Amos instantly aroused by the im- 
plied question. “I haven’t seen him for days. Do 
you know where he is?” 

“I think I do,” replied th® prisoner. 

“Where is he?” 

“I saw him three days ago — ” 

“Where is he?” broke in Amos unable to repress 
his excitement. 

“Where, where?” demanded Amos as the man still 
hesitated. 

“I think I’ll not tell you just where I saw him. 
It might not do your heart any good to find that out. 
I don’t know but that I was mistaken about it after 
all, but that was the reason why I asked permission 
to talk to you. It was your brother I saw, I am sure, 
now.” 

“Where?” again demanded Amos pleadingly. 

“It was in a place where you’ll join him very soon.” 


296 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


Where, where?” repeated Amos. 

‘‘You just wait until the Detroit is finished and 
you won’t have to ask me or any one else. When 
Commodore Barclay has the new brig, — it’s almost 
ready now — he will be so much stronger than your 
Yankee tubs that he won’t have to try any longer to 
keep you shut in here behind the bar at Presque Isle. ’ ’ 

“Won’t you tell me where he is?” pleaded Amos. 

“I have told you almost all I know.” 

“You haven’t told me where you saw him.” 

“Yes I did, I told you I saw him where I expect 
soon to see you and all the rest of these lubbers that 
Perry has with him. ’ ’ 

“What is tlie name of the place?” 

“You’re a Yankee and I’ll leave you to guess that,” 
laughed the sailor. 

Hopeless of receiving any information at the time, 
Amos angrily turned from the place, and as the fol- 
lowing day the four men were sent to Niagara the 
boy’s ignorance as to the whereabouts of Hiram was 
almost as complete as before. Somehow he was con- 
vinced that Dick really had seen him and if that was 
true the natural conclusion was that Hiram must be 
a prisoner somewhere on the opposite shore of Lake 
Erie. There was a slight comfort in the thought that 
Hiram had not fallen a victim to the red men who 
had been on their trail when first he had tried to 
make his way through the forests with Simeon and 
Sir Walter to join the force of Captain Perry at 


297 


THE ‘‘camels'’ 

Presque Isle. But the condition of the prisoners in the 
War of 1812 was not one to be envied on either side 
of the lake and Amos’s heart was only in a measure 
relieved by the vague information he received. 

The following day there was intense excitement in 
the little settlement when the report spread rapidly 
among the men that the British were planning to make 
a combined attack upon the place with their land and 
naval forces. Almost a panic followed the rumor and 
many of the people who were not bound to remain 
fled from the place. The disappearance of the fleet 
which Amos and others had discovered the preceding 
day, strengthened the belief of the anxious leader, but 
Captain Perry was not one to give way to his alarm. 
Unbeknown to his companions he had been suspicious 
of such an attempt being made and already he had 
sent word to Major-General David Mead to reinforce 
his men with the militia. 

The day which followed was made memorable be- 
cause soon after sunrise there was a salute of thirty- 
two guns from the Lawrence and it was soon known 
that General Mead was approaching. 

The alarm changed to a measure of elation when 
it was reported that fifteen hundred soldiers were 
assembled at a rendezvous near Presque Isle. In ad- 
dition, a regiment of Pennsylvania militia also were 
encamped near Fort Wayne and three long twelve- 
pounders were planted on the near-by bluffs. 

The waters of Lake Erie remained unusually calm 


298 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


for several days, but over its smooth surface not one 
of the British fleet came. The reported attack by land 
and sea evidently had been abandoned. 

It was Sunday morning, the flrst day of August, 
1813, when Captain Perry, now almost ready to begin 
his cruise, moved his entire flotilla down to the en- 
trance of the harbor. His plan was to try to cross 
the bar early the morning following. He was in des- 
pair of having his force increased and the messages 
he had received from Commodore Chauncey, from the 
Secretary of the Navy, and from the men in com- 
mand of the troops at Niagara and also in Ohio were 
of such a character that he decided no longer to hesi- 
tate. Alexander Perry was on board the Lawrence 
with his brother, but Amos Proper had been assigned 
to the little Scorpion of which Sailing-Master Cham- 
plin was in command. 

It was confidently believed that while the American 
flotilla was attempting to cross the shallow waters that 
did not even conceal the long stretches of sand be- 
neath it. Commodore Barclay’s fleet would appear and 
attack Perry’s flotilla while it was on the bar. Act- 
ing upon orders the commanders of the Ariel and 
Scorpion were sent out upon the lake and with or- 
ders to engage and detain the British Squadron, if it 
should appear. 

What an opportunity Commodore Barclay lost that 
day ! The famous sailor, who had shared with Nelson 
some of the honors of the great naval fight of Trafal- 


THE ‘'camels^’ 299 

gar, perhaps relied too much upon the reputation he 
had achieved, while his young enemy w^as aware that 
his name must yet be made. If the British Commo- 
dore had attacked Perry while his vessels were being 
floated over the bar, there can be no question that 
the result of the fight of Lake Erie would have been 
far different from what it was. 

Captain Perry for four days scarcely slept or ate. 
He was expecting the enemy to appear any moment. 
And it was soon manifest that neither of his brigs 
could be floated over the bar without help. The 
smaller vessels of the squadron naturally had less dif- 
ficulty and slipped across into the deeper waters of the 
lake without any material aid. 

It was then that Captain Perry made use of a ma- 
chine called a ^ ‘ camel, ’ ’ invented by the Dutch for the 
very purpose of carrying vessels over such shallow 
places as the entrance to the harbor at Presque Isle. 
This ‘‘cameP’ was a huge box or scow so arranged that 
water could be let into it or pumped out, as one de- 
sired. One of these camels was placed on each side 
of the Lawrence. The water was then let into the 
camels, which were so set that by the help of ropes 
under the keel and windlass the brig was held up, 
resting upon the camels. The water in the camels was 
then pumped out and as they floated, the brig, raised 
in the manner described, was slowly carried over the 
shallow places. 

The process was long and tedious and the anxiety of 


300 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


Captain Perry, as has been said, was increased by bis 
fears as well as his expectation that his enemy would 
appear at any time while the Americans were in this 
helpless position. 

It was some time afterward before it was learned 
that the British Commodore, who had planned to do 
the very thing that young Captain Perry expected 
him to do, had accepted an invitation for himself and 
his officers to a public dinner that the citizens of Fort 
Dover, a little Canadian village not far from Long 
Point, one of the rallying places of the British, had 
prepared for him. 

Indeed the over-confident British Commodore is said 
to have spoken as follows in response to a toast at 
the dinner, ‘^I expect to find the Yankee brigs holding 
fast on the bar at Erie, when I return, in which pre- 
dicament it will he but a small job to destroy them. 

If Barclay had acted as well as he planned, the 
story of Captain Oliver Hazard Perry would doubtless 
have been different from that which it soon became. 

It is true the British fleet appeared off the bar a 
little later, hut the American vessels then were all 
safely afloat on Lake Erie and the consequence was 
that Barclay decided to withdraw and not to chance 
an engagement until his new brig, the Detroit, should 
he complete and ready to assist in destroying Captain 
Perry’s fleet of ten vessels. 


CHAPTER XXy 


A STRUGGLE ON THE WATER 

T he days that followed were stirring and event- 
ful for Amos Proper. When Perry’s fleet had 
crossed the bar and the British flotilla appeared, the 
latter, as has been recorded in the preceding chapter, 
at once sailed away realizing that the golden oppor- 
tunity of attacking the American vessels while they 
were being lightered over the shallow waters at the 
entrance to the bay was gone. Captain Barclay pre- 
ferred not to chance an engagement at the time, as 
the Americans well understood, and departed to await 
the completion of his new brig, — the Detroit, 

Aroused by the appearance of the enemy. Captain 
Perry, with all his energy, at once began to prepare 
his vessels for a cruise. He was not without hope of 
being able to overtake the fleeing ships of Barclay or 
of finding them in some harbor where he might at- 
tack them. 

So vigorous was the response of Perry’s devoted fol- 
lowers that when night fell that same day his fleet was 
ready to put to sea. A few recruits had been received 
within the past few days, but his entire force was still 
301 


302 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


less than four hundred men, — entirely inadequate to 
man properly his dotilla of ten vessels. 

When the American squadron weighed anchor and 
began its first cruise on Lake Erie, it started toward 
the Canadian shore, the commander ’s plan being to ap- 
proach Long Point where for some time the British 
had been assembling. Meanwhile the American mili- 
tia, composed as it was of men who had enlisted for 
a brief time only and were eager to return to their 
homes in order to look after the August harvest fields, 
were now discharged by General Mead, and the peo- 
ple of Erie returned to their customary labors. 

To Amos, the sailing of the fleet was a matter of 
intense interest. The days were fair and the wind 
held steady. The shallow waters of Lake Erie were 
easily lashed into fury even by a light wind that would 
not have caused as great results on Lake Ontario, but 
fortunately in the early days of the cruise there was 
nothing to mar the progress of the vessels, or to make 
the men anxious concerning their own safety. 

Several days elapsed during which Captain Perry 
cruised back and forth between the American and 
the Canadian shores, searching for his enemy, but 
finding no trace of him. At last concluding that 
Captain Barclay had gone to Malden and was deter- 
mined to await the completion of the Detroit, so that 
his force would be superior to that of the Americans, 
Captain Perry abandoned hope of immediately for- 
cing his enemy into an engagement. 


A STRUGGLE ON THE WATER 


303 


Meanwhile the hearts of the American sailors were 
made glad by some further additions to their own 
number. When they sailed back to Erie they found 
there Captain Elliot, who had brought with him from 
Niagara about one hundred officers and men of experi- 
ence. The commander at once manned the Niagara 
and assigned the command of her to Captain Elliot. 
Strengthened in this way Perry soon decided to start 
up the lake and report to General Harrison that he 
was ready to cooperate with him. 

Amos’s excitement on the morning of the 12th of 
August, when the squadron once more left Erie was 
keen. In double column and with one line in regular 
battle order, the little fleet departed and finally found 
a rendezvous in a desirable harbor named Put-in-Bay. 
In this bay there were numerous little islands and it 
was the commander’s thought that here not only would 
he find an excellent shelter, but a desirable hiding 
place, if one should be required. A better spot 
in which to enter into an engagement with his 
enemy was not to be found along the shores of the 
lake. 

However, when the fleet arrived, no trace of the 
enemy was to be seen. The following day, when the 
afternoon sun sank low in the western sky. Captain 
Perry gave orders for the squadron to weigh anchor 
and to sail for Sandusky Bay. Most of the fleet had 
found shelter within the quiet waters of this bay, 
when to Amos’s delight orders were received by Sail- 


304 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


ing-Master Champlin, who as we know was the com- 
mander of the Scorpion, to remain outside and act 
as a scout. 

That the precaution was wisely made, soon became 
manifest when far away a small sailing vessel was 
seen. 

The Scorpion at once started toward the stranger, 
who did not appear to be at all alarmed by the ap- 
pearance of the little American vessel. Convinced, 
after a time, that his suspicions were not well 
grounded, and yet not entirely willing to withdraw 
until he knew more concerning the sail which had been 
sighted. Captain Champlin ordered a small yawl to 
be manned and for the men to row to the little 
schooner in the distance and ascertain who and what 
she was. Meanwhile, as if to allay any fears that 
might have been aroused, he withdrew the Scorpion 
from the vicinity telling the men in the yawl that he 
would return in case of danger, and be ready to re- 
ceive them on board when they had paid their visit 
to the stranger. 

The recent addition of the men to the American 
fleet had aroused the hope and courage of every man. 
Amos Proper was sharing in the eagerness that ap- 
peared in every crew. His delight was great when he 
was ordered to be one of the four men to take his 
place in the yawl. For a time his anxiety for Hiram 
and the mystery of the missing Simeon and Sir Walter 
were forgotten or ignored. The new experience was 


A STRUGGLE ON THE WATER 


305 


thoroughly novel and like all healthy boys, he was 
interested in what is unusual. 

With his companions he pulled steadily until the 
Scorpion seemed to be almost as far distant as the 
schooner which nad been sighted. 

The exploring party, however, soon discovered that 
a boat had been put off the schooner and was coming 
to meet them. The discovery instantly aroused the 
interest of all four men and at the word of one of the 
crew they increased the speed at which they were 
moving. 

They had not advanced far before they were aware 
that the approaching yawl was manned by six men. 
The two little boats now were rapidly approaching 
each other and as the distance between them became 
less, the interest of all arose accordingly. Nearer and 
nearer approached the yawls until at last they were 
within hailing distance. 

‘ Look at the bow of that yawl ! ^ ’ in a low voice said 
one of Amos ^s companions. 

Amos turned quickly about in his seat and glanced 
at the bow which now was not more than fifty yards 
distant. He was startled when he saw a little brass 
cannon shining in the sunlight and plainly mounted 
for use. It was manifest at once that the approaching 
party, whatever it might be, was better prepared to 
assert their rights than were the men in the Amer- 
ican yawl, who were armed only with pistols. It 
was too late, however, to turn back, and striving to 


306 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


maintain an air of boldness, which all were far from 
feeling, the yawl was driven forward until at last it 
was so near the approaching party that the two crews 
could easily converse with each other. 

‘^Who are you?” demanded the leader in Amos’s 
boat as he rose and looked toward the men in the other 
yawl. ‘ ^ What boat is that ? ’ ’ 

‘‘It doesn’t make any difference what boat it is,” re- 
plied one of the men in the other yawl, as he arose 
and answered the hail. “We have come out here to 
make all of you Yankees our prisoners, and that’s what 
you are!” 

Astonished at the unexpected demand, Amos’s face 
became colorless, and he was quickly aware that his 
companions were almost as greatly startled as was he. 

Not a word was spoken, however, and in a brief time 
the leader of the other boat repeated his demand. 

“We’ll sink your tub if you don’t give up without 
a fight ! We can send every one of you to Davy Jones, 
and the only thing for you to do is to let us take you 
in tow peaceably.” 

“You can’t scare us with any of your popguns,” 
retorted the American leader ; and instantly he turned 
and directed his companions to start back to the Scor- 
pion, which now could barely be seen in the distance 

The action of the American sailors instantly caused 
their enemies, for it was now manifest that the men 
belonged to some British man-of-war, to start in pur- 
suit. The little cannon, however, was not fired and 


A STRUGGLE ON THE WATER 


307 


though one or two pistols were discharged, no one was 
hurt. 

‘‘We’ll save our pistols until later,” said the Amer- 
ican leader grimly to his comrades. “Just now 
we ’ll put every ounce of muscle we have got into these 
oars.” 

No race between two college crews was ever more 
exciting than that which now followed. The wind 
had died away and the only sound in either boat was 
that of the oars. 

Amos Proper was pulling as if life itself depended 
upon his efforts. He was aware that the perspiration 
was rolling down the faces of his companions, that 
their veins stood out on their foreheads in their en- 
deavors and it was not long before his hands were 
blistered and sore, but still the men rowed on and 
on. 

“They are gaining, Amos, they’re gaining!” 
groaned Amos’s companion as he looked anxiously 
at the pursuing boat. Amos made no response ex- 
cept to close his mouth more decidedly and to try to 
put fresh strength into his efforts. 

For a time the Americans apparently held their 
own. They had not gone far, however, before the 
pursuing yawl could be more distinctly seen. But 
the boat still sped forward. The surface of the lake 
was almost like glass, and with every passing mo- 
ment the air was becoming more hot and sultry. 

“Not yet, my hearties!” said one of Amos’s com- 


308 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


panions as a puff of smoke arose from the other yawl 
and the report of a pistol again was heard. Maybe 
we’ll heave to a little later, but not just yet.” 

The ball had gone wide of its mark, but Amos 
well knew that it was only a question of a short time 
before they must be overtaken. Still he rowed on, 
looking occasionally toward the far-away Scorpion 
and hoping that their predicament might be dis- 
covered and that some aid would appear. 

The little gunboat, however, was still too far out 
in the lake to be aware of what was occurring. If 
a good breeze should rise, as the yawl in which Amos 
was rowing was also provided with a sail, they might 
be helped. But not a puff of wind came across the 
motionless water. Everything seemed to be against 
the men, and foot by foot the pursuing yawl crept 
nearer and nearer. 

Again a puff of smoke arose and this time the 
pistol ball struck the water so near them that the 
young Americans were aware that not only were 
they within range, but that soon some of them might 
be hit. 

‘^The game’s up, boys,” said Amos’s comrade. 
‘‘No wind, no help, no anything! We’re just run 
down like a woodchuck chased by a dog. I don’t 
want your blood on my hands. We’ll stop,” the 
man added, and his companions, panting and breath- 
less, obeyed. 

A shout now could be heard from the men in the 


A STRUGGLE ON THE WATER 


309 


other yawl and in a brief time they drew alongside 
the little boat. 

“You’re my prisoners!” exclaimed the young en- 
sign as he stepped into the yawl of the Yankees. 

“That’s no news,” growled one of the men sulkily 
in reply, as the young sailor ordered three of his 
men to follow him into the captured yawl. 

Disheartened as Amos was by the capture he grimly 
thought that it was one of the fortunes of war and 
that he must bear it as his companions were doing. 
He watched the young ensign, happy in his first 
capture, and his anger increased. The prospect of 
being shut up in a British prison was not pleasing, 
but what could be done to prevent it? Apparently 
nothing. The captors were armed. The Yankees’ 
pistols had been given up when the ensign slipped 
on board their yawl and not more than a mile away 
was the British gunboat, while the little Scorpion was 
at least twice as far distant in the opposite direction. 

Amos said nothing, however, and took his seat be- 
side one of his fellow prisoners and watched the men 
who had come on board. 

“There’s no wind,” said the ensign, “but we’re in 
no special hurry, men. These fellows won’t run 
away and it will be cooler soon. The sun is setting 
now.” 

Amos glanced at the western sky and saw that 
the sun indeed had disappeared, but he also was 
aware that the schooner was slowly coming about and 


310 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


that in all possibilities he and his companions would 
be taken on board. The lad felt almost desperate 
enough to enter single-handed into a contest with 
his captors, but a glance at their pistols and the 
cutlasses with which they were armed showed him 
only too clearly the folly of any such attempt. Ap- 
parently nothing could be done, and Amos was al- 
most in despair. 

‘‘There’s a breath of air!” said the ensign rising 
for a moment. “If the wind starts up we’ll use the 
sail too.” 

Meanwhile the yawl in which their captors had 
come was now returning to the schooner. 

Apparently the young ensign had not been fear- 
ful that the Yankee prisoners would rebel, inasmuch 
as there were as many of the captors now on the 
yawl as there were prisoners, and the former were 
armed while the latter were not. 

Far out on the lake there was a puff of wind, 
which capped the waves with white. It could 
plainly be seen even in the dusk, but still Amos did 
not believe it was going to blow hard. 

He was aware that the young ensign was standing 
directly behind him now inspecting the sail. Sud- 
denly and without a moment’s warning Amos turned 
and with one strong push sent the lieutenant over- 
board. 

As the man fell with a splash into the lake Amos 
turned again and seized a belaying pin shouting, 


A STRUGGLE ON THE WATER 


311 


“Come on, boys!^’ and stretched the nearest sailor 
senseless on the bottom of the yawl. 

Quickly the little boat became a scene of intense 
confusion. Amoses startled companions required no 
encouragement and instantly entered into the strug- 
gle. The advantage of numbers was with them now, 
the ensign having succeeded only in grasping the 
rudder with his hand and as yet had not been able 
to scramble on board. A blow from a cutlass fell 
upon the shoulder of Amos’s nearest companion. 

Shouts and calls arose as the men struggled des- 
perately for the control of the little boat. Now up, 
now down, now almost into the water, and then held 
back against the boom, the men fought in their fierce 
contest. 

What the Americans had desired most of all was 
to prevent their enemies from drawing their pistols 
or wielding the cutlasses. With the help of one of 
his fellows Amos succeeded in binding the arms of the 
man that he had been struggling with, and was about 
to turn to the aid of the others who were holding the 
remaining sailor on the bottom of the boat. Sud- 
denly above the noise of the contest a call came from 
the other little yawl, which was speedily followed 
by a second shout. Wlien Amos looked up quickly, 
he was aware that the boat was returning, the three 
sailors apparently not being able to understand how 
their comrades had been worsted. 

Oh, for a breath of wind! The dusk had now 


312 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


deepened until neither the schooner nor the yawl 
could be distinctly seen. The wind had risen slightly, 
but was still far from being of much aid. However, 
as the captors had now been secured and as the dusk 
was deepening until it was only a matter of a few 
minutes before neither the gunboat nor the yawl 
could be seen, the young sailors turned quickly to 
hoist their sail. At any moment their enemies in the 
other yawl might be upon them, and not only would 
the struggle then be useless, but the condition of the 
prisoners would be far worse than before. The 
young ensign was still swimming about in the water, 
one sailor was helpless from the blow which he had 
received and the other two were fast bound. If 
there was only a good breeze the Americans were 
confident that they might get away, taking their 
prisoners with them. 

“They are following us,^^ said one of the men 
quickly. “I can hear their oars! We might make 
these fellows take a hand too,’’ he added as he in- 
dicated the prisoners whose hands had been tied. 

The suggestion was instantly acted upon. Sulkily 
the British sailors one by one obeyed the command 
which was given them to assist in the efforts to es- 
cape, and with the Americans rowing desperately the 
yawl was headed in the direction where it was sup- 
posed the Scorpion was waiting for them. 

The men labored for half an hour, exerting all 
their strength and without stopping for a rest, or 


A STRUGGLE ON THE WATER 


313 


even to look about them for their pursuers. At the 
suggestion of one of the number they then rested 
a moment on their oars, as a faint shout came across 
the waters. 


CHAPTER XXVI 


A MAN IN A BOAT 

^ ^ THAT’S that?” said the leader in a low voice 
Y V when the faint sound first was heard. The 
men were not rowing now and while they were lis- 
tening intently the sound was repeated. It was im- 
possible at first to tell from which direction it came, 
but a moment later Amos said quickly, “It’s off to the 
starboard!” 

‘^Then it’s from the Scorpion!*^ said one of the 
mem ^‘We’re not far from the schooner now.” 

‘‘We’ll give them an answer,” suggested another, 
and at his word all four men united in a shout that 
must have been heard far away. 

The call was answered and this time there was no 
difficulty in determining the direction from which 
it came. Without doubt the call was from their 
friends, they thought, and the Scorpion must be 
somewhere in the immediate vicinity. The wind had 
increased slightly by this time, and the sky was dark- 
ened by clouds, but as there was no light from the 
stars, it was impossible to see far in advance of 
them. 

With renewed vigor, the men once more gave way 
314 


A MAN IN A BOAT 


815 


and the little yawl was sent speedily in the direction 
where it was believed the Scorpion was waiting their 
return. 

‘^Look out for tricks, men!” suggested the leader. 
‘‘We don’t want those British Jackies to cut us off. 
Keep a sharp out-look!” 

In the dim light the outlines of the Scorpion 
loomed large and dark in their pathway. It re- 
quired but a few moments to bring the yawl along- 
side and for the men to clamber to the deck. 

They had hailed the watch so that there had been 
no fear of their being mistaken for an approaching 
enemy and as soon as they were among their com- 
panions Captain Champlin at once approached and 
said, ‘‘What did you find?” 

“It’s one of Barclay’s fleet,” replied the leader 
touching his cap. 

“What is she?” 

“Schooner, sir. We ran foul of a yawl full of 
British Jackies that was coming out to see who we 
were. Sam, here, had a bit of a mishap,” he added 
as he pointed to the man who was struck on the 
shoulder by the cutlass of one of the British sailors. 

Sharply ordering that the wounded man should 
be taken below. Captain Champlin then said excitedly, 
“Where is she now?” 

“Over yonder behind those islands,” replied the 
sailor. 

“Can we run her down in this light?” 


316 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


'‘We can try it, sir.” 

"Very good. Well start on her tracks right away. 
Meanwhile I want one of you men to go with a yawl 
and tell Captain Perry what you have found. Tell 
him too that we have started in pursuit of the 
schooner. ’ ’ 

Turning then to Amos the captain said, "111 send 
you with the men. I know you are pretty well worn 
out, but you can steer the boat and 111 send some 
other men to do the rowing.” 

Elated as Amos was by his selection for the duty, 
he soon found himself once more on board the yawl 
looking into the faces of four men, who were rowing, 
and was well started on his way before he fully 
realized what had occurred. 

He heard the creaking of the Scorpion* s rigging 
as her course was changed, but in a brief time she 
was no longer to be seen in the dim light. 

A half hour later Amos was on board the Law- 
rence telling his message to Captain Perry. To his 
surprise the energetic young leader instantly issued 
orders for his entire fleet to join in the pursuit of 
the schooner for which the Scorpion was searching. 

As soon as the vessels were under way, Amos, who 
was standing by the rail looking out over the dark 
waters, was startled when a hand was placed on his 
shoulder and he heard young Alexander Perry say 
to him, "Did you bring that message?” 

"Yes.” 


A MAN IN A BOAT 


317 


‘‘Well get that British schooner! Well show 
those British tars that they can’t try any such tricks 
as that on us. My brother says she was reconnoiter- 
ing, trying to find out just where our fleet was. 
Well show them that without any more trouble on 
their part.” 

“I’m afraid not to-night,’^ said Amos as he glanced 
at the sky. “It’s raining now.” 

It was not long before the lad’s words proved to 
be true, for a heavy storm broke upon the lake. It 
was impossible to see far in advance and as Cap- 
tain Perry was by no means sure of the winding chan- 
nels, the search for the British schooner was soon 
abandoned. 

The little Scorpion, meanwhile, had run fast 
aground, but without knowing that the schooner for 
which she had been searching had grounded also on 
another island not far away. 

The following morning after some labor the Scor- 
pion was once more afloat and the crew were all 
rejoiced when they had been informed that she had 
suffered no serious damage. 

The fleet on the following morning sailed for San- 
dusky Point. Great was the confusion on board 
when the cannon of the Lawrence boomed their noisy 
challenges, as it was supposed, to the enemy. In a 
brief time, however, it was learned that Captain 
Perry’s plan was not to announce the location of his 
fleet to the British commodore, but by the signal 


318 


THE BOY BAILORS OF 1812 


previously arranged, to inform General Harrison, who 
with his army of some 8,000 men was not far away, 
that the fleet was in the bay and ready to act in con- 
nection with the army. 

Aware that startling events were likely to follow 
soon, the excitement of Amos and the crew became 
keen when not long after the salute had been fired. 
Colonel Gains, accompanied by a few officials and 
several Indian chiefs, were received on hoard the 
Lawrence. The interest of the dark-skinned war- 
riors was manifest only in the keen glances they cast 
about the deck and at the sailors that were curiously 
regarding them. 

The interview, however, was brief as the colonel 
simply came in response to the summons to announce 
that General Harrison and his army were only twen- 
ty-seven miles away, where they were awaiting the 
coming of the fleet. 

Captain Perry immediately dispatched several 
boats to bring the general and his suite on board. 
Darkness had slipped over the waters when the gen- 
eral arrived and a heavy rain was falling. But the 
crews still were able to see the tall, wiry form of the 
leader of the troops. With him were several of his 
staff officers, together with a number of soldiers and 
twenty-six Indian braves. It was not until after- 
ward that Amos learned that the Indians had been 
brought because of the generaPs desire to recognize 
them as loyal friends, and also to impress upon their 


A MAN IN A BOAT 


319 


minds the strength of the American fleet. As the 
red men glanced quickly and with manifest interest 
about them, Amos and Alexander, who had remained 
together, were keen observers of their actions. 

The interview soon was ended and as the larger 
part of the officers were about to depart, Amos sud- 
denly uttered an exclamation and rushed forward to 
one of the young soldiers, whom he touched upon the 
shoulder. As the young man turned sharply about, 
Amos found himself standing face to face with his 
lost friend. Sir Walter. 

‘‘What are you doing here?” demanded the young 
soldier. 

“Where is Hiram?” was Amos’s response. 

“I don’t know.” 

“What became of him? Was he shot? Did the 
Indians get him?” 

“I cannot tell you. We left that place where you 
were with us not very long after you started. The 
Indians began to get noisy and before sunrise we 
agreed that our best plan was to start, each man for 
himself, and try to make his way through the woods 
to Presque Isle, or any other place where our men 
were.” 

“Did you do it?” 

“It looks as if I did,” replied Sir Walter with a 
laugh. “I had my troubles and lost my way, but 
I managed to get through somehow, and found myself 
at last out here with the army of General Harrison.” 


320 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


“Don’t you know what became of Hiram?” 

“No.” 

“Did Simeon get away?” 

“He started and that’s all I can tell you.” 

“Haven’t you heard anything about either of 
them ? ’ ’ 

“Not a word.” Sir Walter’s voice betrayed the 
sympathy he felt for Amos and all of the importance 
of manner he had assumed in his former conversa- 
tions with the lad was not to be seen. 

However, as he was compelled to depart with his 
companions from the Lawrence, and find some shel- 
tered place on the shore, there was no opportunity 
for further conversation at the time and the anxiety 
which had fallen on the heart of Amos Proper re- 
mained in full force. 

It was long that night before the troubled lad fell 
asleep in his hammock. The rumor which he had re- 
ceived that Hiram was somewhere a prisoner on the 
British side of the lake afforded a measure of com- 
fort in that it implied that his brother was still 
alive. 

The story of Sir Walter increased Amos’s per- 
plexity. How it was possible for Hiram to gain the 
opposite side of the lake was a problem for which he 
found no solution. The fact, too, that nothing had 
been heard of Simeon increased his fears for both. 
What chance had either of them of successfully mak- 


A MAN IN A BOAT 


321 


ing his way through the great forests where so many 
hostile Indians were to he found? 

The following morning the sun rose clear and 
bright. The crews of the fleet were busy and Amos 
Proper was compelled to take his share in the duties 
that kept the men busy through the hours. He had 
returned to his place on the Scorpion now, and the 
entire squadron was busy throughout the day in re- 
connoitering Put-in-Bay. It was understood that the 
plan of the leaders was to bring the army there and 
that the soldiers would be carried across the lake to 
Malden. 

When General Harrison returned to his camp he 
soon sent word that he was not quite ready for the 
proposed forward movement. Captain Perry, how- 
ever, was unable to remain quiet and at once sailed 
toward Malden hoping to find out more than he 
then knew concerning the British fleet which he sup- 
posed had sailed for that place. 

The enthusiasm in the American fleet was great 
when Barclay’s ships were discovered within the 
mouth of the Detroit River! It was soon manifest 
that the new brig had not yet joined the squadron 
and Captain Perry instantly decided to strike the' 
fleet a blow. 

His purpose was to attack the British at once, 
trusting to the fact that the Detroit had not yet come 
to their aid. 


322 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


His plan, however, was thwarted because of the 
heavy winds which began to blow and continued for 
several days. It was impossible for him to do what 
he wished under such conditions. 

The tireless young commander just at this time 
also became severely ill, as did also young Alexander 
and many of the crew. As a consequence the en- 
gagement was abandoned for a time and the fleet 
returned once more to Put-in-Bay. 

A few days afterward, the energetic captain gave 
orders for another cruise and the first day of Sep- 
tember the squadron again weighed anchor and sailed 
for Malden, but the British were not yet ready to 
respond to the challenge. Under the batteries of the 
shore they were lying secure and safe. Captain 
Barclay manifestly did not intend to take any undue 
chances, much as he pretended to despise the weak- 
ness of his enemies. He still was waiting for the 
coming of his new brig! 

The following morning, confident that there was 
no hope of a battle. Captain Perry sailed again for 
Sandusky Bay, where he had another interview with 
General Harrison and then with his entire squadron 
departed for Put-in-Bay where the fleet came to an- 
chor. 

There was disappointment among his men and 
some were inclined to complain at what they were 
pleased to call his lack of action, but the young Rhode 
Island sailor was biding his time and reserving his 


A MAN IN A BOAT 


323 


strength for the effort which he was soon to 
make. 

The days that followed were somewhat monotonous 
and though their captain was doing his utmost to 
keep his men busy, Amos Proper and others were be- 
ginning to feel that the complaints of the sailors 
were not without some just cause. 

Alexander Perry meanwhile had recovered from 
his illness and one morning was standing beside Amos 
on the deck of the Scorpion watching the^approach 
of a little sailboat, which was rapidly rounding the 
point of Put-in-Bay Island. 

‘‘I didnT see that boat go out, did youP^ in- 
quired Alexander. 

“No,’’ answered Amos. “What do you think it 
is?” 

“I don’t know. It seems strange that a boat like 
that should be coming head on, as she is, without 
having been held up by any of our scouts. I am 
sure she doesn’t belong to our fleet.” 

“I don’t see how you can be so sure of that.” 

“ ‘Sure of it?’ ” laughed Alexander. “There 
aren’t so many boats here that it is much of a job 
to count them up, and I know there isn’t any such 
craft as that which belongs in Put-in-Bay.” 

“She’s headed for us, anyway,” suggested Amos 
after he had looked long at the little boat, which was 
tipping before the wind as if she was in danger of 
capsizing. 


324 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


Both boys were silent for a time as they watched 
the maneuvers of the one man who was to be seen 
on board the approaching boat. 

It was plain too that other members of the crew 
were interested now in the stranger and several of 
the sailors joined Amos and Alexander by the rail. 
. ‘‘That fellow knows how to handle a boat/’ said 
Alexander as the skipper suddenly brought his boat 
up into the wind and quickly took in his sail. ‘ ‘ Don ’t 
you think so?” he added as he turned to look at 
Amos. 

But his companion was silent. Amos was staring 
at the man in the little boat as if he could not be- 
lieve what he saw. 

“What’s the matter with you?” demanded Alex- 
ander with a laugh as he saw that his friend was not 
listening. “What’s the matter with you?” he re- 
peated. “You look as if you had seen a ghost.” 

“I have,” said Amos quickly. “It’s either a 
ghost or else it’s my brother, Hiram.” 

“I didn’t know you had a brother,” said Alex- 
ander. “But if this is the man he’s no ghost let me 
tell you. He’s alive, every inch of him!” 

Regardless of the discipline of the Scorpion, Amos, 
no longer able to restrain his feelings, shouted, “Hi- 
ram! Hiram! Come aboard. Hi.” 

The young sailor glanced quickly up, stared a mo- 
ment at the one who had hailed him and then seiz- 
ing the long oar guided his little craft before the 


A MAN IN A BOAT 


325 


wind until she was alongside the Scorpion. Then 
hastily seizing the rope which was thrown him, he 
made it fast and calling upon the men on deck to 
^‘Hold on,’’ he clambered to the deck. 

In a moment Amos rushed upon his brother and 
despite the fact that affection was not often dis- 
played in those rugged days, he flung his arm about 
Hiram ’s neck. ‘ Ht ’s you ! ” he almost shouted. ^ ‘ It ’s 
Hiram! Where did you come from?’^ 

“I came from Malden,” replied Hiram as he with- 
drew his brother’s arm. “If you don’t stop chok- 
ing me, I shall almost wish that I had stayed there. ’ ’ 
The crew now were crowding about the brothers, 
staring at the stranger and aware that some matter 
of great importance had occurred though no one was 
able to explain exactly what it was. 

The group separated, however, when Captain 
Champlin quickly approached and at once spoke to 
the stranger. 


CHAPTER XXVII 


SAIL ho! 

I N response to the captain’s request Hiram briefly 
explained who he was and then simply stated the 
fact that he had just come from Malden, having 
escaped from the British fleet. 

“What can you tell me about conditions there?” 
demanded Captain Champlin as he looked keenly at 
the young sailor. 

“They are short of rations,” said Hiram. “Yes, 
and they’re short of a good many other things, too,” 
he added. 

“How do you know?” inquired the captain 
quickly. 

“I heard the men say so, and I know the prisoners 
weren’t fed very much, and it was common talk that 
Barclay was intending to make for the lake no mat- 
ter what happened because he could not stay any 
longer where he was, without supplies.” 

“Where did he intend to go?” 

“It was said he was trying to get into communica- 
tion with Long Point.” 

Captain Champlin nodded his head, for he was 
326 


SAIL ho! 


327 


aware, as were also his men, that this little place on 
the Detroit River was the chief deposit of supplies 
for the British forces. 

want you,’’ said the captain, ‘Ho come with 
me and we’ll report to Captain Perry what you have 
told me.” 

Accordingly, before the brothers had any oppor- 
tunity for further conversation, or Amos was able 
even to inquire how Hiram had escaped from the 
enemy, the young commander, accompanied by Hi- 
ram, at once departed for the Lawrence. 

Captain Perry, interested but not surprised by the 
information which was brought him, asked many 
questions of Hiram to which the young sailor re- 
plied as best he was able. He was not aware that 
the American commander had already been informed 
by young Lieutenant Brevoort of the difficulties un- 
der which the British commander was laboring. The 
reports of the desperate condition of the fleet, due 
to its lack of provisions and other supplies had been 
brought by the young lieutenant, and Captain Perry 
already was making his plans in accordance with the 
information he had received. 

At once on a high point of Gibraltar Island * he 
stationed a look-out and the watch was maintained 
day and night; indeed, there were many hours when 
the young commander himself took his glass and sat 
beside the look-out anxiously watching for the com- 

* Afterward called Perry’s Look-Out. 


328 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


ing of the British fleet from the direction in which 
Malden was located. 

Still the days came and went without any appear- 
ance of the British fleet. Captain Perry, not yet 
fully recovered from his illness, and his face 
still betraying the fact of his suffering, was busy 
most of the hours, every day and night. In spite 
of the impatience at the delay and the reaction 
among his men, as they were compelled to wait for 
the beginning of the fight which they were told was 
soon to occur, Captain Perry had not changed his 
plans in the slightest degree. 

However, convinced that his enemy was not able 
to remain much longer in his place of refuge, the 
American commander on the evening of the 9th of 
September, summoned all the officers of his squadron 
and after a long interview gave every one his in- 
structions in writing, just how he was to attack the 
enemy. 

The captain’s plan was to force a close action, if 
possible, and in his carefully formed designs, over 
which he had spent much time and labor, he told 
every man just who his antagonist on the British 
side was to be. His information concerning the size 
and strength of the passing fleet had been obtained 
from the same young Lieutenant Brevoort, who, as 
well as Hiram Proper, had reported concerning these 
matters. 

The Lawrence, which was to be the flagship, was 


SAIL ho! 


329 


assigned to attack the Detroit, the new brig which 
was now completed, and had joined Barclay’s fleet. 
The Niagara was to attack the Queen Charlotte. To 
every officer Captain Perry said, ‘‘Keep on the line, 
if it is possible, at half a cable length from the ves- 
sel of our squadron which is ahead of you, and en- 
gage your antagonist in close action.” 

The conference had lasted until ten o’clock in the 
evening. As it was about to disperse and the men 
were assembled on the deck of the Lawrence, they 
were aware that it was a glorious night. The sky 
seemed to be filled with myriads of stars and the 
moon was at its full, so that the waters of the little 
bay sparkled in the moonlight, almost as if it were 
midday. 

Just as they were about to leave the ship, sud- 
denly the young captain brought out a large square 
battle flag, and showed it to his commanders. This 
flag was between eight and nine feet long. The 
ground of it was blue, but it was not its size or color 
that called forth the cheers of the men. In the cen- 
tre of the flag in letters of white muslin, each of 
which was at least a foot in length, was the stirring 
command of the dying Lawrence, for whom the flag- 
ship on Lake Erie had been named, — DON’T GIVE 
UP THE SHIP. 

For a moment the men were silent, as the gentle 
breeze spread the great flag, but the reaction came 
instantly and cheer after cheer arose from the men, 


330 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


in which the crew of the flag-ship also joined. Re- 
sponding cheers came from the other vessels of the 
fleet, although apparently no one knew what the 
cause of the excitement was. 

The young leader, as strongly excited as his men, 
turned to his companions as they were about to de- 
part, and said, ‘‘When this flag shall be hoisted to the 
main-royal mast-head, it shall be your signal for go- 
ing into action.’’ Again the cheers came from the 
little assembly in response to the stirring words of 
their leader and then Captain Perry continued, 
“Gentlemen, remember your instructions! Nelson 
has expressed my idea in the words, ‘if you lay your 
enemy close alongside you cannot be out of your 
place. ’ Good-night. ’ ’ 

In addition to the watch which had been estab- 
lished on Gibraltar Island, the little Scorpion, and 
her companion, the Ariel, had been sent to cruise out- 
side the Sister Islands with instructions to keep an 
additional look-out for the approach of Barclay’s 
fleet. 

Not a vessel had yet been seen; but the men now, 
as well as their commander, were convinced that the 
moment for which they had been working and wait- 
ing through the long weeks of the spring and sum- 
mer was almost at hand, as indeed it was. 

The following morning, the famous September 
10th, 1813, had not yet become clear when the long 
expected cry of ‘ ‘ Sail ho ! ” was heard from the mast- 


SAIL ho! 


331 


head of the Lawrence. Instantly the excitement in 
the fleet became intense. 

When the signals to the fleet of ‘‘Enemy in sight,” 
“Get under weigh,” were given every man knew 
that the time of action was not far distant. The 
calls of the boatswains were heard throughout the 
squadron. “All hands up anchor! Ahoy!” On 
the deck of every vessel there was a scene of intense 
activity. So careful had been the preparations 
which had been made that not much labor was now 
required and in a brief time the fleet was ready to 
put to sea. 

The sun had just risen above the eastern horizon 
when far away on Lake Erie, as the men looked to 
the northwest, they saw the tiny sails of Captain 
Barclay’s squadron. 

Six vessels composed the British fleet. Although 
Perry’s ships outnumbered the enemy, the British 
had more and much heavier guns. Indeed, Captain 
Barclay is said to have had fifty-five long guns, while 
Perry had only fifteen. 

Captain Perry understood fully that in close action 
lay almost his only hope. The numbers engaged in 
battle were not entirely unequal although the enemy 
had a few more men than had the Americans. 

One of the unusual sights to be seen on the decks 
of the ships of Captain Barclay was that of Indians 
serving as sailors. Although nearly half of Bar- 
clay’s crew was composed of regular soldiers, they 


332 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


were not entirely without experience on the water. 
What the British commander lacked in the way of 
experienced sailors was more than atoned for by the 
fact that among his followers were at least one hun- 
dred and fifty men from the royal navy, who had 
had long experience under the ablest naval com- 
manders, at that time, in the world. 

When the British vessels were first sighted there 
was a light wind blowing from the southwest. After 
a little while this steady wind drove the clouds, that 
had formed over the great forests of Ohio, across the 
lake and a gentle rain began to fall. However, the 
rain soon ceased and when Perry’s squadron had 
passed out from the many islands in the bay not a 
cloud was to be seen in the sky, while the waters were 
clear and sparkling. It was a wonderful morning, 
but the clearness of the air and the sunshine were 
forgotten by Amos Proper and his companions when 
the sturdy little fleet set forth to meet its ene- 
mies. 

Again the cry of “Sail ho!” was heard. The 
young Rhode Island captain, still weak and pale 
from the illness from which he had been suffering, 
apparently forgot his ailments in the excitement of 
the hour. 

The wind now increased and he tried at once to 
gain the weather gage by beating around to the wind- 
ward of some of the islands. Now that the moment 
for which he had long been waiting had come, he was 


SAIL ho! 


333 


keen for the battle; but the wind was so light that 
his first orders were impossible to execute. 

‘‘Run to the leeward of the islands,” ordered the 
commander of his sailing-master. 

“Then you will have to engage the enemy to the 
leeward,” replied the officer, not attempting to dis- 
pute the command though he ventured mildly to pro- 
test against what seemed to him a mistake. 

“I don’t care,” quickly responded Captain Perry, 
“TO WINDWARD OR TO LEEWARD, THEY 
SHALL FIGHT TO-DAY!” 

The command to hoist the signal for the fleet to 
wear ship was at once given, but the little squadron 
had scarcely cleared from the island when the fickle 
wind suddenly shifted to the southeast, thus enabling 
the fleet not only to clear the islands easily, but also 
to keep the weather-gage. 

The British commander, aware of the advantage 
which his enemy had secured by this maneuver, in- 
stead of sailing onward to meet their approach, hove 
to in close order and awaited the coming of the 
American fighter. 

When the outlines of the British ships became more 
distinct it was an imposing appearance which they 
presented. The vessels had been freshly painted, 
and the flying colors and the manifest power of the 
little squadron produced a deep impression upon the 
American sailors. 

Indeed, Amos Proper found that he was trembling 


334 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


as he gazed long at the imposing sight. Nor were 
his fears without reason. Of the four hundred and 
ninety men in Perry’s fleet, it was known that one 
hundred and sixteen were sick, — almost every one 
of the ailing sailors being unable to make his way to 
the deck. Almost a quarter of the number, too, was 
composed of negroes, while another quarter was 
made up of volunteers, chiefly from Kentucky, who 
naturally were without experience as sailors on great 
bodies of water. 

The plan, which Captain Perry had outlined in his 
interview with his officers the preceding evening, was 
now carried out in forming the line. The Niagara 
was in the van, when the Lawrence, which was the 
flag-ship, as we know, was cleared for action. The 
great blue battle flag, with its marvelously inspiring 
motto, ‘‘Don’t Give up the Ship” was now displayed. 
The reason why Captain Perry had used such large 
letters in the wording now was manifest, for the last 
words of the dying Captain Lawrence could be seen 
by every man in the entire squadron. 

On board the Lawrence there was a stirring scene, 
when the young captain called his men and officers 
together and briefly urged them to be true to their 
country, to the fleet and to themselves. He then said, 
“My brave lads, this flag contains the last words of 
Captain Lawrence. Shall I hoist it?” 

“Aye, aye, sir,” his eager men all shouted; and in 
a moment it was run up to the main-royal mast-head 


SAIL HO I 


335 


of the ship named for the heroic captain who had 
lost his life in the naval battle with the Shannon. 

The excitement increased when the cheers from the 
deck of the Lawrence were answered by wild shouts, 
cries and cheers from the deck of every ship in the 
line. The men were ready for action. It was mani- 
fest that Captain Perry could depend upon the cour- 
age and determination of his followers. 

In spite of his eagerness to enter into an immedi- 
ate engagement, the shrewdness of the young com- 
mander prevented him. He was aware that the fight, 
in all probabilities, would continue for a long time 
and that before the battle was ended, the dinner- 
hour would have long been passed. Accordingly he 
ordered rations to be served at once to every crew. 
How much these previsions, as well as the provisions, 
had to do with the outcome, perhaps no one can say, 
but at all events it was a wise precaution on the part 
of the zealous young Rhode Islander. 

Directly afterward the crews were ordered to flood 
the decks, which were then sprinkled with sand. 
Amos Proper, inexperienced in the work, turned to 
the other sailors on the deck of the Scorpion, when 
they were engaged in this task and inquired, “What 
are we doing this for? Does the Captain think our 
feet will slip?’’ 

The sailor looked at the boy almost pityingly and 
replied, “The decks will be slippery enough, my lad, 
before we’re done with those Jackies to-day.” 


336 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


Amos’s pale face became still paler as he under- 
stood what was implied, but he asked no further 
questions. It was plain even to the boy that serious 
work was just ahead. 

For a moment he thought of his home on the far- 
away shore of Lake Ontario, and there was a lump 
in his throat, as he had a vision of his mother and his 
sister Prudy. Would he ever see them again? How 
many of the crew were likely to come through an en- 
gagement, which, aware as he was of Captain Perry’s 
spirit, he knew would not be a light one ? He wished 
that Hiram was with him. There would be strength 
and comfort in the presence of his elder brother, but 
Hiram had not returned or had not been sent back 
to the Scorpion, and Amos could only conjecture that 
he still was on board the Lawrence, 

The thought reminded him of young Alexander 
Perry. The knowledge which the boy possessed of 
matters pertaining to the navy had been a source of 
surprise to Amos and now he was wondering if in 
his first experience in a real naval engagement, he 
was suffering from any such fears as were sweeping 
over him. But Amos Proper was no coward. His 
voice, when cheers were given, was among the loudest, 
and his hands, though they trembled, never for a mo- 
ment relaxed their grasp upon any of the cables he 
was called upon to handle. 

The American squadron was now moving forward 
under a gentle breeze at less than three knots an 


SAIL HO I 


337 


hour. The very silence itself was impressive, as the 
men of the two hostile fleets waited for the battle, 
which every one believed would be terrible, to be- 
gin. 


CHAPTER XXVIII 


THE BATTLE OF LAKE ERIE 

I T was a quarter of an hour or more afterward! 

when the tension of the sailors and the silence 
that rested over the beautiful lake found a slight re- 
lief. To the men waiting for action the long silence 
and the breathless and unbroken watch maintained 
upon the movements of the enemy ^s fleet were harder 
to bear than the thoughts of the struggle into which 
they were about to enter. 

Suddenly, at this moment from the deck of the De- 
troit the clear note of a bugle sounded and was heard 
by the crew of every vessel. There was something 
sweet as well as tragic in the smooth-toned notes that 
reached the ears of those determined men. It was 
the signal for action! The sound had scarcely died 
away, before all the hands of the British fleet struck 
up the tune to which every Englishman everywhere 
always responds, ‘^Rule, Britannia.’’ 

The music of the bands soon stopped and was fol- 
lowed by the cheers of the crews; and as the Ameri- 
can sailors were not at all slow in their responses, 
and as their own cheers and shouts were mingled 
with those that came across the w^aters there was 
338 


THE BATTLE OP LAKE ERIE 


339 


something in the experience that stirred the heart 
of even Amos Proper, who was almost the youngest 
member of his crew. 

There was just a brief breathing spell after the 
shouts had died away and then there was a boom 
from the deck of the Detroit as the flag-ship flred a 
twenty-four pound shot at the approaching Law- 
rence. 

The American fleet, however, was at least a mile 
and a half distant and when the shot fell short, a 
loud and derisive shout arose from the men on the 
deck of the American flagship. The act had startled 
every man into action, and tense muscles and strained 
expressions of faces were to be seen on every side. 

“Steady, boys, steady!'^ called Captain Perry, who 
was not much more than a boy himself. 

When his men turned to look at him, they saw 
that his dark eyes were glowing under the excitement 
that possessed him, though it still was not strong 
enough to overcome his cool and better judg- 
ment. 

The American line slowly was moving toward the 
line of the British. There was a light wind just 
abeam and it was now only a question of a few 
minutes before the engagement would become gen- 
eral. 

The anxious but determined young captain of the 
Lawrence now repeated the signals to his ships to 
be certain to observe the plan which he had formed 


340 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


and for each vessel to engage the ship to which it had 
been assigned. 

Twenty minutes passed and the wind was still so 
light that the Lawrence had passed only the third 
vessel in the line of the enemy’s fleet. She was now 
almost as near the Queen Charlotte as she was to 
the Detroit. The Niagara was abaft the beam, and 
was at a considerable distance from the other vessels 
in the American squadron. It was then that the first 
gun from the American fleet was fired. Young Ste- 
phen Champlin, commander of the Scorpion, was the 
one to fire the first American gun in the engagement. 
Although no one realized it at the time, he was also 
to be the one to discharge the last gun in the fight. 

The Scorpion^ s other guns now joined in the chorus, 
and then the Lawrence was the next to be heard. 
The resolute young commander, aware that his only 
hope of success lay in a close engagement, had with- 
held the firing of his guns until he had come nearer 
to his enemy. Already several shots from the Brit- 
ish guns had taken effect on the American flagship. 
Indeed, at this time she was beginning to suffer se- 
verely and it was manifest to all in the engagement 
that the British in a measure were centering their 
fire upon the American flagship. It was believed at 
the time that this was done not only in the hope of 
destroying the powerful brig, but also of depriving 
the American ships of the services of their young 
commander. 



1 . 


Thk action now becamk genkral. — Page 341 





t ■ 



i * 



V. 

S. 




I 


I 

» 




/ ■ I • 


» 




y' 


i . 

» 

* 



I 


» 







} 








f 





'k 


f 


\ 


t 








I 


THE BATTLE OP LAKE ERIE 


341 


The action now became general. The little Scor- 
pion and the Ariel were ordered to drop a little far- 
ther back to the rear of the Lawrence. As neither 
of these little boats was protected by bulwarks, it 
was believed that they would suffer less if they were 
stationed in places where the hardest firing would 
not be received. 

As the battle continued, Amos Proper, in the midst 
of his excitement, was aware that the Scorpion was 
not suffering much, although she was doing her ut- 
most to assist the Lawrence, by keeping up a continual 
fire upon the opposing vessels. The roar of the great 
guns, the heavy banks of smoke that slowly were car- 
ried away by the light wind, the shouts of the men, 
the cries of the wounded were now heard on every 
side. No less than thirty-four of the heaviest guns 
in the British fleet were all pouring their destructive 
fire upon the Lawrence. 

Convinced that he still was too far away from the 
Detroit, Captain Perry on his own deck gave orders, 
which were carried by trumpet from deck to deck un- 
til every vessel in the fleet understood, that all the 
vessels were to bear down upon the enemy and join 
in a close combat. 

Captain Elliott, who was in command of the Niag- 
ara, — the brig, which was next in importance to the 
Lawrence of the entire American fleet, — was the first 
to send this order, but he did not obey it himself. 
He had the ablest crew in the entire fleet, and his 


342 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


vessel, the Niagara, was the swiftest. What his aid, 
at this time, might have meant to the desperate young 
commander, no one can understand; but for some 
strange reason Captain Elliott remained far away. 

Undaunted, however, the commander, from the 
deck of the Lawrence was now steadily firing upon 
the Detroit and his men were struggling desper- 
ately. The flag-ship still was bearing the brunt of 
the battle. Contending with a force twice as large as 
his own Perry fought desperately for two hours, 
helped only by the little Scorpion and Ariel and by 
an occasional shot from the far-away Caledonia, 
which occasionally was striving to aid Captain Perry 
in the midst of her own close struggle with the 
Hunter. 

The Lawrence had suffered almost beyond descrip- 
tion. Her sails were in shreds, her rigging had 
nearly all been shot away, and splinters were almost 
all that remained of her spars, while most of her guns 
had been dismounted by the terrible fire of several 
of the enemy’s fleet. 

On the deck the scene was even more awful. When 
the British had fired their first shot. Captain Perry 
had on his decks one hundred and three officers and 
crew, who were able to engage in the battle. Of this 
number, twenty-two now were dead and sixty-one 
had been severely wounded. If Amos Proper had 
been on the deck of the flag-ship he might have seen 
that young Alexander Perry, having twice been shot 


THE BATTLE OF LAKE ERIE 


343 


through the hat was finally struck in his side by a 
splinter, and had fallen to the deck as if he were 
dead. It was not long, however, before the lad re- 
covered and was not the least active of the crew of 
the brave little brig. 

Lieutenant Yarnall had sought out Captain Perry 
not long before this time, and had it not been for 
his uniform he scarcely would have been recognized 
by his commander. The young lieutenant’s nose 
had swelled to such an enormous size after it had 
been struck by one of the large splinters that his ap- 
pearance was more like that of a man who had been 
crushed than of one who was still able to engage in 
a battle. 

^^All the officers on my division are cut down!” 
he shouted, ‘^Can I have some others?” 

The men were given him, hut in a few minutes 
the young lieutenant again came to his captain, 
bleeding and wounded afresh, with the same re- 
quest. 

“I have no more officers to furnish you,” said 
Captain Perry. ^‘You must endeavor to make out 
by yourself!” 

Young Lieutenant Yarnall said no more. Al- 
though he had been three times wounded, he still 
remained on the deck and he himself directed every 
shot from his battery. Others of the officers were 
dead or dying. 

The scene was too horrible even to attempt to de- 


344 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


scribe. Groans and cries and shouts and calls were 
mingled with the roar of the great guns. 

In this time of stress and peril, the young Captain 
was troubled most of all by the failure of the 
Niagara — the swiftest and best equipped vessel in 
his fleet — to come to his aid. At this time the 
Niagara was far from the scene of battle. The Cale- 
donia, which had been assigned to fight the Queen 
Charlotte, had left her line and Captain Elliott after- 
ward explained that he thought his orders were to 
remain “within a half-cable length’’ of his special an- 
tagonist. If he had followed her to the place where 
she was fighting instead of remaining a half-cable 
length from her regular place in the British line, 
doubtless he would have prevented part of the suffer- 
ing that occurred on board the Lawrence. 

There were some who believed that there were more 
evil motives in the head of the American captain, 
and that he was waiting until the flag-ship should sur- 
render or go down, and in this manner the fleet would 
be deprived of her young leader, when he himself 
would have assumed command, and if a victory should 
be won, the credit would be his own. Indeed, under 
the freshening breeze, the Niagara, instead of coming 
to the aid of the Lawrence now bore away toward the 
head of the British line, passing the American flag- 
ship to the windward and leaving her still exposed to 
the uninterrupted fire from the vessels that were en- 
gaging her. The Niagara, however, was now entering 


THE BATTLE OF LAKE ERIE 


345 


into the struggle and returning the fire of three of 
the British fleet which attacked her. 

Captain Elliott and his brig were now about a half- 
mile distant, abreast of the larboard beam, from the 
Lawrence, which was lying helpless. Captain Perry 
had fought as long as the vessel could stay afloat. 
More than two hours, almost single-handed, he had 
been contending against fearful odds. With officers 
dead, sailors wounded, and his vessel now helpless, 
he had himself fired the last gun of the brave little 
flag-ship. 

On deck were only fourteen men remaining un- 
hurt, and only nine of this number were seamen. 
What should the young captain do? To continue the 
struggle at such fearful odds was worse than hope- 
less; but as he looked up, he still saw the blue flag 
on which were the words of brave Captain Lawrence, 
‘^DON’T GIVE UP THE SHIP.’’ From his deck, 
too, he saw the Niagara, still fresh, still swift and 
apparently uninjured. Up to this time she had been 
so far away from the scene of action that she had 
been out of all danger. 

Abruptly and yet coolly, as if he were engaged in 
a small task in his own home. Captain Perry drew 
off his blue nankeen jacket, such as the ordinary sea- 
men wore, and quietly put on his uniform. Was the 
young commander thinking of the outcome? Was 
he preparing to receive the surrender of Admiral 
Nelson’s brave helper. Captain Barclay, as befitted a 


346 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


man of his rank. Quietly, though the sound of the 
guns was still all about him, the young commander 
ordered his boat to be lowered. Turning to his lieu- 
tenant he said, “Yarnall, I’ll leave the Lawrence with 
discretionary powers to you. Hold out or surrender, 
as your judgment and the circumstances shall dic- 
tate.” 

At the top of what was left of the masts the stars 
and stripes were floating, and though the flag had 
been shot through and through it was still shaking 
its defiance at the British gunboats. The great blue 
banner, however, with the words of the dying Law- 
rence still showing plainly, was taken by Perry on 
board the little boat, for when he was about ready to 
cast off he had suddenly bethought him of the pen- 
nant, and called to one of the sailors to roll it up 
and toss it to him. 

Captain Perry was now standing in the barge. 
With him were four of the Lawrence^ s crew and his 
younger brother, Alexander. Soon after the little 
boat started on its way toward the Niagara it became 
manifest that the British were aware of the daring 
young captain’s attempt. Many of their guns were 
at once trained upon him. As the little barge pro- 
ceeded steadily on its way all about it the waters were 
splashing from the balls from the enemy’s guns. 

Captain Perry’s oarsmen begged him to be seated, 
and not expose himself unnecessarily to the danger. 
The excited young Captain, however, refused until 


THE BATTLE OP LAKE ERIE 


347 


at last his men declared they would turn back to 
the Lawrence unless he did as they besought him. 
Then it was that the young commander took his seat 
and the boat once more proceeded on its way. 

At the gangplank of the Niagara, Captain Perry 
came face to face with Captain Elliott. Perry's face 
was black from the smoke of the battle, hut the black- 
ness could not conceal the determination that was 
expressed there. 

‘^How goes the day?" inquired Captain Elliott. 

^‘Bad enough," replied Captain Perry. ‘‘Why are 
those gunboats so far away?" he demanded abruptly. 

“I'll bring them up." 

“Do so!" 

It is only justice to the departing captain to re- 
late that from this time his activity and zeal were 
all that his commander could desire. 

Hastily looking about him Captain Perry studied 
for a moment the condition of the Niagara and then 
without delay instantly ordered his blue banner to 
he run up and gave the signal for close action. 

Meanwhile the former flagship had been suffering 
even more than has been described, and at last, for 
the sake of saving the lives of the few men who re- 
mained on board, Lieutenant Yarnall struck his col- 
ors. A great shout from the British fleet greeted this 
act, although it is said that the wounded on the deck 
of the Lawrence, when they heard and asked the 
meaning of the distant cheers and learned what the 


348 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


cause was, cried out, ‘^Sink the ship ! Sink the ship ! 
Sink the ship 

It is a pleasure to relate that later these very men 
were greeted by their commander on the deck of his 
old flag-ship. 

Captain Perry’s plan now was to break the British 
line and he himself led in the attempt. So close 
had he passed to the Lady Provost and the Chippewa 
on his larboard, and the Detroit and Queen Charlotte 
and the Hunter on his starboard, that the shot of a 
pistol could have been received on deck. Captain 
Perry was now pouring in tremendous broadsides to 
the right and left and had double-shotted his guns. 
Ranging slightly ahead he rounded to and once more 
raked the Detroit and the Queen Charlotte, which 
now, by some accident had become foul of each 
other. The other vessels also were now joining in 
the engagement and for a few minutes the flring 
was so terrific that scarcely a vessel was to be seen 
in the cloud of smoke that rested on the scene of 
battle. 

Eight minutes after Captain Perry dashed through 
the British line the Detroit struck her colors ! 
Quickly from every vessel in the British squadron, 
except the Little Belt and Chippeiva, which tried to 
escape to leeward, came the signal of surrender. The 
attempt of these smaller vessels to get away, however, 
was unsuccessful, for Captain Champlin in the Scor- 
pion and Captain Holdup with the Trippe, chased the 


THE BATTLE OF LAKE ERIE 


349 


fleeing boats, and soon brought them back to their 
surrendered companions. 

It was now three o’clock in the afternoon. The 
roar of the great guns had ceased. The heavy blue 
smoke slowly was being driven away by the gentle 
breeze. Only now was it possible to see how com- 
pletely the two fleets had been interlocked. 

It was true, the American flagship had struck her 
colors, but she had not been boarded by the British 
sailors when the Detroit surrendered. 

What a feeling was in the heart of young Captain 
Perry, and in that of every one of his men! Never 
before in the history of the world had an entire British 
fleet been captured! 

Waiting only until he was convinced that the vic- 
tory was certain and complete. Captain Perry drew 
out an old letter from his pocket and placing it upon 
his naval cap, wrote upon the back of it a dispatch 
to General Harrison, which the world will never for- 
get: 

‘‘We have met the enemy and they are ours; two 
ships, two brigs, one schooner, and one sloop. Yours 
with great respect and esteem, 0. H. Perbt.” 

Our own interests, however, are not only concerned 
with the wonderful success of the brave young com- 
mander, but also with the experiences that came to 
some of our young friends, a part of whom were en- 
gaged in this famous battle of Lake Erie. 


CHAPTER XXIX 


CONCLUSION 

T he morning of October 25th dawned clear and 
cool. Already most of the leaves had fallen 
from the branches of the great trees of the forest 
and such as still remained were russet-brown in 
color, harmonizing with the changes of the late fall 
all along the shores of Lake Ontario. 

On the high bluff not far from the Proper home- 
stead a little group of people were busily engaged in 
completing the work on what to a casual observer 
would seem to be a redoubt or some earthwork thrown 
up by soldiers. 

Amos Proper with a shovel in his hand was work- 
ing beside his sister Prudy, who, dressed in bloomers, 
wa‘s taking her share in the common task. In ap-. 
pearance the brother and sister now so closely re- 
sembled each other that it would have been difficult 
for a stranger to have distinguished Amos from his 
sister. The striking likeness in form and feature was 
made still more impressive by the fact that Prudy ’s 
dark hair was coiled beneath a sailor’s cap, which her 
younger brother had brought with him upon his re- 
turn from Lake Erie. 


350 


CONCLUSION 


351 


Not far from the workers stood Hiram Proper, but 
not the Hiram as we knew him in the early part of 
this story. The young sailor in the terrible battle of 
Lake Erie had suffered the loss of his left arm, andl 
even now the frightful wound was not entirely healed. 
His interest in the task of his brother and sister, 
however, was keen, and occasionally he smiled 
as he marked the eager expression on the face of 
each. 

Not the least interested member of the party was 
the dog. More, which turning frequently from his 
pursuit of the rabbits in the brush, or the partridges, 
that only lazily fled at his approach, noisily voiced his 
enthusiasm. 

There!’’ exclaimed Prudy at last throwing down 
her shovel. think that will do.” 

‘^What do you expect it to do?” inquired Hiram 
with a smile. 

‘‘It will teach the British sailors to keep their dis- 
tance. ’ ’ 

“Of course it will,” joined in Amos. “They won’t 
know the difference from the lake. Prudy says that 
young ensign of the Prince Regent has been here 
three or four times while we were away, and we don ’t 
propose to have him coming again.” 

For some reason Prudy ’s face flushed at the words 
of her brother and Hiram glanced at her in sur- 
prise. Was the visit of the young British ensign one 
of peace or war? Whatever his suspicion may have 


352 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


been he did not refer to it, however, as he said, 
sorry I cannot help you drag up your ^gun/ 

“It isn’t as heavy as it looks,” laughed Amos. 
“And I guess I can almost manage it alone. Fa- 
ther will help me when he comes down to the 
shore. ’ ’ 

“There’s the Prince Regent now!” exclaimed Hi- 
ram suddenly as he pointed to the open waters on the 
lake. Instantly his companions looked in the direc- 
tion indicated and could plainly see the little sail far 
away toward the horizon. 

“We must get our ^gun’ mounted right away!” 
said Amos excitedly. 

“I’ll help you,” suggested Prudy and in a brief 
time the sturdy pair had their “gun” securely 
mounted on the redoubt which they had built. 

This “gun” appeared to be at least a sixteen- 
pounder. Painted black, its long muzzle pointed 
threateningly toward the lake, it might well have 
halted the approach of any hostile party that chanced 
to discover it. The “gun,” however, was merely a 
part of a maple log, some fourteen feet in length, 
shaped in the form of a cannon and painted to re- 
semble its color. The “bore” had been fashioned by 
the aid of a large auger and some chisels, and to an 
observer from the lake it presented a most threaten- 
ing attitude. 

“They’ll find out your trick, I’m afraid,” laughed 
Hiram. 


CONCLUSION 


358 


“They won’t unless they come ashore,” declared 
Amos, “and I don’t believe they’ll do that.” 

“Perhaps they’ll come when they see your gun, the 
way the British officers came one by one from their 
ship in Barclay’s fleet to surrender to Captain Perry 
when that battle on Lake Erie was ended,” laughed 
Hiram. 

“That must have been a great sight!” exclaimed 
Amos eagerly. “I wish I had been on the Lawrence 
with you.” 

“It’s lucky for you you weren’t there during the 
fight,” said Hiram soberly, as he glanced at his shoul- 
der. “I wasn’t hit until just before the British sur- 
rendered, but I could see what was going on when the 
British officers came on deck.” 

“Great!” shouted Amos. 

“Yes,” said Hiram quietly. “It was great, but not 
so great as the way in which Captain Perry treated 
those men. He stood there on the after part of the 
deck and when the men came to him to hand him their 
swords, they had to pick their way across the deck 
over the dead bodies. Captain Perry told every one 
of them, when they stood there with the hilts of their 
swords held toward him, to keep their weapons. He 
asked after Barclay and he made every one of them 
feel that the young skipper not only could whip the 
British at their own game, but that he could show 
them a trick as a Christian gentleman, too.” 

“That was great,” joined in Prudy warmly. 


354 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


‘‘Of course it was/’ ackno ivledged Hiram. “But 
the sight I never shall forget was at sunset that won- 
derful day of September tenth. The sky was scarlet, 
and it almost seemed as if the wind had died away 
or was holding its breath. That was the time when 
the dead were buried. Every dead seaman was 
wrapped in a shroud, and with a cannon ball at his 
feet, every man was dropped, one at a time, into the 
still water.” 

• ‘ What was done with the bodies of the officers ? ’ ’ 

“They were buried the next day on the shore of 
South Bass Island. The same service was used for 
the British and Americans. Captain Perry, as soon 
as the fleet had surrendered and he had returned 
their swords to the officers, laid down upon the deck, 
right among his dead sailors and with a good many 
of the prisoners, too, still on the deck, and went to 
sleep. He was almost exhausted. Indeed, I saw him 
myself with his hands folded over his chest, but he 
still held onto his drawn sword. He was almost ex- 
hausted as I said, for you know he was sick when the 
battle began.” 

“How did the ships look the next day?” asked 
Prudy. 

“The two flagships,” explained Hiram, “were al- 
most shot to pieces, — almost as badly as the crews. 
You see, we lost about one hundred and twenty-three 
men, while the British lost about one hundred and 
thirty-five. ’ ’ 


CONCLUSION 


355 


‘‘The Scorpion lost only two men/’ said Amos 
proudly. 

“That’s right,” acknowledged Hiram, “but you 
weren’t in the thick of the fight the way we were on 
the Lawrence and Niagara. That makes me think of 
that picture I saw at Niagara on my way home.” 

“What was the picture?” asked Prudy. 

“Why, it was a picture of John Bull dressed as a 
king and sitting in a chair with his hands pressed 
upon his stomach as if he was suffering a good deal 
of pain from having eaten a pear, which the picture 
called ‘Perry.’ Queen Charlotte in the picture was 
coming toward him with a bottle labeled ‘Perry’ in 
her hand. The cork of the bottle had been drawn 
and foam was coming out and in the foam were the 
names of the commanders of the American officers 
in the Battle of Lake Erie. The Queen is saying, 
‘Johnny, won’t you have some more Perry?’ But 
John Bull, twisting all about in his pain, answers, 
‘ Oh ! Perry ! Curses with Perry ! One disaster after 
another. I’m not half recovered of the bloody nose 
I got in the Boxing-Match.” 

“I suppose he was talking then about that fight 
with the Boxer laughed Amos. 

“Possibly he was,” said Hiram, “but the thing that 
pleased me most wasn’t the picture, it was the song 
that went with it.” And he began to sing, — 

“Bold Barclay one day to Proctor did say, 

I’m tired of Jamaica and Cherry, 


356 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


So let us go down to that new floating town, 

And get some American Perry! 

Oh, cheap American Perry, 

Most pleasant American Perry, 

We need only all bear down, knock, and call, 

And we’ll have the American Perry.” 

“Commander Barclay wasn’t so much of a coward 
as Proctor was, anyway!” said Amos. “When we 
knocked the fleet to pieces, of course we could do 
more for General Harrison than we could before, but 
I never shall forget how Proctor and Tecumseh got 
out of Malden and the way we chased them clear up 
to the banks of the Thames.” 

“Yes,” said Hiram, “we put an end to Tecumseh ’s 
confederacy — ” 

“Of course we did,” broke in Amos, “for Tecumseh 
was killed in that battle of the Thames.” 

“Yes, and his death took the heart out of the In- 
dians. Tecumseh, they say, was trying to get Proctor 
to make a stand long before he did, and if he had — ” 

“He wouldn’t have been any better off,” again 
broke in Amos. 

“Perhaps not,” acknowledged Hiram. “It was 
common talk that Proctor had not expected any pur- 
suit by land, and I don’t suppose he ever dreamed 
that Captain Perry would leave his fleet and join the 
army in the chase. They cut the bridges down be- 
fore us and after they found out we were on their 
trail they even set fire to a house up there that had 
in it more than one thousand muskets.” 


CONCLUSION 


357 


‘^But we put out the fire and saved every gun/^ 
suggested Amos. 

^^Yes, we did/’ acknowledged Hiram. ‘‘When 
we got to fighting, however, we had not been at work 
five minutes before the whole force of British soldiers 
gave way and we made the most of them prison- 
ers.” 

“It’s a pity that we didn’t get General Proctor,” 
exclaimed Amos. “That would have helped to make 
up for the loss of Detroit and the way General Hull 
surrendered, a year before. The Indians put up a 
good deal better fight than the white men did.” 

“They had more at stake,” exclaimed Hiram. 
“When Oshawahnah led his warriors around to the 
rear of the place where Tecumseh was fighting, the 
Indians all thought that their own allies were turning 
against them and of course, after the death of Tecum- 
seh, there wasn’t anything more they could do. 
It certainly seems to have been a pretty good year 
for the United States for the lucky Enterprise has 
taken the Boxer, it was reported at Niagara.” 

“Yes,” said Amos. “The fight was five days be- 
fore our battle on Lake Erie. I wonder if the Cap- 
tain of the Enterprise will be treated by Congress 
the way our men were. You know Pennsylvania has 
voted a gold medal to Captain Perry, and Congress 
has voted one to Perry and Elliott too, and they voted 
extra pay for every one of the officers and to give a 
sword to every midshipman and sailing master.” 


358 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


afraid not/’ said Hiram. “The report was 
that both captains were killed in the engagement.” 

The gun was now properly placed in position, point- 
ing threateningly in the direction of the Prince Re- 
gent, which was still far away. “I don’t believe that 
sloop is making for this point at all,” said Amos after 
a long look at the distant sail. 

“Yes, it is,” said Prudy positively. 

“How do you know?” demanded Amos,' as he 
looked sharply at his sister. 

“I’m sure it is,” replied the girl without making 
any explanation. 

“Well,” said Amos, “it’s far enough away not to 
give us any trouble for an hour or two anyway. 
Hiram,” he added, as he turned to his elder brother, 
“didn’t you ever hear anything from Simeon?” 

“Not a word,” replied Hiram. “You know we 
waited a couple of hours after you left us on that 
mound when you started toward Presque Isle, and the 
Indians soon began to make such a powwow that we 
all decided that we would leave the place one at a 
time, and that every man should take his own chances. 
I have told you about how a dozen or more of them 
got me and took me with them in the night across 
the lake to turn me over to the British. I guess I 
was a pretty good prisoner, for pretty soon they set 
me to work to help paint some of their ships and after 
a little while they didn’t keep a very close watch upon 
me, so that when I took a boat and sailed across the 


CONCLUSION 


359 


lake they weren’t on the lookout for me. It was 
lucky that I got away just then, for if I hadn’t, I 
wouldn’t have had anything to do in that battle of 
Lake Erie.” 

It was on Prudy’s tongue to express her wish that 
he had not succeeded in his attempt to escape. She 
glanced at Hiram’s shoulder and then at the face of 
her brother and was silent. His own feeling appar- 
ently was different from hers. 

“Sir Walter got through all right,” suggested 
Amos, “and found his way into General Harrison’s 
army. I wonder if he didn ’t stop to tell the redskins 
some of his big stories,” laughed the boy. “What is 
his real name?” 

“I never heard what his true name is,” replied Hi- 
ram. “He was a live'lad and willing to do his part 
even if he did talk too much with his tongue.” 

“Do you suppose that Gordon has been ex- 
changed?” 

“I haven’t heard anything about it, but it is more 
than likely that he has been.” 

“I should like to see that old British Jackie, Tom, 
again,” said Amos. “He was good to me when I 
was ‘pressed’ into the service. He was the best 
Jackie I saw at York or anywhere else. Do you 
think,” he added, “that Simeon ever got through the 
Indian lines?” 

“He wasn’t the kind of a fellow who would be 
likely to do that,” said Hiram shaking his head. 


360 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


‘^The poor chap seemed almost to have lost his head 
in his terrible experience with the press-gang.’’ 

“Well, we’re all home now anyway,” declared 
Prudy, “and if we can keep the crew of the Prince 
Regent from landing here any more, we won’t have 
anything to complain of this winter. We have enough 
to eat and none of you will have to be away from 
home before next spring, and maybe the war will be 
ended before that time.” 

“Don’t you believe any such thing!” declared 
Amos promptly. “The redcoats aren’t the kind that 
give up very easily, and now that we have started, 
we aren’t going to give in yet awhile either. You 
just wait!” 

“Look yonder,” suggested Hiram pointing once 
more toward the open lake. “That sloop, whether it 
is the Prince Regent or not is heading this way.” 

“That’s what she is!” said Amos, his excitement 
instantly increasing. “What do you suppose she 
wants anyway?” 

“Oh, probably she’d like to get some of the sup- 
plies we have in the cellar. It would be like Sir 
James Yeo’s men to try to strip their enemy along 
the shore of their winter supplies, if they could.” 

“I don’t believe they would do such a thing any 
quicker than the Americans would if they were on 
the Canadian side of the lake!” spoke up Prudy. 

“What’s the matter with you, Prudy?” demanded 
Amos. “Are you a Tory?” 


CONCLUSION 


361 


^‘You know better than that!” replied the girl, 
though for some unaccountable reason she still seemed 
to be somewhat confused. 

The interest of the little party, however, was now 
centered upon the far-away sail, which undoubtedly 
was approaching. There was a strong breeze blow- 
ing and many of the little waves of Lake Ontario 
were capped with white. The sloop, manifestly swift 
and well handled, was now so near that her motions, 
as she ran before the wind, could be plainly seen. 

“Here comes father!” suddenly said Amos as Mr. 
Proper joined the group and looked anxiously at the 
approaching gunboat. 

“We’ll give them a warm reception, boys,” he said 
in a low voice as he turned with a smile of amusement 
and looked at the gun which Prudy and Amos had 
placed upon the earthwork they had erected. “I 
wish that was iron and not maple! We’d teach these 
thieving British Jackies that they couldn’t come ashore 
and take our winter supplies.” 

“She’s coming about now!” suddenly exclaimed 
Hiram. “Look at her run up into the wind. She’s 
a beauty and whoever is handling her understands 
his business.” 

“See there!” joined in Amos. “They are doing 
just what I thought they would ! See that little boat, 
putting off? They’re going to send a party ashore.” 

“Get your guns,” suddenly ordered Mr. Proper. 
“See that the priming is all right in every one of 


362 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


them! You too, Prudy! Take your gun and come 
with us.’’ 

Startled by the words of their father, all three 
joined him as he led the way toward the bushes in the 
rear of the place where the cannon had been mounted. 

^^When that little yawl comes nearer the shore, we’ll 
march past by fours,” declared Mr. Proper with a 
smile. We ’ll go in and out and back and forth 
among these bushes and every little while we’ll step 
out in view so that the men can see us and perhaps 
they’ll think we have a force of soldiers stationed here. 
They’ll be more likely to, if they get sight of your 
guns,” he added. “We may be able to keep them 
from landing.” 

The “maneuvers” were speedily begun. It was an 
unusual march that followed. The four “soldiers” 
advancing into the clear space would speedily move 
across it to the bushes on the opposite side and then 
turning swiftly would repeat the operation. Occa- 
sionally the way was varied by an appearance from the 
middle of the bushes instead of from the end. By 
running at their utmost speed when they were con- 
cealed from sight, and then marching more leisurely 
across the open space, Mr. Proper was trying to 
impress the British in the approaching boat that 
more men were guarding the point than could be 
seen. 

“The yawl is going to land,” said Amos more ex- 
cited than his older companions, as he pointed to the 


CONCLUSION 


363 


little boat which now was not more than one hun- 
dred feet from the shore. 

“ I ’ll go up on the bank where the gun is, ’ ’ said Mr. 
Proper. “Let me take your cap,” he added turning 
to Prudy. “It may look a little more as if a real 
garrison had been established here.” 

Bidding his children remain behind the bushes in 
readiness for a call, if help should be required, Mr. 
Proper advanced and shouted to the men in the yawl, 
“Ahoy, there! Who are you and what do you 
want ? ’ ’ 

“We want to talk to you,” said the young officer 
rising in the stern of the boat. 

“Prudy,” exclaimed Amos in a low voice, as he 
turned to his sister, “do you see who that is in that 
boat?” 

“Yes,” replied his sister quietly. 

“It’s that young ensign that came here when the 
press-gang took me ! ” 

“He isn’t an ensign any longer,” said Prudy. 
“He has been promoted.” 

“How did you know?” demanded her brother in 
surprise. 

Prudy, however, did not reply, nor did Amos learn 
at the time of the fact tha.t the young ensign had 
been the writer of the strange letter of which he him- 
self had been the innocent bearer weeks before, when 
he had returned from Sackett’s Harbor. 

Indeed it was not until the following spring that 


364 


THE BOY SAILORS OP 1812 


he also learned of an occasional visit made by the 
young sailor to the Proper homestead and that forage 
had not been his only purpose in coming. As these 
visits, however, are parts of another tale, their mean- 
ing and purpose must be passed over in the present 
narrative. 

‘ ‘ Tell what you want where you are ! ’ ’ Mr. Proper 
was now calling to the young officer. 

‘‘I can’t,^’ replied the man in the yawl. 

“You’ll have to,” commanded Mr. Proper. “If 
you or your men make a move to come ashore, I’ll 
order my gunner to fire upon you.” As he spoke 
Mr. Proper pointed toward the great “gun” near 
which he w^as standing. 

Apparently for the first time the British sailors be- 
came aware of the threatening cannon. There was 
a hurried consultation before the young ensign 
called, — “Whose battery is that? When was it 
erected? What is that gun planted there for?” 

“It is specially designed for the needs of British 
sailors,” retorted Mr. Proper. “If you don’t believe 
it, try to come ashore and we’ll prove it to you.” 

“I don’t w^ant to fight,” shouted the young officer. 
“I have just come to — ” 

“Then if you don’t want to fight,” broke in Mr. 
Proper, “the best thing for you is to go back to the 
Prince Regent and leave this part of the lake. If 
we find that she is here an hour from now, we shall 
train this gun upon her. The sooner you go back 


CONCLUSION 


365 


and report, the better it will be for you and for every- 
body concerned.’’ 

‘^If you fire on us, you will suffer more than we 
will in the end.” 

“ So I hear you say. That remains to be seen, how- 
ever. We were with Perry on Lake Erie and learned 
how to smash a British fleet.” 

‘‘If I go back to the Prince Regent and then come 
with a flag of truce, will you receive me?” 

“Yes, if you come with only two men.” 

The young officer instantly seated himself and or- 
dered his men to row back to the man-of-war. 

It was not long, however, before the yawl again 
was seen approaching, with the young officer still in 
command but with only two men rowing. 

The yawl grounded upon the beach about two hun- 
dred feet distant from the “battery,” and as Amos 
and Prudy, who now had resumed her sailor’s cap, 
and their father were waiting to receive the visitor, 
the young officer approached Mr. Proper respectfully 
and said, “Did you say that you were with Perry on 
Lake Erie?” 

“We did,” replied Mr. Proper grimly. 

“Do you know that was the first time an entire 
British fleet was ever taken?” 

“It won’t be the last,” broke in Amos, “if you 
don’t get off the lakes pretty soon! We’re just be- 
ginning to learn how!” 

“Be quiet, Amos,” said his father sternly. “It 


366 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


will be time enough to boast when the war shall be 
ended. What do you want?” he demanded as he 
turned again to his visitor. 

The young sailor did not reply for a moment as he 
was looking perplexedly at Prudy, who for some rea- 
son apparently was eager to retire from the shore. 
Indeed before another word was spoken she turned 
abruptly to the woods and disappeared in the direc- 
tion of her home. 

The young officer still apparently somewhat per- 
plexed turned to Mr. Proper and said, didn’t 
know that you had two sons who looked so much 
alike. ’ ’ 

“I haven’t,” answered Mr. Proper grimly, ‘though 
I don’t understand how you know what my name is, 
nor why you have come here.” 

^‘If you will let me talk with you alone, I’ll ex- 
plain,” replied the officer. “You have a cannon on 
the shore and according to what I saw from the lake 
you must have a little garrison here, though I don’t 
understand why the Yankees ever thought it worth 
while to establish a post here.” 

“The British have landed here several times,” ex- 
claimed Mr. Proper dryly. “If you want to talk to 
me, come up the beach, but we must keep within 
range of our guns.” 

The two men 'withdrew a short distance, and al- 
though Amos listened intently, he was unable to hear 
a word that was spoken. In a brief time the inter- 


CONCLUSION 


367 


view was ended and to the surprise of Amos his 
father bade the visitor come with him to his house. 

It is true Mr. Proper conducted the young officer 
by a route from which the sight of the ‘ ‘ cannon, * * and 
the ‘‘post’’ could not be had and that he ordered 
Amos to remain on the beach. 

An hour elapsed before Mr. Proper and his young 
visitor returned to the beach, where the latter speedily 
embarked and was rowed back to the waiting Prince 
JRegent, which had been cruising on and off awaiting 
his return. 

“What did he want?” inquired Amos of his father 
after the visitor had departed. 

“I can’t explain to you now.” 

“Does Prudy know?” 

“You’ll have to ask her,” replied Mr. Proper 
quietly, though a brief smile appeared for a moment 
on his face as he spoke. 

Aware that an explanation would not be given, 
Amos said no more. 

The lad remained waiting upon the beach until the 
Prince Regent disappeared in the distance and then 
he returned to his house. 

Whether or not Prudy explained the purpose of 
the young British officer in his visit or indeed knew 
anything of what he had said to her father, Amos 
did not find out, at least at the time. Indeed the lad 
did not again refer to what he soon discovered was 
not meant for him to know. 


368 


THE BOY SAILORS OF 1812 


There were, however, no idle days for Amos or his 
father. The prospect of a speedy end to the war was 
not bright and convinced that they would be sum- 
moned again to service on land or on the lakes in the 
coming spring they W'ere compelled to devote them- 
selves day and night to the labors of the farm. 

Hiram Proper ^s condition did not permit of his do- 
ing much work, even on his own place, and conse- 
quently his father and brothers were compelled to 
look out not only for the tasks on their own clearing, 
but also on those of the wounded sailor brother. 

The life, however, was not entirely filled with labor 
and peril. There were evenings when before the 
huge fire-place in the Proper homestead the entire 
family would be assembled. There, while corn was 
being popped, or the maple syrup boiled there were 
some merry times. Whatever the feeling of the house- 
hold may have been concerning the dire possibilities 
of the coming year, their chief interest centered in 
the stories which Hiram and Amos related, in re- 
sponse to the neverfailing demands of the family, of 
the stirring experiences in which they had shared on 
Lake Erie. Indeed the name of Captain Oliver Haz- 
ard Perry was almost as familiar in the Proper home 
as was that of any member of the family. 

As the days passed and occasional reports were re- 
ceived of the fame which the young Rhode Islander 
had won in his perilous fight and the rewards which 
were heaped upon him from one end of the land to 


CONCLUSION 


369 


the other, in the songs which were sung, and in the 
accounts of the addresses which were made by some 
of the most eloquent speakers in the little country, 
which for the second time was struggling for its in- 
dependence, the Proper family felt almost as if they 
shared in the experiences. Had not two members of 
the family been active in the wonderful fight? Had 
not one of them suffered? Had not those who had 
fought and those who had remained at home also a 
share? Was there not flying from a rude pole, which 
Amos had erected near the house, another large blue 
banner, on which were exhibited in letters of white 
muslin a foot in length, the never-to-be-forgotten 
words: DON^T GIVE UP THE SHIP? Had not 
Amos ended every story he had to tell of the bravery 
of the fleet by reporting the letter which Commodore 
Perry wrote General Harrison when the victory had 
been won, — “We have met the enemy and they are 
ours; two ships, two brigs, one schooner, and one 
sloop. Yours with great respect and esteem, 0. H. 
Perry. ’ ’ 

Were the members of the Proper family mistaken? 
Was not a share of the wonderful victory theirs by 
right? And does not every American boy, whether 
his lines be cast in 1813 or a century later, also feel 
that a share of the pride of his country justly felt in 
Perry wonderful achievement belongs also by right 
to him? 


THE END 





\ 

I 

« 


1 

\ 

\ 

I 

0 

{ 

i 

i 

i 

1 

\ 

! 

i 

t 

I 

9 

« 

> 

} 

i 


I 






f • it \ ^ . 


h. 






- ’ / - i 


.> ■* -v' 'w . V'^i 


JV; 


'•A 






.*t; *i 

W^':' ■ 




4 - 


/V -t-Ji 

iVv m/ 




.4 


V ^ 


^^0^ .■: 'vm 


Wwi.' 


,N 


V t 





1 ^ i 

■4 ’ 



f ■: 


{ > 


;(■.• 


' • ' r 

•< ^ 'W*!*:.-* * aa '^i. 

*■ :■:- ' ■’ 

. .. • ?. « * - JM.v'^J 


‘v 


1 . 






; ■ . • .4 ^ 




f * 


J 4 


'■ ;'/*■ 




% , 


;} 


'■ i' ..■■ 



* * -4 C *,^ J ► 








4 ' 


V ’ 




■■'■ -'vi VVM 




. , ,■ ■ r -Hh 

■ lu 









* 






I ' * 

% t 




4 



I 







« » 



I . 


* 4 



* 



!■ vV':-.,v^^%' ■'•-5 


» '• ■' 



















^V'v' ■ '.^'-Vyc'’ 



■’('^’''V*-'?' '■ ■^■''! 4 ''^^ Pi '■■.»•, ■= ' . 


• f • 

h 




4 


• I 


>*lV: 


/ -v'-' '•’’yA - 

< v v‘^/^ • 




Vl'CVy.-^ ' * ■ 

T" ' ;<a 1 t^^'K *^ 4 -* 




^'V ■ mi' 

•vr.<k' 4 * M. . ^sCi , >'• •■ ’ 

IK: ;. " • . ; 



'«i 


f ' 


V. 


iVV , 



i 


^:^wv: -y ’ . MIMK / ' / 


7 .t 




I < 



-y 

» 4 ^r.' • ^ : • • *'t •, ^ 

lIM* ' ’ •'1 ’ ' V ^ ^ ‘v' *4 ■ 1^' ' / ' ^ ' 

^.7^>f,;y4«rA;V . 


f."* ••¥ i : i,v • • *,1 ' 











f/''- ■ ' »V<^ - - ■ -. . 


' ^ 


R'.’ 

■- V j .>'. 

•r‘ 



■■•' . a:‘ ' ^ 


■ 




: yu\'s: -* 

^ J ^ ' 



:r 




l/‘ 

, T 1 . •'v 
■' . » ? ■ 

. . 1 

! 'V *’ 

7 • ■ 


1 » 

vv 

'j'v > 

; M ;; ; 

• . . : • ' . ' 

/' 

. » 

% . 

»• 

* • • 

.* - , 

» ■ 

«^?8 
. r • • 


> . 

■'■ » 


. 4 ' 

#* 

' « 

■ • ■ ' .L /’ 


■ .^ . •/> . . 

i^’ :'':'^ ’ . 

* :^.' 

^ •' ': y tiT’ • ;f', :•: ■ ’, ■■''■^35 'i 

.^. I '■■' o*'- ■ """■■■ 
■ ^ -.{.l/' V’ 

V mT- ■' 


r. V • -<» • 


r 


■ yn 




fN 


rt.': '. 


I’ 


► ,1 !.• •’• 





t . 


- 'x;*' ■' 


i I 




■ 

■ •- ;.V 


r , 

*■• . -I 




• i-R^r: 

■' 


X •'■' ‘a. 




■ , ■ •■ rR'i 

'-r^' iv. 


'*■> *.''■• ! . , 


• •• 


. ^ : *>••'. .• ■>, 

;^fc! ■ 






•f < 


I •^. 


■f. 


^ ‘ ■ 




* ‘1 < ^ 

' ,1 < •. " ^ 

' 'j 

.^JiL X’i', 






. <. .1 


. /». 



iVa l 




TO :1 




^ ' 4 » * ^. 





’*.• *r *-' » •t * ^’ ' . 

' V V W - ' 




/ . 




LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 


□□□ESb7DEEA 

f, 

'4 



4 


